Home

Yamaha MIXING CONSOLE Musical Instrument User Manual

1. 2 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ST IN 1 amp 5 1 2 7 3 be 3 ste eft lo ox 5 4 ST IN Section _5 5 L 1 5 14 41 55 s 5 USER DEFINED f wf ad o Ls 1 KEYS p 17 5 ss s am _ m E aho aoho zoho zoho solo soho solo I 3 8 30 15 sops ajs 8 _ 30 8 aj am aom lt x lt EN x x la l sofao 40 J 60 ao 60 a0 1 1 1 50 4o 50 40 50 ao 50 49 SO ao 50 50 40 50 ao E s ET 2251 s EI SET EET S ET SER SERT SER ESI ERI SERI
2. OFF 448V ac X12 INPUT PATCH 99 each 4ch zspassng 2 2 amp 22222052 55 BB lt 2 METER INPUT INPUT 1 32 INSERT METER INSERT i SERT a 1 12 INS PAD Gain Reduction v METER IBANG li o li OUTPUT STEREO B H 4 gt METER oume METER x pELAY INSERT 1 0 uif gt METER INSERT INSERT 1 12 E er Wie ae STEREO R 5 H H H ame as stereo master L E aD AD1 12 ATTH RAN DETAY f PAN Keyin gt Group 1 12 13 24 LFE Gain Reduction METER METER Out Meter SIGNALI AUX 1 8 Gain Reduction Out Meter 2 METER METER 2 x o i AUX sq INPUT vo AD AD13 14 i LT Uu 13 14 __ METER o INSERT METER INSERT INSERT ore oe BUS 1 8 Self or Stereo Link 99 0 DIRECT OUT 1 32 ATT H E 679 if pe PEAK 2TR IN L 9 SIGNAL RCA NE 4 ON LEVEL ST IN 1 4 k PAN 5 2 BUS to STEREO ig gt 2 AD 15 vo METER 2TR GAIN 7 809 1 FEH SIGNAL n AUX1 8 RCA i PAN o a gt 4BAND INPUT
3. CHANNEL9 High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 1 EQ G HIGH H INPUT1 2 G HIGH H INPUT2 3 EQ G HIGH H INPUT3 4 G HIGH H INPUT4 5 EQ G HIGH H 5 6 G HIGH H INPUT6 7 EQ G HIGH H 8 EQ G HIGH H INPUT8 9 G HIGH H INPUT9 10 EQ G HIGH H INPUT10 11 G HIGH H INPUT11 12 EQ G HIGH H INPUT12 13 EQ G HIGH H INPUT13 14 EQ G HIGH H INPUT14 15 EQ G HIGH H INPUT15 16 EQ G HIGH H INPUT16 17 EQ G HIGH H INPUT17 18 EQ G HIGH H INPUT18 19 EQ G HIGH H INPUT19 20 EQ G HIGH H INPUT20 21 EQ G HIGH H INPUT21 22 EQ G HIGH H INPUT22 23 EQ G HIGH H INPUT23 24 EQ G HIGH H INPUT24 25 ASSIGN 26 ASSIGN 27 ASSIGN 28 ASSIGN 29 ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 31 NO ASSIGN 32 NO ASSIGN 33 EQ G HIGH L INPUT1 34 EQ G HIGH L INPUT2 35 EQ G HIGH L INPUT3 36 EQ G HIGH L INPUT4 37 G HIGH L INPUT5 38 EQ G HIGH L INPUT6 39 EQ HIGH L 40 EQ G HIGH L INPUT8 41 G HIGH L INPUT9 42 G HIGH L INPUT10 43 G HIGH L INPUT11 44 EQ G HIGH L INPUT12 45 G HIGH L INPUT13 46 G HIGH L INPUT14 47 G HIGH L INPUT15 48 EQ G HIGH L INPUT16 49 EQ G HIGH L INPUT17 50 EQ HIGH L INPUT18 51 EQ G HIGH L INPUT19 52 EQ G HIGH L INPUT
4. High Mid Low 59 NO ASSIGN 60 NO ASSIGN 61 NO ASSIGN 62 NO ASSIGN 63 NO ASSIGN 64 HPF ON INPUT1 65 EQ HPF ON INPUT2 66 EQ HPF ON INPUT3 67 EQ HPF ON INPUT4 68 EQ HPF ON INPUTS 69 EQ HPF ON INPUT6 70 EQ HPF ON 71 EQ HPF ON INPUT8 72 EQ HPF ON INPUT9 73 HPF ON INPUT10 74 INPUT11 75 EQ INPUT12 76 HPF ON INPUT13 77 EQ INPUT14 78 EQ HPF ON INPUT15 79 INPUT16 80 EQ HPF ON INPUT17 81 EQ HPF ON INPUT18 82 EQ HPF ON INPUT19 83 EQ HPF ON INPUT20 84 EQ HPF ON INPUT21 85 EQ HPF ON INPUT22 86 EQ HPF ON INPUT23 87 EQ HPF ON INPUT24 88 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ LPF ON INPUT1 90 EQ LPF ON INPUT2 91 EQ LPF ON INPUT3 92 LPF INPUT4 93 EQ LPF ON INPUTS 94 LPF INPUT6 95 LPF 102 LPF INPUT8 103 EQ LPF ON INPUT9 104 EQ LPF ON INPUT10 105 EQ LPF ON INPUT11 106 EQ LPF ON INPUT12 107 EQ LPF ON INPUT13 108 EQ LPF ON INPUT14 109 EQ LPF ON INPUT15 110 EQ LPF INPUT16 111 EQ LPF INPUT17 112 EQ LPF INPUT18 113 EQ LPF INPUT19 114 LPF ON INPUT20 115 EQ LPF INPUT21 116 EQ LPF ON INPUT22 117 EQ LPF ON INPUT23 118 EQ LPF ON INPUT24
5. 11 High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 1 EQ ATT H INPUT1 2 INPUT2 3 EQ ATT H INPUT3 4 INPUTA 5 EQ ATT H INPUTS 6 EQ ATT H INPUT6 7 EQ ATT H 8 EQ INPUT8 9 EQ ATT H INPUT9 10 EQ ATT H INPUT10 11 ATT H INPUT11 12 EQ ATT H INPUT12 13 EQ ATT H INPUT13 14 EQ ATT H INPUT14 15 EQ ATT H INPUT15 16 EQ ATT H INPUT16 17 EQ ATT H INPUT17 18 EQ ATT H INPUT18 19 EQ ATT H INPUT19 20 EQ ATT H INPUT20 21 EQ ATT H INPUT21 22 EQ ATT H INPUT22 23 EQ ATT H INPUT23 24 EQ ATT H INPUT24 25 ASSIGN 26 ASSIGN 27 ASSIGN 28 ASSIGN 29 ASSIGN 30 55 31 NO ASSIGN 32 NO ASSIGN 33 EQ AIT L INPUT1 34 EQ AIT L INPUT2 35 EQ AIT L INPUT3 36 EQ AIT L INPUTA 37 EQ AIT L INPUTS 38 EQ AIT L INPUT6 39 EQ AIT L 40 EQ AIT L INPUT8 41 EQ AIT L INPUT9 42 EQ AIT L INPUT10 43 ATTL INPUT11 44 ATT L INPUT12 45 ATT L INPUT13 46 L INPUT14 47 EQ AIT L INPUT15 48 EQ AIT L INPUT16 49 EQ AIT L INPUT17 50 EQ AIT L INPUT18 51 EQ AIT L INPUT19 52 EQ AIT L INPUT20 53 EQ ATTL INPUT21 54 EQ ATTL INPUT22 55 EQ ATT L INPUT23 56 EQ ATTL INPUT24 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN
6. CHANNEL13 High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 1 SURROUND LFE H INPUT1 2 SURROUND LFE H INPUT2 3 SURROUND LFE H INPUT3 4 SURROUND LFE H INPUT4 5 SURROUND LFE H INPUTS 6 SURROUND LFE H INPUT6 7 SURROUND LFE H 8 SURROUND LFE H INPUT8 9 SURROUND LFE H INPUT9 10 SURROUND LFE H INPUT10 11 SURROUND LFE H INPUT11 12 SURROUND LFE H INPUT12 13 SURROUND LFE H INPUT13 14 SURROUND LFE H INPUT14 15 SURROUND LFE H INPUT15 16 SURROUND LFE H INPUT16 17 SURROUND LFE H INPUT17 18 SURROUND LFE H INPUT18 19 SURROUND LFE H INPUT19 20 SURROUND LFE H INPUT20 21 SURROUND LFE H INPUT21 22 SURROUND LFE H INPUT22 23 SURROUND LFE H INPUT23 24 SURROUND LFE H INPUT24 25 NO ASSIGN 26 NO ASSIGN 27 NO ASSIGN 28 NO ASSIGN 29 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 31 NO ASSIGN 32 NO ASSIGN 33 SURROUND LFE L INPUT1 34 SURROUND LFEL INPUT2 35 SURROUND LFEL INPUT3 36 SURROUND LFEL INPUTA 37 SURROUND LFEL INPUTS 38 SURROUND LFEL INPUT6 39 SURROUND LFEL 40 SURROUND LFEL INPUT8 41 SURROUND LFEL INPUT9 42 SURROUND LFEL INPUT10 43 SURROUND LFEL INPUT11 44 SURROUND LFEL INPUT12 45 SURROUND LFEL INPUT13 46 SURROUND LFEL INPUT14 47 SURROUND LFE L INPUT15 48 SURROUND LFE L INPUT16 49 SURROUND LFE L INPUT17 50 SURROUND LFE L INPUT18 51 SURROUND LFE L INPUT19 52 SURROUND LFE L INPUT20 53 SURRO
7. High Mid Low 59 NO ASSIGN 60 NO ASSIGN 61 NO ASSIGN 62 NO ASSIGN 63 NO ASSIGN 64 F HI MID INPUT1 65 EQ F HI MID INPUT2 66 EQ F HI MID INPUT3 67 EQ F HI MID INPUT4 68 EQ F HI MID INPUTS 69 EQ F HI MID INPUT6 70 EQ F HI MID 71 EQ F HI MID INPUT8 72 EQ F HI MID INPUT9 73 F HI MID INPUT10 74 F HI MID INPUT11 75 F HI MID INPUT12 76 F HI MID INPUT13 77 EQ F HI MID INPUT14 78 EQ F HI MID INPUT15 79 F HI MID INPUT16 80 EQ F HI MID INPUT17 81 EQ F HI MID INPUT18 82 EQ F HI MID INPUT19 83 EQ F HI MID INPUT20 84 EQ F HI MID INPUT21 85 EQ F HI MID INPUT22 86 EQ F HI MID INPUT23 87 EQ F HI MID INPUT24 88 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ Q HI MID INPUT1 90 EQ Q HI MID INPUT2 91 EQ Q HI MID INPUT3 92 EQ Q HI MID INPUT4 93 EQ Q HI MID INPUTS 94 EQ Q HI MID INPUT6 95 Q HI MID 102 Q HI MID INPUT8 103 EQ Q HI MID INPUT9 104 EQ Q HI MID INPUT10 105 EQ Q HI MID INPUT11 106 EQ Q HI MID INPUT12 107 EQ Q HI MID INPUT13 108 EQ Q HI MID INPUT14 109 EQ Q HI MID INPUT15 110 EQ Q HI MID INPUT16 111 EQ Q HI MID INPUT17 112 EQ Q HI MID INPUT18 113 EQ Q HI MID INPUT19 114 Q HI MID INPUT20 115 EQ Q HI MID INPUT21 116 EQ Q HI MID INPUT22 117 EQ Q HI MID INPUT23 118 EQ Q HI MID INPUT24 119 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Owner s Manual 300
8. 234 Checking the Battery and the System Version 238 Initializing the 01796 ys eenei ee ee eer th e entr re eb eee 239 Calibrating the Faders s eere v ERE LRA 240 Appendix A Parameter Lists 241 USER DEFINED KEYS eres e ote x ere esr 241 USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments 243 Input Patch Parameters 243 Initial Input Patch Settings 245 Output Patch Parameters 247 Initial Output Patch Settings 249 User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank 250 Effects Parameters z S eR RENE 254 Preset EQ Parameters ep sth wi ata E EE uU ER 274 Preset Gate Parameters fs 44 1 2 278 Preset Compressor Parameters fs 44 1 2 278 Appendix B 5 5 283 General Spec 283 s emacs E Ie TU ail trei e ute 288 Analog Input Spec ir doeet rre Sen
9. Card Format In Out Resolution Sampling Rate Connectors MY4 DA 4 20 bit 44 1 48 kHz XLR 3 32 type balanced x4 Analog out MY8 DA96 8 24 bit 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz MY8 AE 24 bit 44 1 48 kHz 25 pin D sub MY8 AE96 AES EBU I O 8 8 24 bit 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz 8 9653 MY8 AT2 Optical x2 I O MY16 AT 16 16 Optical x4 24 bit 44 1 48 kHz pin D MY8 TD Tascam Z5 pin D sub 8 8 BNC wordclock output MY8 mLAN IEEE1394 6 pin 1394 connector x2 1 This card is a substitution for a 20 bit MY8 AD card 2 These cards support 24 bit 96 kHz in Double Channel mode They require 96kHz wordclock sig nals 3 This card is identical to the MY8 AE96 except that it features a sampling rate converter See the Yamaha Professional Audio Web site at the following URL for up to date news on I O cards lt http www yamahaproaudio com gt Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at I O Card Inputs An optional MY8 AE96S Digital I O card features sampling rate converters so you can eas ily convert the sampling frequency of digital inputs to the current 01V96 sampling rate 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Format page appears Use the buttons in the SRC sections to turn the sampling rate converters on and off You can turn the sampling rate converters of the digital I O card on or off in pairs odd amp eve
10. CHANNEL ID SHORT LONG CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH4 CH4 CH5 CH5 CH5 CH5 CH6 CH6 CH6 CH6 CH7 CH7 CH7 CH7 CH8 CH8 CH8 CH8 CH9 CH9 CH9 CH9 CH10 CH10 CH10 CH10 CH11 CH11 CH11 CH11 CH12 CH12 CH12 CH12 CH13 CH13 CH13 CH13 CH14 CH14 CH14 CH14 CH15 CH15 CH15 CH15 CH16 CH16 CH16 CH16 CH17 CH17 CH17 CH17 CH18 CH18 CH18 CH18 CH19 CH19 CH19 CH19 CH20 CH20 CH20 CH20 CH21 CH21 CH21 CH21 CH22 CH22 CH22 CH22 CH23 CH23 CH23 CH23 CH24 CH24 CH24 CH24 CH25 CH25 CH25 CH25 CH26 CH26 CH26 CH26 CH27 CH27 CH27 CH27 CH28 CH28 CH28 CH28 CH29 CH29 CH29 CH29 CH30 CH30 CH30 CH30 CH31 CH31 CH31 CH31 CH32 CH32 CH32 CH32 ST IN1 STI1 sT STEREO IN1 ST IN2 5 2 5 2 5 2 ST IN3 STI3 STI3 STEREO IN3 ST INA 5 4 5 4 5 4 01V96 Owner s Manual Output Patch Parameters 247 Output Patch Parameters SLOT ADAT OMNI INSERT IN DIRECT OUT 2TR OUT Digital Source Description Source Description Source Description Source Description NONE NONE NONE 051 051 OUT 051 052 052 ADAT2 OUT BUS2 BUS3 BUS3 ADAT3 OUT BUS3 8054 8054 OUT 8054 8055 8055 5 8055 8056 056 ADAT6 OUT BUS6 BUS7 BUS7 ADAT7 OUT BUS7 BUS8 BUS8 ADAT8 OUT 058 AUX1 AUX1 Slot CH1 IN AUX2 AUX2 AD IN 10 Slot CH2 IN AUX3 AUX3 AD IN 11 Slot CH3 IN AUX4 AUX4 AD IN 12 Slot CH4 IN A
11. Copies the fader values 4 ONU deae Copies the on off status of the ON buttons PAN Copies the pan settings SURR LL eer Copies the surround pan settings AUX Copies the Aux Send levels 5 CAUX ON Copies the on off status of the Channel to Aux signals 01V96 Owner s Manual Creating Custom Layer by Combining Channels User Assignable Layer 3 Display Brightness Copies the EQ parameter values 229 This parameter sets the brightness of the LED indicators in the range of 1 through 4 Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels User Assignable Layer If you set the Remote Layer target to USER ASSIGNABLE you can create a custom layer by combining any 01V96 channels excluding the Stereo Out This custom layer is called User Assignable layer Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Remote page appears Set the TARGET parameter to USER ASSIGNABLE then press ENTER A confirmation window appears Move the cursor to the YES button then press ENTER The 01V96 displays the page shown below REMOTE J Initial TARGET ma USER ASSIGNABLE LAYER CLEAR Select the channels you wish to assign to the User Assignable layer using the 1 16 parameter boxes 1 You can store up to four 16 channel setups in four banks by swi
12. THRESH THRESH L RELEASE H RELEASE L RATIO GAIN H GAIN L KNEE INPUT1 32 BUS1 8 AUXT1 8 STEREO PAN CHANNEL AUX1 2 AUX3 4 AUX5 6 AUX7 8 INPUT1 32 ST INTL 4R BUS TO ST BUS1 8 BALANCE MASTER STEREO 01V96 Owner s Manual lt 9 220 Chapter 18 MIDI HIGH MID LOW LFE H LFEL DIV F R SURROUND INPUT1 32 ST INTL 4R WIDTH DEPTH OFS LR OFS FR BYPASS MIX PARAM H EFFECT PARAM L EFFECT1 4 PARAM32 H PARAM32 Parameters that feature a setting range of more than 128 steps such as Fader and Delay Time parameters require two or more Control Change messages to specify the values For example if you wish to control Fader parameters on certain channels using Control Changes you must assign the same channel to two Control Change numbers and select FADER and FADER for the Control Changes in the parameter boxes in the first PARAMETER column 5512 n 5 2 lt 12 1 1 FADER H CHRNNEL INPUT 1 lt 1 NO ASSIGN If you wish to control Delay Time parameters on certain channels using Control Changes you must assign the same channel Delay parameter to three Control Change numbers and select TIME LOW TIME MID and TIME HIGH for the Control Cha
13. aea Y 1 28 1 zs bees INSERT OUT I 15 5 1 amp EFFECT2 EE B 15 5 1 5 e Be 12 EFFECT3 m 2 Q 15 21 1 EFFECT4 5 The 01 96 also features the Effects library which contains 44 preset programs and 84 user programs Sj29Jj3 1 H 01V96 Owner s Manual 154 Chapter 14 Internal Effects Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends You can use effects processors via Aux Sends by patching effects processor inputs to Aux Outs and effects processor outputs to ST IN Channels 1 Recall an effect program you wish to use Refer to page 175 for more information on recalling effect programs 2 Pressthe DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Effect page appears This page enables you to patch all inputs and outputs of Effects processors 1 4 3 PATCH I HOO initial Data EFFECT arar PATCH 1 EFFECTI 92 REVERB HALL p EFFECT3 D REUERB STRGE This page contains the following parameters DIN These parameter boxes select the signals to be fed to the effects processors 2 OUT These parameter boxes select the destination of the signals output from the effects pro cessors 3 fJ button This button recalls the FX1 Edit FX4 Edit pages which enable you to adjust the effect parameters 3 T
14. 01V96 Owner s Manual 252 Appendix A Parameter Lists Bank 3 XG Vol amp Pan Name Data Format ID Controller Short Long 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 END eS e e ee n e enu ens RM01 XGO1 XG CHO1 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac Jos joo los 7 ON END em e e M ds RM02 XGO2 XG CH02 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac 08 los 7 ON Tele emt at ee dmm Dum eme RMO3 XGO3 XG CH03 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac los 02 los 7 ON END Te dE eem eee RM04 04 04 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac Jos 03 los 7 END ON Poo a ee P 05 05 05 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac Jos 04 los 7 leno J RM06 XG CH06 VOL amp PAN __ _ L __ _ L S E a 10 los 05 7 END RM07 XG CH07 VOL amp PAN __ _ __ ___ L L L L L L E S 10 los los FAp z leno RM08 XG CH08 VOL amp PAN __ _ __ ___ L L L L L L E S 10 los 07 7 END
15. 45 96 kHz EARLY REF One input two output early reflections Parameter Range Description S Hall L Hall Random 2 TYPE Revers Plate Spring Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 2 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Reflection diffusion left right reflection spread DENSITY 0 100 Reflection density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency 01V96 Owner s Manual 255 Effects Parameters GATE REVERB REVERSE GATE One input two output early reflections with gate and early reflections with reverse gate Parameter Range Description TYPE Type A Type B Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 2 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Reflection diffusion left right reflection spread DENSITY 0 10096 Reflection density HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections FB GAIN 99 to 49996 Feedback gain HPF THRU 21 2
16. 1 Turn on this button to insert plug ins into Pro Tools channels If you are using the TDM system you can also assign outboard effects processors You can compare your edits with the original settings by turn ing on this button This button works in unison with the Com pare button in the Pro Tools Inserts and Sends windows BYPASS Turning on this button bypasses the plug ins see page 200 INSERT PARAM Switching this button to INSERT enables you to assign plug ins using four rotary controls on the page Switching this button to PARAM enables you to adjust the plug in parameters using the four rotary controls see page 199 Information box This box displays plug in parameter names values alarm mes sages from Pro Tools etc Rotary controls 1 4 These controls enable you to select plug ins or adjust the selected plug in parameters 01V96 Owner s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 191 Channel Display mode F3 button Press the F3 button to select this display mode in which the parameter controls for tracks 1 16 are displayed DIO SETUP Initial Data 5111 STI2 STI3 STI4 EDIT c ce Aen l O TIME CODE FEET a ears OOO 1 1000 mi 09990099 o o o o Ruda Adi Adil Rdi2 Adi3 Ad
17. 75 7 Input Channels 77 About Input Channels 77 Setting the Input Channels from the 79 Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface 90 Pairing Input Channels Ee Seales 92 Naming Input 94 8 Bus Outs ko ey WE m x I i yr RR EE 97 About Stereo Out rry rars tan ee Oot Leeman bans Det ER AES 97 BUS Qut y aeree ad e AD EA weeds eas 98 Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 from the Display 99 Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 from the Control Surface 104 Pairing Buses or Aux Sends e Ns hoe EL ea Rae 105 Attenuating Output Signals 106 Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs 107 9 AuxOuts ve e vL ER E Y Runs em E RR 109 Aux Out 1 8 es month ced Da dine dea acea 109 Setting Aux Out 1 8 from the 110 Viewing Aux Outsettings 112 Setting Aux Out 1 8 from the Control Surface 113 01V96 Owner s Manual Conten
18. cage bane thy kasa 29 Selecting oo TR eoa Ru iot 31 Selecting Channels e E uec E AS 32 Selecting Mod s caer eer Eu rep DEVE qawa ua 33 Metering pe ME MEE NI pone tentes 34 4 Connections and Setup 37 asus iios v Apt MORE MEOS wakta wa 37 Wordclock Connections and Settings 40 Input and Output 43 S rdrutorial 25522554 V IS 47 Conn ctions Setup usa otaa luu 47 Initial Track Recording 49 Overdubbing to Other Tracks 60 Mixing Recorded Tracks into Stereo Mixdown 63 6 Analog I O amp Digital 1 0 69 Analog Inputs amp 69 Digital Inputs amp Outputs 71 Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at I O Card Inputs 72 Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status 73 Dithering Digital Outputs 74 Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates
19. 22 Scrub amp Shuttle uuu ee 200 Sampling rates Patch 2TR Out page 125 Selecting oe 195 DOUBLE CHANNEL Patch Cascade In page eet 236 Send 197 DOUBLE SPEED Patch Direct Out page 125 Solong tos 196 Sampling rate indicator Patch Effect page 66 154 Program 211 215 Setting the higher sampling rates Patch IN LIB page 174 PROTECT button 164 Patch IN Name page 2 94 mE Patch In Name page 225 Q SRC sections 2 22 444 72 Patch In Patch page 43 122 Q control eee 20 Scene In Fade page 166 Patch Insert In page 129 HORE Ol 84 Scene Out Fade page 167 Patch Out LIB page 175 Scene Safe page 168 Patch Out Name page 105 26 R Scene Scene page 164 Patch Out Patch page 44 124 255 Rear Panel Scene Sort page 169 PATCH button CUR I COH 18 122 PHANTOM 448V 23 SCENE button 18 s Confirmation preference 227 Reit panel 33 Scene MEM Auto Update preference ertt ee RHET 1215 N
20. 135 136 Window Factory default 136 Changing the surround mode 137 Surround pan 135 Channel Pairing 92 SYMPHONIC a asas 258 Copy operation 120 SYNC parameter O d Password 5 s 233 System exclusive messages 211 Set Password 234 System version 238 User Define Select 232 WORD CLOCK IN connector 24 WORD CLOCK OUT connector 24 Wordclock eret About wordclock 01V96 Owner s Manual 329 01V96 Owner s Manual YAMAHA Digital Mixing Console Internal Parameters MIDI Implementation Chart Model O1V96 Date 26 Aug 2002 Version 1 0 Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks Basic Default 1 16 1 16 Mem pised Channel Changed 1 16 1 16 Default X OMNI off OMNI on Mode Messages X X Memorized Altered Wokckckckckckck ck ok ck ck kk X Note X 0 127 Number True Voice ck kk X Note X Velocity Note Off X Effect Control Key s X X After Ch s X X Pitch Bend X X 0 95 102 119 Assignable Change Prog 0 127 0 127 Change True e ke e Ke 0 99 System Exclusive 1 Song Pos X X sss Song Sel X X Tune X X System Clock X 1 Commands X X Effect Control Local ON OFF X X Aux 11 Notes OFF X X
21. Threshold 54 48 0 dB 0 1 dB step Range 70 0 dB 1 dB step Attack 0 ms 120 ms 1 ms step 0 02 ms 1 96 s 216 points 48 kHz 0 02 ms 2 13 s 216 points 9 44 1 kHz Gate Hold 0 01 ms 981 ms 216 points 96 kHz 0 01 ms 1 06 s 216 points 88 2 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s 160 points 48 kHz 6 ms 46 0 s 160 points 9 44 1 kHz Decay 3 ms 21 1 5 160 points 96 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s 160 points 9 88 2 kHz Threshold 54 4 0 dB 0 1 dB step Range 70 0 dB 1 dB step Attack 0 ms 120 ms 1 ms step 0 02 ms 1 96 s 216 points 48 kHz 0 02 ms 2 13 s 216 points 9 44 1 kHz Ducking Hold 0 01 5 981 ms 216 points 96 kHz 0 01 ms 1 06 s 216 points 88 2 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s 160 points 48 kHz 6 ms 46 0 s 160 points 9 44 1 kHz Decay 3 ms 21 1 s 160 points 96 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s 160 points 9 88 2 kHz Comp Parameters Ratio x 1 x 1 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 5 6 8 10 20 16 points Out gain 0 dB to 18 dB 0 1 dB step Knee Hard 1 2 3 4 5 6 step Compressor Attack 0 ms 120 ms 1 ms step 5 ms 42 3 s 160 points 48 kHz 6 ms 46 0 s 160 points 9 44 1 kHz Release 3 ms 21 1 s 160 points 96 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s 160 points 9 88 2 kHz Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB 0 1 dB step Ratio x 1 x 1 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 5 6 8 10 20 16 points Out gain 0 dB to 18 dB 0 1 dB step Kn
22. CAS AUX6 Cascade Out Aux6 CAS AUX7 Cascade Out Aux7 CAS AUX7 Cascade Out Aux7 CAS AUX8 Cascade Out Aux8 CAS AUX8 Cascade Out Aux8 CAS 514 Cascade STEREO L CAS ST L Cascade STEREO L CAS ST R Cascade STEREO R CAS ST R Cascade STEREO R CASSOLOL Cascade SOLO L CASSOLOL Cascade SOLO L CASSOLOR Cascade SOLO R CASSOLOR Cascade SOLO R 01V96 Owner s Manual Initial Output Patch Settings 249 Initial Output Patch Settings 17 NONE 18 NONE 19 NONE 20 NONE 21 NONE 22 NONE 23 NONE 24 NONE 25 NONE 26 NONE 27 NONE 28 NONE 29 NONE 30 NONE 31 NONE 32 NONE 2TR OUT Digital 1L STL 1R STR CHANNEL NAME CHANNEL ID SHORT LONG AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 AUX6 AUX7 AUX8 BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 BUS5 BUS6 BUS6 BUS6 BUS6 BUS7 BUS7 BUS7 BUS7 BUS8 BUS8 BUS8 BUS8 STEREO ST ST STEREO SLOT SLOT1 1 BUS1 510 1 2 8052 SLOT1 3 BUS3 SLOT1 4 BUS4 SLOT1 5 8055 SLOT1 6 BUS6 SLOT1 7 BUS7 SLOT1 8 BUS8 SLOT1 9 BUS1 SLOT1 10 BUS2 SLOT1 11 BUS3 SLOT1 12 BUS4 SLOT1 13 8055 SLOT1 14 BUS6
23. 01V96 Owner s Manual 218 Chapter 18 MIDI HIGH ON PHASE MID CHANNEL LOW 1 32 5 IN1 4 MASTER BUS1 8 AUX1 8 STEREO AUX1 SEND AUX2 SEND AUX3 SEND AUX4 SEND AUXS SEND AUX6 SEND AUX7 SEND AUX8 SEND 1 32 5 IN1 4 BUS TO ST CHANNEL BUS1 8 1 32 5 IN1L 4R INSERT ON CHANNEL 1 32 MASTER BUS1 8 AUX1 8 STEREO PRE POST AUX1 SEND AUX2 SEND AUX3 SEND AUX4 SEND AUXS SEND AUX6 SEND AUX7 SEND AUX8 SEND 1 32 5 IN1 4 IN DELAY ON TIME HIGH TIME MID TIME LOW INPUT1 32 MIX HIGH MIX LOW FB GAIN H FB GAIN L OUT DELAY ON TIME HIGH TIME MID TIME LOW BUS1 8 AUX1 8 STEREO L R 01V96 Owner s Manual Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real time Control 219 HIGH MID ON Q LOW FLOW G LOW H GLOWL Q LO MID F LO MID G LO MID H G LO MID L Q HI MID F HI MID G HI MID H G HI MID L Q HIGH F HIGH G HIGH H G HIGH L ATTH ATT L HPF ON LPF ON INPUT1 32 ST IN 1 4 BUS1 8 AUX1 8 STEREO LOW GATE ON ATTACK THRESH H THRESH L RANGE HOLD H HOLD L DECAY H DECAY L 1 32
24. This button selects the MIDI Ctl Asgn page settings PLUG IN This button selects the settings of an optional Y56K card installed in the slot You can select Y56K card programs in the parameter box next to the button Note Data selected by the SETUPMEM button includes MIDI transmission and reception port settings and message settings After you store to an external device bulk dump data that has its reception disabled if the 01V96 later starts to receive this particular data 01V96 bulk dump reception will be turned off immediately and the 01V96 will be unable to receive sub sequent data Therefore before you store the data selected by the SETUPMEM button using Bulk Dump be sure to enable bulk data transmission and reception 5 If necessary move the cursor to the parameter box next to the selected but ton then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the desired bulk dump data Tip If you selected ALL in the parameter box all data selected by the corresponding button is transmitted as bulk dump data 6 To start transmitting bulk data move the cursor to the TRANSMIT button then press ENTER Bulk Dump is executed During the operation the Bulk Dump window appears indicating the current bulk dump status To abort the bulk dump operation move the cursor to the CANCEL button in the window then press ENTER Tip To transmit bulk dump request
25. 141 DUAL PITCH e 27 DYNA FILTER 2053 ci 80 RUE RB DYNA FLANGE 264 Reatures NN 11 DYNA PHASER 264 Chun S R Un deo d 2 Dynamics Comp Edit page Effects edens 12 E 90 De 82 100 111 Hardware uu aqa a aaa 11 Setting from the display 79 Dynamics Comp Lib page 180 Inputs and Outputs 11 Switching the sional phase 79 Dynamics Gate Edit page 81 MIDI a eid Ove 12 Viewing 87 Dynamics Gate Lib page 179 Remote control 12 INPUT connectors 69 DYNAMICS button 18 Scene memory Sonic specifications 11 Initial settings 245 Surround sound 12 243 BARLY 254 Fixed mode o o 174 ECHO 257 PLANGE 4 2 dag i105 ca 59 EDIT indicator 27 FREQUENCY control we 20 Input sensitivity Effect FX1 Edit page D 73 GAIN controls 15 Effect Lib page 175 INS Dutton 30 Effect FX2 Edit page 457 G INSERT I O connectors 14 69 Effect 2 Lib page 175 GAIN controls
26. 15 20 70 Insert in ze eed 129 Effect FX3 Edit page aaa 157 Gain of the AD card 37 Insert patching 1 22 aa 127 Effect Lib 175 SANG dde PE 85 Installing a card sss 26 Effect Edit 157 Gate library 179 INT 44 1k INT 48k INT 88 2 INT 96k Effect EX4 Lib page 175 AGATE REVERB UD MEME 42 Effect P In Edit page 159 Gates 81 Internal effects EFFECT button r 18 KEYIN SOURCE 81 Ais Sed 154 Effects parameter table 287 Editing tet 157 Bypass 441 ete ick Sette M 147 Effects processors 1 4 153 Internal effects aan 155 Fader groups eee 148 Inserting into channels 156 parameter tables 254 Mute groups 148 Yr Plug ins 159 MIX BALANCE e Effects library 15 H TEMPO 2 2 EMPHASIS Rt 73 Recording system NN u ENTER button aaa up ences K Enter titles Higher sampling rates 2 442 HIGH MID button 20 KEYIN SOURCE eren 81 Title edit window 30 Bee veis 84 100 104
27. Pair Grup Output page HORIZONTAL I eene Using the display Using the SEL buttons VERTIGAL PAN control sparsis Pan Route Bus To St page Pan Route Ch Edit page Pan Route Pan page Pan Route ROUTI 16 page Pan Route ROUT17 ST1 page Pan Route Surr ST IN page Pan Route Surr1 16 page Pan Route Surr17 32 page PAN ROUTING button Pan Surr Surr Mode page PAN SURR LINK FOLLOW PAN 01V96 Owner s Manual Index 327 85 Meter display mode 191 RING MOD 00000 262 INDIVIDUAL rt 85 MIDI 187 RKIrack mount Kit 323 INV GANG r us 85 M ting ee etes 197 ROTARY eU 261 PAN buttons esee 86 OMS M 187 Rotary controls amp faders 29 Parameter boxes 29 Panning eee 196 197 Routing cerent teen 86 Parameter changes 221 198 Parameter lists 241 Pre Or Post 196 Parameter wheel
28. co 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 38 31 32 y uA m T ST IN MASTER A 2 4 Make sure that the LEVEL button Q is turned on in the METER sec tion The METER MODE section enables you to select the type of signals displayed on the meters If any button other than the LEVEL button is turned on move the cursor to the LEVEL button then press ENTER Move the cursor to the POSITION parameter box 2 to the right of the LEVEL button rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select POST FADER then press ENTER The POSITION parameter indicates the metering position When POST FADER is selected the meters indicate the post fader signal levels Tip If you set the POSITION parameter to PRE EQ the pre EQ input levels are metered Tf you set the parameter to PRE FADER the post EQ and pre fader input levels are metered Make sure that ON button indicators 1 12 are lit then raise faders 1 12 to OdB While the musicians play the musical instruments check the input channel levels using the level meters on the display Tip If the meters reach the OVER level make sure that the faders are set to OdB then lower the corresponding GAIN controls Pairing Channels On the 01V96 you can pair adjacent odd even channels for stereo operation Faders and most mix param
29. VOL amp EFF1 FADER B2 07 FAD END ET ON END _ _ E E E zx RM04 04 GM CH04 VOL amp EFF1 FADER B3 07 FAD END ON END _ _ m RM05 GM05 05 VOL amp EFF1 FADER B4 07 FAD END 25 gt ON END ef I RMO6 06 GM CH06 VOL amp EFF1 FADER B5 07 FAD END E END ix RM07 07 GM CHO7 amp 1 FADER B6 07 FAD END M ON END m RM08 08 8 VOL amp EFF1 FADER B7 07 FAD END 25 ON END 09 GM09 GM CHO9 VOL amp EFF1 FADER B8 07 FAD END ON END _ _ g RM10 10 GM CH10 VOL amp EFF1 FADER B9 07 FAD END ON END E RM11 GM11 GM CH11 VOL amp EFF1 FADER 07 FAD END END 25 e E RM12 12 GM CH12 VOL amp EFF1 FADER BB 07 FAD END 25 E ON END 25 RM13 13 GM CH13 VOL amp EFF1 FADER BC 07 FAD END E ON END 25 ES RM14 14 14 VOL amp EFF1 FADER BD 07 FAD END ON END 55 E RM15 15 GM CH15 VOL amp EFF1 FADER BE 07 FAD END lt ON END s RM16 16 GM CH16 VOL amp EFF1 FADER BF 07 FAD END e oa ES
30. indicator amp surround mode indicator 521524 w Sampling rate indicator 8 5 STI1 5112 STIS 57147 levels DISPLAY AURI Inftial selected _____ __ iis RUX1 S selected channel UXi SEND Hi iQ Channel name 2 5 4 7 8 9 Page title O 00 co co co co co 1 12 15 14 15 16 area IZ Page tabs Tab Scroll arrows 1 Selected DISPLAY This section indicates the currently selected display page group 2 Selected channel This section indicates the Input or Output Channel currently selected by its correspond ing SEL button The first four characters are the Channel ID e g CH1 CH32 BUSI BUSS AUXI AUXS ST L ST R The second four characters the channel s Short name You can edit the channel s Short name if you desire see page 225 3 Current Scene This section indicates the number and title of the currently selected Scene memory see page 162 If the selected Scene is write protected a padlock icon amp appears 4 EDIT indicator This indicator appears when the current mix settings no longer match those of the Scene that was most currently recalled 5 MIDI indicator This indicator appears when the 01V96 is receiving MIDI data via the MIDIIN port USB port or an installed MY8 mLAN card 6
31. i 01736 Port 6 lt gt 01496 Port 7 ES 01736 Port 8 ge QuickTime Music 6 Choose Peripherals from the Setups menu to open the Peripherals window Double click the MIDI Controllers tab 8 Referto the screen below to set the Type Receive From Send To and Ch s parameters The 01V96 can emulate up to two MIDI controllers Peripherals E Synchronization MIDI Controllers Receive From Send To Ch s NH HUI orvse Port 1 1 2 8 HUI o vse Port 2 2 VR E none 1 none 4 none control Pro Tools remotely you need one port for every eight audio channels 9 When you finish setting the parameters close the window 0430u0 01V96 Owner s Manual 188 Chapter 17 Remote Control Configuring the 01V96 Follow the steps below to set up the 01V96 so that you can remotely control Pro Tools from the 01V96 Remote Layer 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears DIO SETUP Initial Data 571257135144 CHL CHI tm G SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Studio Manager DAW REMOTE 5 17 L REQUEST ESTA MONITOR REMOTE NACH I
32. 09 09 amp __ __ _ __ _ END RM10 GM CH10 VOL amp PAN __ __ _ END RM11 GM CH11 VOL amp PAN __ __ __ _______ _________ FAD END _ _ RM12 GM CH12 VOL amp PAN _ ____ __ __ ___ ___ __ END RM13 GM CH13 VOL amp PAN _ _____ END END Sd eu RM14 14 GM CH14 VOL amp PAN FADER BD o lenp END Is RM15 15 GM CH15 VOL amp PAN FADER 07 lenp END Fo x pep ek ees RM16 GM16 GM CH16 VOL amp PAN FADER BF 07 lenp 01V96 Owner s Manual User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings 251 Bank 2 GM Vol amp Effect 1 Name Data Format ID Controller Short Long 1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 END E 2 RM01 01 GM CHO1 VOL amp EFF1 FADER BO 07 FAD END ON END _ _ 29 ES RM02 GM02 GM CH02 VOL amp EFF1 FADER B1 07 END ES e ON END _ _ E E m RM03 03
33. Note You cannot pair an ST IN channel 1 4 with an Input Channel To pair channels or to cancel channel pairs you can use the SEL buttons on the top panel or access the Pair Grup pages Pairing Channels by Using the SEL Buttons 1 While pressing and holding down the SEL button for one of the channels you wish to pair press the SEL button for the adjacent channel The paired hannel numbers should be odd and even in this order When the Pair Confirmation check box is on the Channel Pairing window appears CHANNEL PAIRING Make Pair CANCEL CHI 2 i CHZ 3 1 Note You can pair only channels that are adjacent in this order channels Pressing the SEL button for a non adjacent channel will be ignored You cannot create or cancel a pair of vertical partners 01V96 Owner s Manual 93 Pairing Input Channels Move the cursor to the desired button in the Channel Pairing window then press ENTER The following buttons are available in this window CANCEL Cancels the operation CHx2y Copies the odd channel parameter values to the even channel CHy gt x Copies the even channel parameter values to the odd channel RESET BOTH Resets both channel parameters to the default settings same as when Channel memory 01 is recalled Move the cursor to the desired button then press ENTER to confirm the pair
34. eite mene Stereo Out signals INSCHI INS 2 Input Channels 1 32 Insert Outs INS BUSI INS BUSS8 Bus Out 1 8 Insert Outs INS AUXI INS AUX68 Aux Out 1 8 Insert Outs INSST L ST R Stereo Out Insert Outs CAS BUSI BUSS Bus Out 1 8 Cascade Outs CASAUX1 AUX68 Aux Out 1 8 Cascade Outs 1 8 Stereo Cascade Outs CASSOLOL CASSOLOR Solo Channel Cascade Outs 01V96 Owner s Manual Input and Output Patching 45 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a patch parameter 1 you wish to change and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the patching 3 Press ENTER to confirm the change Tip To restore the default patching recall Output Patch memory 00 see page 175 01V96 Owner s Manual dnjas pue suondauu0D ES 46 Chapter 4 Connections and Setup 01V96 Owner s Manual Tutorial 47 5 Tutorial This chapter describes how to use the 01V96 for multitrack recording and mixdown using an example in which the 01V96 is connected to a digital multitrack recorder A rhythm machine guitar bass and keyboard are recorded Connections and Setup 1 Connect a digital MTR musical instruments and a m
35. 16 16 S Se PAN Stereo Configuration x i 4 T 2TR IN 9 m LFE t SOLO TRIM l 2 i SOLOL 16 SLOT SLOT gt SLOT 1 16 PRE POST AUX SOLO R MONITOR o o TRIN MONITOR OUT A OUTPUT SOLO em e id 960 4 BUS1 8 oto L L o o ADATI 8 AUX1 8 MONITOR OUT oe R 2TR IN DIGITAL gt 2TRD L R COAXIAL PHONES METER METER OSCILLATOR SINE100Hz 8 m SEND 1 2 EFFECT LEVEL 2 OMNI 1 AUX1 8 4 FX1 Return L R SINE10kHz KR L4 kx STEREO 1 PINK NOISE INSERT zi FAI BURST NOISE to OUT PATCH for 51 8 9 owni2 SEND n cascade g i DIRECT OUT 1 32 5 5 _ EFFECT gt 58 5 o AUX1 8 5 H Pesen 12 gt STEREO L BUS INSERT OUT pounis 4 E 5 FX Return UR CASCADE SELECT TRIM ON gt STEREO R BUS E 5 2 Z lt 4 L 1 rL SOLO L BUS 2 INSERT Z m 1 1 L SOLO R BUS 16 OTHER SEND Z AUXI BUS 8 gt SLO SLOT OUT i i METER METER N t AUXE BUS ADAT ____8 OTHER ADAT OUT EFFECT 2 9 1 for cascade AUX1 8 x PS SEND 12 FX3 Return L R Jj 4 s STEREO BUS ZTR DIGITAL 2 f DITHER Q TR OUT DIGITAL INSERT T FX3 d e T BUSTS BUS COAXIAL SEND 2 Jj d 7 SOLO BUS 5 L METER METER Z v 4 2
36. Tip Youcanalso use theprogrammed User Defined buttons to control Machine Control func tions See page 231 for information on assigning functions to the User Defined buttons 01V96 Owner s Manual 211 18 MIDI This chapter describes the 01V96 s MIDI related functions MIDI amp the 01V96 Using Control Changes Program Changes and other MIDI messages enables you to recall Scenes and edit parameters on the 01V96 and store 01V96 internal data on external MIDI devices The 01V96 supports the following MIDI messages Each of these MIDI messages can be individually turned on or off for transmission and reception Program Changes If you assign the 01V96 s Scenes to Program Change numbers the 01V96 transmits Pro gram Changes when it recalls Scenes Also the 01V96 will switch Scenes when it receives Program Changes Control Changes If you assign the 01V96 s parameters to Control Change numbers the 01V96 transmits the assigned Control Changes when the parameter values change Also the 01V96 changes cer tain parameter values when it receives the corresponding Control Changes e System Exclusive Messages The 01V96 transmits System Exclusive Parameter Changes in real time when the parameter values change Also the 01V96 notifies certain parameter values when it receives assigned Parameter Changes MMC MIDI Machine Control MMC is used for external machine control MIDI Note On Off
37. mete e 289 Analog Output Specs 14 5 sn eed hah eod eode Sucesos 289 Digital Input Spec add e i iq ebd Ris 290 Digital Output Spec by hits 290 I O SLOT Spec AEE Uer 290 CONTROL I O Ade ERI eee RA OQ ER as 291 Dimensions set oce ois e pe tee pre Dr 291 Appendix C MIDI 292 Scene Memory to Program Change Table 292 Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 293 MIDI Data Form t ve UI PR E Vs 309 Appendix D Options 323 Index cro exu d diei es 324 01V96 Owner s Manual Welcome 11 1 Welcome Thank you for choosing the Yamaha 01V96 Digital Mixing Console The compact 01V96 Digital Console features 24 bit 96 kHz digital audio processing with out compromise as well as 40 channel simultaneous mixing The 01V96 covers a broad range of needs and applications including multi track recording 2 channel mixdown and cutting edge surround sound production This integrated comprehensive audio system features remote control function for DAWs Digital Audio Workstations as popularized by the DM2000 and 02R96 Digital Mixing Consoles The 01V96 offers the following features TS Hard
38. 01V96 Owner s Manual 310 Appendix C MIDI If TABLE is selected STATUS DATA 1011nnnn Bn Control change Onnnnnnn nn Control number 0 95 102 119 Ovvvvvvv vv Control Value 0 127 If NRPN is selected STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA 01100010 62 NRPNLSB Ovvvvvvv vv LSB of parameter number STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change 1 DATA 01100011 63 NRPN MSB Ovvvvvvv vv MSB of parameter number STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change 1 DATA 00000110 06 MSB of data entry Ovvvvvvv vv MSB of parameter data STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change 1 DATA 00100110 26 LSB of data entry Ovvvvvvv vv LSB of parameter data 1 The second and subsequent STATUS need not be added during transmission Reception must be implemented so that reception oc curs whether or not STATUS is present 2 4 PROGRAM CHANGE Reception If Program Change ECHO is ON these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT If Program Change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches these messages will be received However if OMNI is ON they will be received regardless of the channel When a message is received a Scene Memory will be recalled according to the settings of the Program Change Table Cn Transmission If Program Change TX is ON this message is transmitted according to the set tings of the Program Change Table on the Tx CH channel when a scene memory is recalled If the recalled scene has been assigned to more than one program
39. EJ Name Inr 4t Auto Cory 3 10 SHORT LONG BUS BUS gt BUS BUS gt BUS6 KBUSB gt lt BUS6 gt lt BUS6 gt BUSS BUSS gt lt BUSS gt lt BUSS gt BUS4 054 gt BUS4 lt BUS4 gt BUS3 BUS3 2 lt BUS3 gt lt BUS3 gt BUS2 BUS2 gt BUS2 gt BUS1 51 gt 28052 i 5 AUXS CAUXS gt lt AUXS gt AUX CAUX gt RUX RUX6 gt lt RUX6 gt RUXS CAUXS gt RUXS RUX4 RUX4 gt RUX4 RUX3 CAUXS gt RUX3 ESTROTEECT ZTE OUT Z sino sng You can specify Short names in the center column 1 and Long full names in the right column 2 When the Name Input Auto Copy check box 3 is on the first four characters of a newly entered Long name are automatically copied to the Short name On the other hand a newly entered Short name is automatically added to the beginning of the Long name You can reset all bus names to their default names by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button then pressing ENTER 2 Move the cursor to a name you wish to change then press ENTER The Title Edit window appears which enables you to edit the name 3 Edit the name move the cursor to the OK button then press ENTER The new name is now effective Tip The edited name is stored in the Output Patch library 01V96 Owner s Manual 108 Chapter 8 Outs 01V96 Owner s Manual Aux Outs
40. ZTE OUT OUT NAME OUT LIB Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Rout1 16 page appears Move the cursor to the D button for the Input Channels you want to route to Direct Outs then press ENTER The Input Channels for which the D buttons are turned on are directly patched to the output connectors or channels specified in Step 7 Adjusting the Monitoring Level 1 You can monitor the recording signals by placing the digital MTR in record ready mode routing the signals sent to Tracks 1 8 of the digital MTR back to the 01V96 s Input Channels 17 24 then patching them to the MONITOR OUT connectors and the PHONES jack Arm the connected digital MTR s tracks for recording At this time set the monitor mode on the digital MTR accordingly so that you can monitor the input signals on the armed tracks Refer to the owner s manual for the digital MTR for more information In this way signals sent to Tracks 1 8 of the digital MTR are returned to the 01V96 s Input Channels 17 24 Press the LAYER 17 32 button Input Channel Layer 17 32 is now available for control from the channel strip section Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Rout17 STI page appears 01V96 Owner s Manual Initial Track Recording 55 J INPUT 17 32 ROUTING CHI ALL STEREO a 4511 a s an
41. 5 ON OFF ON OFF OLY 1 16 fA DLviv S2 291 This page contains the following parameters D POSITION This parameter determines the insert position of the Insert patch or compressor The insert position is indicated by highlighted COMP or INSERT buttons 01V96 Owner s Manual 1ndul 128 Chapter 10 1 amp Output Patching 2 INSERT section e This button turns the Insert on or off SHOUT eden This parameter enables you to select outputs ADAT OUT channels slot output channels or internal effects inputs as the Insert Out destination ENG eie s This parameter enables you to select inputs ADAT IN chan nels slot input channels or internal effects outputs as the Insert In source This button turns the compressor on or off This parameter determines the order of Insert patch and com pressor when they are inserted at the same signal path point With the COMP gt INS setting signals pass through the compressor first then the Insert With the INS set ting signals pass through the Insert first then the compressor Movethe cursor to the OUT parameter box then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the desired outputs slot channels or internal effects inputs to be patched to Insert Out
42. FXI 1 amp 1 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 1 FX2 1 amp FX2 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2 FX3 1 amp FX3 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3 FX4 1 amp FX4 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4 Press ENTER to confirm the setting Move the cursor to the IN parameter box in the INSERT section select the outputs of the effects processor selected in Step 1 then press ENTER to confirm the setting Move the cursor to the ON OFF button in the INSERT section then press ENTER to turn on the button Effect insertion is now enabled 01V96 Owner s Manual Editing Effects 157 Editing Tip After inserting effects to channels adjust the MIX BALANCE parameter for the effects according to the purpose and effects type Move the cursor to an empty IN or OUT parameter box and press the ENTER button The Patch Select window appears which enables you to quickly select available signal paths Effects To edit effect programs recalled to the internal Effects processors 1 4 press the DISPLAY ACCESS EFFECT button repeatedly until the Edit page for the effects processor you wish to edit appears Effects processors 1 4 correspond to the following pages Effects Processor 1 FX1 Edit page Effects Processor 2 FX2 Edit page Effects Processor 3 FX3 E
43. 185 About Remote Eutictlon o ee epu TES 185 Pro Toole Remote Layer meet utem ehem Hire eiit 186 Nuendo Remote Bayer c Eo DETRAS d CUN 202 Other DAW Remote Layers v PUE EE OS 202 MIDI Remote Layer zas rere ber Re PEE Yr eR RES RE UNE S 203 Machine Control Function 208 01V96 Owner s Manual 10 Contents 18 Dm PP E 211 MID the canoe ey eee oe os 211 MIDI Pott Setup ze e Ex ee eA eae eee 212 Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall 215 Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real time Control 216 Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes 221 Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI Bulk Dump 222 19 Other 5 225 Changing the Input and Output Channel Names 225 Setting Preferences 24 neuve sette C unies eo uon Rea o bur 226 Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels User Assignable Layer 229 Using Oscillator wastes be Sa ow a wed 230 Using the User Defined Keys 231 Using Operation Lock i ec e ERE ex e ek RAE E n n aa 233 Cascading Consoles
44. NRPNSs are special MIDI messages that combine three different Control Changes They enable you to control many parameters on a single MIDI Channel 5 If you turned on the TABLE button in Step 4 move the cursor to a parameter box in the No CH column then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the MIDI channels and Control Changes to which you want to assign parameters You can assign parameters to up to 16 channel Control Changes on the Ctl Asgn page regardless of the MIDI Channels currently selected for transmission and reception Skip Steps 5 and 6 if you turned on the NRPN button in Step 4 6 Select parameters in the parameter boxes in the three PARAMETER columns Select a parameter group in the parameter box in the first PARAMETER column and spec ify the desired values in the parameter boxes in the second and third PARAMETER col umns The following parameters and values are available HIGH MID LOW NO ASSIGN CHANNEL 1 32 5 IN1 4 MASTER BUS1 8 AUX1 8 STEREO AUX1 SEND AUX2 SEND AUX3 SEND FADER H AUX4 SEND AUXS SEND AUX6 SEND AUX7 SEND AUX8 SEND BUS TO ST 051 8 CHANNEL 1 32 5 IN1 4 MASTER BUS1 8 AUX1 8 STEREO AUX1 SEND AUX2 SEND AUX3 SEND FADER L AUX4 SEND AUX5 SEND AUX6 SEND AUX7 SEND AUX8 SEND BUS TO ST BUS1 8 INPUT1 32 ST IN1 4 lt 9 1 32 5 1 4
45. Patch 01V96 Owner s Manual 52 Chapter 5 Tutorial Using Direct Outs Each Input Channel signal is directly routed to and output from the specified output con nectors and channels Use this method to patch each Input Channel directly to each MTR track The following example illustrates the signals directly output from ADAT OUT channels 1 5 ADAT OUT connector CH 1 INPUT connector 1 v gt Input Channels 1 gt 2 INPUT connector 2 e gt Input Channels 2 gt CH 3 INPUT connector 3 x gt Input Channels gt 4 INPUT connector 4 M gt Input Channels 4 gt 5 INPUT connector 5 gt Input Channels 5 gt Input 2 Patch This section describes how to route signals by combining the above two routing methods 1 Pressthe DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly to display the Pan Route Rout1 16 page This page enables you to select a Bus Out as the signal destination for each channel PAN ROUTE CHi CHi ALL STEREO ALL BUS ALL CLEAR EJE aa BO 80 Ec SURROUND MODE STEREO pouri 16 FROUTIT STIAALBUS TO ST E13 This page contains the following buttons D 1 8 buttons These buttons route Input Channel signals to Buses 1 8 You can select multiple but tons 2 S button This button routes Input
46. THERES coe FEET P HHEEL_TOBE amp ers OOO 1000 INSERT RSSIGN EDIT ASSIGN COMPARE BYPASS INSERT fincas lt ito assign edit an insert Du um Co ENTER ENTER CHANNEL METER Note When the Pro Tools Remote layer is selected the 01 96 top panel faders and other channel buttons are available for remote control To control the 01V96 you need to select an Input Channel Layer or the Master Layer Display While the Pro Tools layer is selected you can use the F2 F4 buttons as well as the left and right Tab Scroll buttons to select display modes You can select the follow ing display modes using these buttons Insert Display mode F2 button Press the F2 button to select Insert Display mode In this mode you can assign and edit plug ins DIO SETUP Initial Data BSL STI2 STI3 5114 Te c c I SELECT ASSIGN TIME CODE Pan a O FEET 855 e o INSERT BSSIGN EDIT ASSIGN COMPARE BYPASS INSERT Press a channel strip s INSERT switch ito assign edit an insert OO uot Co Co ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER CHANNEL METER 1 TARGET This parameter enables you to select the remote control target device 2 COUNTER This counter indicates the current position This counter works in unison with the time code counter on Pro Tools The display format
47. This button turns the currently selected Aux Out 1 8 or off It links with the corresponding ON 1 8 button in the Master layer This fader sets the currently selected Aux Out 1 8 level It links with the corresponding fader 1 8 in the Master layer The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0 0 dB 01V96 Owner s Manual Setting Aux Out 1 8 from the Control Surface 113 Setting Aux Out 1 8 from the Control Surface You can use the faders SEL buttons and various buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control certain parameters for Aux Out 1 8 Setting Levels To set Aux Out 1 8 levels press the MASTER button in the LAYER section to select the Master layer then move faders 1 8 At this time you can turn Aux Out 1 8 on or off using the corresponding ON 1 8 buttons EQ settings To control Aux Out 1 8 EQ parameters select the desired Aux Out 1 8 using the corre sponding SEL button or fader then use the buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels see page 83 Setting Aux Send Levels You can adjust the level of signals routed from Input Channels to the corresponding Aux Out 1 8 Setting Send Levels from the Display You can view multiple channels Aux Send levels on the scr
48. m Em msec E 9 9 0 Isamrie o i STEREO R msec samrie 4 OUT OLY The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels except that this page does not include the MIX FB GAIN parameters see page 80 Tip You can also display the Out Dly page if you select the desired Aux Out 1 8 by pressing the corresponding SEL button while the DLY related parameters are indicated on the page 01V96 Owner s Manual Setting Aux Out 1 8 from the Display 111 Comp settings To set the Aux Out 1 8 compressors press the DISPLAY ACCESS DYNAMICS button then press the F3 button to display the Dynamics Comp Edit page then select the desired Aux Out 1 8 by using the corresponding SEL buttons THRESHOLD Ors i ATTACK 58ms oe O OUT ico KNEE EDIT GATE LIB Z COMP LIS The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels see page 82 EQ settings To set the EQ for Aux Out 1 8 press the DISPLAY ACCESS EQ button then press the F1 button to display the EQ EQ Edit page then use the SEL buttons to select Aux Out 1 8 Initial Data m STI1 STI2 5713 STI4 sr O Hn 1 EQUALIZER EDIT LIBRARY A IN ATT JA OUT The para
49. 9 9 m O I jebiq B CILLATORAA CH STATUS fi BATTERY ZA USER DEF M3 On this page use the following buttons to select a slot or connector for which you want to view the channel status CD 2TR IN This button enables you to view the Channel Status of input signals connected to the 2TR Digital Inputs 2 SLOT These buttons enable you to view the Channel Status of each two adjacent odd and even in this order channel signals connected to the digital I O card installed in the slot 2 Move the cursor to the desired input or slot button then press ENTER Channel Status information for the selected input is displayed Channel Status information includes the following items 3 FS Indicates the sampling rate If no signal is being input or if the incoming wordclock is not synching to the internal clock Unlock appears 4 EMPHASIS Indicates the Emphasis on off status 6 CATEGORY Indicates the status of Category Code Bit included in the IEC958 Part 2 S PDIF Con sumer format This parameter can display the following values Parameter value Description General Temporarily used Laser Optical Laser optical device D D Conv Digital Digital converter and signal processing device Magnetic Magnetic tape device and magnetic disk device 01V96 Owner s Manual 74 Chapter 6 Analog I O amp Digital I O Parameter value D Broadcast Descript
50. Display section F1 button Press this button to reset the Clipping and Peak Hold indicators on Meter Display mode pages Tab Scroll buttons lt gt These buttons switch the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT parameter settings on Insert Display mode pages Data Entry section ENTER button This button switches the on off status of the buttons on the display Left Right Up Down gt V cursor buttons These buttons move the cursor on the display INC amp DEC buttons The INC button works the same as the Enter key on your computer keyboard The DEC button works the same as the Esc key on your computer keyboard Parameter wheel The Parameter wheel enables you to adjust the currently selected parameter or execute the shuttle and scrub operation By default it adjusts the value of the currently selected param eter The P WHEEL MODE parameter indicates Prm USER DEFINED KEYS section 1 8 buttons You can assign one of 167 parameters to each of these buttons In particular if you assign any of 54 Remote Control parameters to these buttons you can operate the transport sec tion and select various Pro Tools modes from the 01V96 top panel See page 231 for more information on assigning the parameters to the buttons Parameter Function Places Pro Tools in Record Enabled mode The button indicator flashes while DAW REC the transport section is stopped The indicator lights up when
51. The following table lists the preset memories in the Gate library No Preset Name Type Description 1 Gate GATE Gate template 2 Ducking DUCKING Ducking template 3 A Dr BD GATE Gate preset for use with acoustic bass drums 4 A SN GATE Gate preset for use with acoustic snare drums 01V96 Owner s Manual 180 Chapter 16 Libraries Compressor Library This library enables you to store and recall settings for the compressors on Input Channels Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 and Stereo Out The library contains 36 preset memories and 92 user readable amp writable memories Follow the steps below to use the Compressor library Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DYNAMICS button then press the F4 button The Dynamics Comp Lib page appears DYNAMICS Initial Data CHi CHi CURRENT COMP LIBRARY TITLE Dr BD Dr BD Compander 5 Compander CURRENT CURVE Wwe Cr c o 1 CURRENT TYPE This parameter displays the currently selected channel comp type Compressor Expander Compander Soft Compander Hard 2 CURRENT CURVE This graph displays the current compressor curve 3 GR meters These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the compressor and the post comp levels of the currently selected channel and its available pair partner 4 Type amp Curve section The type and curve of the
52. The parameter indicators are explained below Parameter values Description No assignment ADAT 1 ADAT 8 ADAT OUT Output Channels 1 8 SL 01 SL 16 Slot Channels 1 16 1 4 OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 2TD L 2TD R 2TR OUT DIGITAL L R FX1 1 FX1 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 1 FX2 1 FX2 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2 FX3 1 FX3 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3 FX4 1 FX4 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4 Press ENTER to confirm the change If you move the cursor to another parameter box or display another page before you press the ENTER button all settings on this page will be cancelled Move the cursor to the desired IN parameter box then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the inputs ADAT IN chan nels or slot input channels to be patched to the Insert In Refer to the explanation regarding the Input Patch for more information on the parameter values see page 122 Press ENTER to confirm the change Tip Move the cursor to an empty OUT or IN parameter box and press the ENTER button The Patch Select window appears Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the cursor buttons to select an item to be patched then press ENTER Move the cursor to the YES button then press ENTER The selected item is now patched To enable the specified Insert patch move the cursor
53. Tip Pressing and holding down the first SEL button of the paired channels and pressing the second SEL button cancels the pair Pairing Input Channels Using the Display Press the PAIR GROUP button repeatedly until the Pair Grup Input page appears 15111 STI2 STIS STI4 Peet DO um ineo INPUT PAIR MODE 4 1 1492 sus 7498 2 a 2 998910 119 12 15 89 14 15 t9 16 17 15 19 t9 20 21 22 258924 2 2 2 2 25 26 27 4928 29 p 30 31 p 32 HONOx2 MONO x 2 HONOx2 2 L OUTPUT IN FADER IN MUTE The parameters on this page are described below 1 PAIR MODE Determines how channels are paired 2 STEREO MONO x2 buttons These buttons turn pairs on or off Move the cursor to the PAIR MODE parameter field 1 then select the HORIZONTAL or VERTICAL button The function of each mode is described below HORIZONTAL This button pairs adjacent odd even channels default VERTICAL This button pairs counterpart channels on Layer 1 and Layer 2 that share the same physical fader e g CH1 amp CH17 CH16 amp CH32 etc This mode is useful when you wish to use one fader to control both stereo channels 01V96 Owner s Manual Sjouueu 1ndul N 94 Chapter 7 Input Channels When you switch the Pair Mode
54. You can patch Bus Out 1 8 signals to Outputs and Slots 1 2 as well as to the Stereo Bus You can adjust thelevel and pan settings of the signals routed to the Stereo Bus for each bus This is convenient when you wish to use Bus Outs 1 8 as a Group Bus To patch the Bus Out 1 8 signals to the Stereo Bus press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly to display the Pan Route Bus to St page PRN ROUTE Initial Data 5112 STI3 STI4 BUS1 BUST BUS1 BUSS BUS4 BUSS 56 5 BUSS PRH 0 Bill CEHTER CEHTER Em er ca i ROUTI 16 fiROUTIT STIfA BUS TO ST Move the cursor to the desired parameter you wish change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the setting 0 TO ST PAN These controls pan the Bus Out 1 8 signals between the left and right Stereo Out buses 2 TO ST ON OFF These buttons turn on and off the Bus Out 1 8 to the Stereo Bus routing 3 TO ST Faders These faders set the Bus Out 1 8 to Stereo Bus levels sino sng 01V96 Owner s Manual 102 chapter 8 Bus Outs Viewing the Stereo Out and Bus Out Settings You can view and adjust parameter settings for the currently selected Stereo Out or Bus Out on the View Parameter and Fader pages Viewing the Compressor and EQ Settings To displ
55. Changing the Signal Path to the ADAT OUT Connector Slot or OMNI OUT connectors Follow the steps below to change the signal path patched to the ADAT OUT connector the optional mini YGDAI card installed in the slot or the OMNI OUT connectors Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Out Patch page appears Each parameter box displays the currently patched signal path PRTCH Initial Data CH1 CH1 OO ai SLOT OUTPUT PATCH CD SLOT 1 16 These parameter boxes the routing of Slot Channel 1 16 signals 2 ADAT 1 8 These parameter boxes set the routing of ADAT OUT connector output channel 1 8 sig nals 8 OMNI 1 4 These parameter boxes set the routing of OMNI OUT connector 1 4 signals The parameter indicators are explained below Parameter value Description No assignment 051 058 Bus Out 1 8 signal AUX1 AUX8 Aux Out 1 8 signal ST L R Stereo Out signal INS CH1 INS CH32 Input Channel 1 32 Insert Out INS BUS1 INS BUS8 amp Bus Out 1 8 Insert Out INS AUX1 INS AUX8 Aux Out 1 8 Insert Out INS ST L ST R Stereo Out Insert Out CAS BUS1 BUS8 Bus 1 8 Cascade Outs CAS AUX1 AUX8 Aux Bus 1 8 Cascade Outs CAS ST L ST R Stereo Bus Cascade Outs CASSOLOL CASSOLOR Solo Bus Cascade Outs Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the patching Press ENT
56. No LIBRARY TITLE 6 Gate Reverb 5 Early Ref 4 Reverb Plate EFFECT TYPE 3 Reverb Stage REVERB HALL 1IN ZOLIT D EFFECT NAME This parameter displays the name of the Effects program currently selected by the Effects processor 2 TYPE This parameter displays the effects type currently used by the Effects processor The number of input and output channels for the currently used effects appears below the TYPE parameter Move the cursor to this button then press ENTER to display the Effect 1 Edit 2 Edit FX3 Edit or FX4 Edit page to adjust the Effects parameters Move the cursor to this button then press ENTER to display the In Patch Effect page to assign the input and output signals of Effects processors 1 4 5 Level meters These meters indicate the input or output levels of the currently selected Effects proces sor Select the IN button or OUT button to display the input levels or output levels respectively For details on storing and recalling programs see General Library Operation on page 171 01V96 Owner s Manual 177 Using Libraries The following tables list the preset effects programs in the Effects library Reverbs Preset Name Reverb Hall Type REVERB HALL Description Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate Reverb Room REVERB ROOM Room reverberation simulation with gate Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE Reverb design
57. OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstrafe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 49 4101 3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2313 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH 51 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21 128 Jebel Ali Freezone P O Box 17328 Dubai U A E Tel 4971 4 881 5868 ASIA THE PEOPLE S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music amp Electronics China Co Ltd 25 United Plaza 1468 Nanjing Road West Jingan Shanghai China Tel 021 6247 2211 INDONESIA PT Yamaha Music Indonesia Distributor PT Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center Jalan Jend Gatot Subroto Kav 4 Jakarta 12930 Indonesia Tel 21 520 2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd Tong Yang Securities Bldg 16F 23 8 Yoido dong Youngdungpo ku Seoul Korea Tel 02 3770 0660 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia Sdn Bhd Lot 8 Jalan Perbandaran 47301 Kelana Jaya Petaling Jaya Selangor Malaysia Tel 3 78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte Ltd No 11 Ubi Road 1 No 06 02 Meiban Industrial Building Singapore Tel 747 4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co Ltd 6 Sec 2 Nan Jing E Rd Taipei Taiwan 104 R O C Tel 02 2511 8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co Ltd 121 60 61 RS To
58. RMO9 09 VOL amp PAN __ _ L L L L L L L L L L E 10 los fos 7 leno RM10 XG CH10 VOL amp PAN L 10 los 09 7 RM11 XG CH11 VOL amp PAN EE 10 lac los loa 7 e p es ea TR RM12 XG12 12 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac Jos joe los 7 ON END esed Enn dee emo L zg is RM13 XG13 XG CH13 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac 08 joc los 7 leno ON END n eS Ree PS os Tutos RM14 XG14 XG CH14 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac Jos los 7 ON END S res e e dp n ee Tem o RM15 XG15 XG CH15 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac jos joe 7 END ON END e qub mile ee RM16 16 XG CH16 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac lor 7 leno 01V96 Owner s Manual User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings 253 Bank 4 Nuendo VST Mixer Name Data Format ID Controller Short Long 1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 BO 40 S
59. Setting the Input Levels 1 Cuethe musicians to play the musical instru ments connected to INPUT connectors 1 12 Si PAD switch while adjusting the corresponding PAD pa switches and GAIN controls so that the slt PEAK indicators temporarily flash at the highest volumes can EX PEAK indicator The GAIN controls adjust the analog input sensitivity make a high quality record ing with a wide dynamic range and little noise set the GAIN controls as high as possible while avoiding clipping 2 Press the LAYER 1 16 button Input Channel Layer 1 16 is now available for control from the channel strip section Tip Since the fader and ON button positions of each layer are memorized those positions for the corresponding layer are restored when you switch to that layer 3 Pressthe DISPLAY ACCESS HOME button then press the F1 button to dis play the Meter CH1 32 page Meter pages are the start point for mixing and recording They display channel input and output levels and compressor and gate gain reduction amounts 01V96 Owner s Manual mE 50 Chapter 5 Tutorial 1 32 page enables you to view Input Channel 1 32 levels and compressor and gate gain reduction amounts 12 34 5 6 7 8 9 16 11 12 14 15 16 UU r M OO co co co co
60. cow Z mal PARAMETER 2 FRDER LIBRARY 1 16 E I3 The following parameters are available sections marked with an asterisk are unavailable for the ST IN Channels 1 section This section enables you to turn the gate type dynamics processor on or off and set the parameters See page 81 for more information 01V96 Owner s Manual Sjouueu 1ndul N 88 Chapter 7 Input Channels 2 section This section enables you to turn the compressor type dynamics processor on or off and set the parameters See page 82 for more information 3 INSERT section This section enables you to turn the Insert on or off and patch the Insert In and Out See page 127 for more information 4 EQ section This section enables you to set various EQ parameters See page 84 for more informa tion 5 Meters These meters indicate the signal levels of the currently selected Input Channel and its available pair partner 6 Phase section You can reverse the signal phase of the currently selected Input Channel See page 79 for more information 7 DELAY section This section enables you to set the currently selected channel s Delay function See page 80 for more information PAIR section This section indicates whether or not channels are paired The heart icon Wf is in one piece when channels are paired The heart icon is broken amp 3 when channels a
61. hes 207 STEREO OUT connectors 24 70 USB 25 STEREO section 16 OMS 187 STORE button aa 21 USB port 211 Store Confirmation preference 227 User assignable layer 229 Storing and Recalling 163 USER DEFINED KEYS 21 Surround 135 Initial assignments 243 BUSI BUSS 138 User defined keys 231 Utility Battery page 238 Utility CH Status page 73 Utility Lock page 233 Utility Oscillator page 230 Utility User Def page 231 UTILITY button 18 u Variable mode 115 118 141 VERTICAL 93 PATTERN 142 View Fader page 88 102 112 Setting up and Selecting 136 View Library page 173 ST EINK Z aa anan ns 142 View Parameter page 87 102 112 SURROUND MODE 87 136 VIEW button Surround mode indicator 27 Surround 135 W Trajectory patterns 141 wCIN 42 SURROUND MODE Ws a ree 16 Website OMNE vi 72 Surround mode indicator 27 tetendit 11 Surround modes
62. 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 01000111 47 Ommmmmmm mh 0 127 Library 1 128 Ommmmmmm ml 256 351 Channel current data EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive DATA NAME 2 8 2 21 Effect library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number O Library no 1 127 Library no 128 256 EFFECTI 259 EFFECTA 8192 UN DO 256 263 are the data for the corresponding area of the edit buffer For reception by the 01V96 only the user area is valid 52 127 256 259 8192 STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 cl COUNT LOW cl 01001100 4C 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 01000101 45 F Ommmmmmm mh 0 127 Library 1 128 Ommmmmmm ml 256 259 Effect1 4 current BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number DATA NAME DATA Oddddddd ds Effect Library data of block bb Oddddddd de CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee Invert L 4 de 1 amp Ox7F EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 22 Effect library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes ofthe DATA NAME
63. 27 Dyna Flange DYNA FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger 28 Dyna Phaser DYNA PHASER Dynamically controlled phase shifter 01V96 Owner s Manual 9 2 n 178 Chapter 16 Libraries Combination Effects No Preset Name Type Description 29 Rev Chorus REV CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel 30 Rev gt Chorus REV gt CHORUS Reverb and chorus in series 31 Rev Flange REV FLANGE Reverb and flanger in parallel 32 Rev gt Flange REV gt FLANGE Reverb and flanger in series 33 Rev Sympho REV SYMPHO Reverb and symphonic in parallel 34 Rev gt Sympho REV gt SYMPHO Reverb and symphonic in series 35 Rev gt Pan REV gt PAN Reverb and auto pan in series 36 Delay ER DELAY ER Delay and early reflections in parallel 37 Delay gt ER DELAY gt ER Delay and early reflections in series 38 Delay Rev DELAY REV Delay and reverb in parallel 39 Delay gt Rev DELAY gt REV Delay and reverb in series 40 Dist gt Delay DIST gt DELAY Distortion and delay in series Others No Preset Name Type Description 41 Multi Filter MULTI FILTER 3 band parallel filter 24 dB octave 42 Freeze FREEZE Simple sampler 43 Stereo Reverb ST REVERB Stereo reverb 44 M Band Dyna M BAND DYNA 3 band dynamics processor 01V96 Owner s Manual Using Libraries 179 Gate Library The Gate li
64. 8 IN OUT connectors These optical TOSLINK connectors input and output ADAT digital audio signals 4 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL This RCA phono connector outputs consumer format IEC 60958 digital audio The con nector is typically used to connect the digital stereo input consumer format of a DAT recorder MD recorder or CD recorder 5 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL This RCA phono connector accepts consumer format IEC 60958 digital audio The con nector is typically used to connect the digital stereo output consumer format of a DAT recorder MD recorder or CD recorder 01V96 Owner s Manual Rear Panel 25 MIDI Control Section TO HOST O THRU OUT IN SB OoOo CD MIDI IN THRU OUT ports These standard MIDI IN OUT and THRU ports enable you to connect the 01V96 to other MIDI equipment 2 TO HOST USB port This USB port enables you to connect a computer equipped with a USB port Jeoy S DLNS IN SLOT Section SLOT CD SLOT You can insert optional mini YGDAI cards into this slot See page 26 for information on installing these cards Power Section POWER c t i H t D POWER ON OFF switch This switch turns the power to the 01V96 on or off Note To prevent loud clicks and thumps in your speakers turn on your audio equipment in the following order reverse this order when turning the equipment off sound sources
65. EQ F LOW INPUT8 72 EQ F LOW INPUT9 73 FLOW INPUT10 74 FLOW INPUT11 75 FLOW INPUT12 76 F LOW INPUT13 77 EQ FLOW INPUT14 78 EQ F LOW INPUT15 79 FLOW INPUT16 80 EQ F LOW INPUT17 81 EQ FLOW INPUT18 82 EQ F LOW INPUT19 83 EQ FLOW INPUT20 84 EQ F LOW INPUT21 85 EQ FLOW INPUT22 86 EQ FLOW INPUT23 87 EQ FLOW INPUT24 88 NO ASSIGN 89 Q LOW INPUT1 90 EQ Q LOW INPUT2 91 EQ Q LOW INPUT3 92 Q LOW INPUT4 93 EQ Q LOW INPUTS 94 Q LOW INPUT6 95 Q LOW 102 EQ Q LOW INPUT8 103 EQ Q LOW INPUT9 104 EQ Q LOW INPUT10 105 EQ Q LOW INPUT11 106 EQ Q LOW INPUT12 107 EQ Q LOW INPUT13 108 EQ Q LOW INPUT14 109 EQ Q LOW INPUT15 110 EQ Q LOW INPUT16 111 EQ Q LOW INPUT17 112 EQ Q LOW INPUT18 113 EQ Q LOW INPUT19 114 EQ Q LOW INPUT20 115 EQ Q LOW INPUT21 116 EQ Q LOW INPUT22 117 EQ Q LOW INPUT23 118 EQ Q LOW INPUT24 119 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Owner s Manual 296 Appendix C MIDI CHANNELA High Mid Low High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 59 NO ASSIGN
66. EQ Q LOW ST IN2 40 EQ GLOWL INPUT32 105 EQ Q LOW ST IN3 41 EQ GLOWL ST IN1 106 EQ Q LOW ST IN4 42 GLOWL ST IN2 107 NO ASSIGN 43 EQ GLOWL ST IN3 108 NO ASSIGN 44 EQ GLOWL 5 4 109 55 45 NO ASSIGN 110 NO ASSIGN 46 NO ASSIGN 111 NO ASSIGN 47 NO ASSIGN 112 NO ASSIGN 48 NO ASSIGN 113 NO ASSIGN 49 NO ASSIGN 114 NO ASSIGN 50 ASSIGN 115 NO ASSIGN 51 NO ASSIGN 116 55 52 NO ASSIGN 117 55 53 NO ASSIGN 118 NO ASSIGN 54 NO ASSIGN 119 NO ASSIGN 55 NO ASSIGN 56 NO ASSIGN 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Owner s Manual Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 297 5 High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 1 EQ G LO MID H INPUT1 2 G LO MID H INPUT2 3 EQ G LO MID H INPUT3 4 EQ G LO MID H INPUT4 5 EQ G LO MID H INPUTS 6 EQ G LO MID H INPUT6 7 EQ G LO MID H 8 EQ G LO MID H INPUT8 9 EQ G LO MID H INPUT9 10 EQ G LO MID H INPUT10 11 G LO MID H INPUT11 12 EQ G LO MID H INPUT12 13 EQ G LO MID H INPUT13 14 EQ G LO MID H INPUT14 15 EQ G LO MID H INPUT15 16 EQ G LO MID H INPUT16 17 EQ G LO MID H INPUT17 18 EQ G LO MID H INPUT18 19 EQ G LO MID H INPUT19 20 EQ G LO MID H INPUT20
67. INPUT connectors 1 16 Input Channels 1 16 ADAT IN channels 1 8 Input Channels 17 24 Slot channels 1 8 Input Channels 25 32 Outputs 1 2 of Internal Effects Processor 1 4 ST IN Channels 1 4 Follow the steps below to view or change the patching Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the following page appears PRTCH Initial Data CHi CHi 00 INPUT PATCH INPUT RD IN 1 Inputs and Slot channels that are currently assigned to Input Channels are shown in the parameter boxes 1 beneath the channel numbers The parameter indicators are explained below LE No assignment e 1 16 INPUT connectors 1 16 ADATI ADATS ADAT IN channels 1 8 SL 01 SL 16 Slot channels 1 16 FX1 I FX1 2 Outputs 1 2 of Internal Effects Processor 1 2 1 2 2 Outputs 1 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2 e FX3 1 FX3 2 Outputs 1 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3 FX4 1 FX4 2 Outputs 1 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4 e DLR art Sahaya 2TR IN DIGITAL L R connectors Follow the steps below to view or change the patching Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a patch parameter 1 for which you want to change the assignment and rotate the or press the I
68. PREFERI PREFERZ ZF 01V96 Owner s Manual Setting Preferences 227 This page contains the following parameters These parameters are explained in the order from the top of the left column to the bottom of the right column Auto PAN Display If this check box is on the Pan Route pages appear automatically when you operate the PAN control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section In Stereo Surround mode operating the PAN control enables you to adjust the left and right Pan setting Otherwise it enables you to adjust the Surround Pan settings Auto EQUALIZER Display If this check box is on the EQ EQ Edit page appears automatically when you press an EQ related button in the SELECTED CHANNEL section Auto SOLO Display If this check box is on the DIO Setup Monitor page appears automatically when you solo an Input Channel Auto WORD CLOCK Display If this check box is on the DIO Setup Word Clock page appears automatically if the cur rently selected external wordclock source fails Auto Channel Select If this check box is on you can select a channel by moving the corresponding fader or by turning on the corresponding channel SOLO or ON button Store Confirmation If this check box is on the Title Edit window to input a Scene or library memory name appears when you store a Scene or library memory Recall Confirmation If this check box is on a confirmation window appears when you recall a Scen
69. Press and hold down the AUX 6 button and press the desired SEL button to reset the corresponding channel fader level 01V96 Owner s Manual 196 Chapter 17 Remote Control Muting Channels To mute Pro Tools channels press the ON buttons The ON button indicators of muted channels turn off Grouped channels are muted together Press the ON buttons again to unmute channels The ON button indicators of unmuted channels light up There are two mute modes in Pro Tools Implicit mute and Explicit mute You can check the mute mode by viewing the ON button indicators Implicit mute This is a forced mute mode in which the channels are muted because other channels are soloed In this mode the ON but ton indicators flash Explicit mute In this mode the channels are turned off manually In this mode the ON button indicators turn off Panning Channels You can adjust the Pro Tools channel pan settings 1 Press the FADER MODE AUX 7 button The button indicator lights up 2 Press the F3 button to select Channel Display mode On a Channel Display mode page parameter controls 1 16 indicate the pan settings 3 Press the SEL button of the channel for which you want to adjust the pan setting To adjust the stereo channel panpots press the STEREO SEL button then press the AUX 7 button to select the L or R channel Pressing the AUX 7 button repeatedly toggles between
70. button While playing back the recording on the digital MTR from the beginning operate faders 1 16 to adjust the send level of the signals routed from Input Channels to Effects processor 1 To adjust the effect return level use the rotary level control located on the left side of the ST IN section on the top panel You can view the current level in the upper right corner of the display EFFECT Initial Data 5112 5113 5114 mean 0 O 0 1 N ZOUT LIBRARY TITLE 6 Gate Reverb 5 Early Ref 1 4 Reuerb Plate EFFECT TYPE 3 Reverb Stage REUERB ROOM 11N ZOLIT 01V96 Owner s Manual 68 Chapter 5 Tutorial Recording to the Master Recorder Follow the steps below to record the mixed stereo signal from the 01V96 to the connected master recorder 1 Startrecording on the master recorder then start playing back on the digital MTR During recording observe the stereo meter on the right of the display and confirm that the stereo output level is not clipping 2 Whenthe playbackis finished stop the master recorder then stop the digital MTR 3 Turnon the ON button for ST IN Channel 2 in the ST IN section The button indicator lights up 4 Play back the recording on the master recorder The playback signal is input at the 01V96 s 2TR IN DIGITAL connector then routed through ST IN Channel 2 to the Stereo bus Note Most consumer type DAT recorders
71. 0 28 0 7 Preset EQ Parameters 277 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Title Bass Drum 3 Snare Drum 3 Tom tom 2 Piano 3 Piano Low Piano High Fine EQ Cass Narrator Parameter LOW L MID H MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 3 5 dB 10 0 dB 3 5 dB 0 0 dB 118 Hz 315 Hz 4 25 kHz 20 0 kHz 2 10 0 4 0 4 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 3 5 dB 0 0 dB 224 Hz 560 Hz 4 25 kHz 4 00 kHz 4 5 2 8 0 1 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 9 0 dB 1 5 dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 90 Hz 212Hz 5 30 kHz 17 0 kHz 4 5 1 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 5 dB 13 0 dB 4 5 dB 2 5 dB 100 Hz 475 Hz 2 36 kHz 10 0 kHz 8 10 9 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 5 5 dB 41 5 dB 6 0 dB 0 0 dB 190 Hz 400 Hz 6 70 kHz 12 5 kHz 10 6 3 2 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 5 5 dB 41 5 dB 5 0 dB 3 0 dB 190 Hz 400 Hz 6 70 kHz 5 60 kHz 10 6 3 2 2 0 1 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 1 5 dB 0 0 dB 1 0 dB 3 0 dB 75Hz 1 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 12 5 kHz 4 5 1 8 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 0 dB 1 0 dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 106 Hz 710Hz 2 50 kHz 10 0 kHz 4 7 0 63 01V96 Owner s Manual 278 Appendix A Parameter Lists Preset Gate Parameters fs 44 1 kHz Title Type Parameter Value Threshold dB
72. 21 EQ G LO MID H INPUT21 22 EQ G LO MID H INPUT22 23 EQ G LO MID H INPUT23 24 EQ G LO MID H INPUT24 25 ASSIGN 26 ASSIGN 27 ASSIGN 28 ASSIGN 29 ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 31 NO ASSIGN 32 NO ASSIGN 33 EQ G LO MID L INPUT1 34 EQ G LO MID L INPUT2 35 EQ G LO MID L INPUT3 36 EQ G LO MID L INPUT4 37 G LO MID L INPUT5 38 EQ G LO MID L INPUT6 39 EQ G LO MID L 40 EQ G LO MID L INPUT8 41 G LO MID L INPUT9 42 G LO MID L INPUT10 43 EQ G LO MID L INPUT11 44 EQ G LO MID L INPUT12 45 G LO MID L INPUT13 46 EQ G LO MID L INPUT14 47 G LO MID L INPUT15 48 EQ G LO MID L INPUT16 49 EQ G LO MID L INPUT17 50 EQ G LO MID L INPUT18 51 EQ G LO MID L INPUT19 52 EQ G LO MID L INPUT20 53 EQ G LO MID L INPUT21 54 EQ G LO MID L INPUT22 55 EQ G LO MID L INPUT23 56 EQ G LO MID L INPUT24 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN High Mid Low 59 NO ASSIGN 60 NO ASSIGN 61 NO ASSIGN 62 NO ASSIGN 63 NO ASSIGN 64 F LO MID INPUT1 65 EQ F LO MID INPUT2 66 EQ F LO MID INPUT3 67 EQ F LO MID INPUT4 68 EQ F LO MID INPUTS 69 EQ F LO MID INPUT6 70 EQ F LO MID 71 EQ F LO MID INPUT8 72 EQ F LO MID INPUT9
73. 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Mid high crossover frequency SLOPE 6 to 12 dB Filter slope CEILING 6 0 to 0 0 dB OFF Specifies the maximum output level EXP THRE 54 0 to 24 0 dB Expander threshold EXP RAT 1 1 to 1 Expander ratio EXP REL 1 Expander release time EXP BYP OFF ON Expander bypass LIM THRE 12 0 to 0 0 dB Limiter threshold LIM ATK 0 120 ms Limiter attack LIM REL 1 Limiter release time LIM BYP OFF ON Limiter bypass KNEE 0 5 Limiter knee SOLO LOW OFF ON If this is on only the low frequency band will be output SOLO MID OFF ON If this is on only the mid frequency band will be output SOLO HIGH OFF ON If this is on only the high frequency band will be output 1 fs 96 kHz 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz ms 23 0 s fs 88 2 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s 01V96 Owner s Manual 274 Preset EQ Parameters Appendix A Parameter Lists 01V96 Owner s Manual Parameter Title LOW L MID H MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 3 5 dB 3 5 dB 0 0 dB 4 0 dB 01 Bass Drum 1 100 Hz 265 Hz 1 06 kHz 5 30 kHz 1 2 10 0 9 PEAKING LPF 48 0 dB 7 0 dB 6 0 dB ON 02 Bass Drum 2 80 Hz 400 Hz 2 50 kHz 12 5 kHz 1 4 4 5 2 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 0 5 dB 0 0 dB 3 0 dB 44 5 dB
74. 71 Dimensions set Us 291 DIO Warning preference 227 DIO Setup Cascade page 237 DIO Setup Format page 74 75 DIO Setup Insert page 189 DIO Setup Machine page 209 DIO Setup Meter page 191 DIO Setup MIDI Host page TOR 188 208 212 237 DIO Setup Monitor page 132 DIO Setup Output Att page 106 01V96 Owner s Manual Index 325 DIO Setup Prefer1 page 226 PBOlbraty ertet 182 DIO Setup Prefer2 page 226 Preset eee metano 183 DIO Setup Remote page EQ link oem 147 10 e E LE 188 204 229 IEEE1394 _ 22 DIO Setup Surr Bus page ps F INDIVIDUAL 35 DIO Setup Word Clock page 41 72 pR s 142 pur DIO SETUP button 18 pipettes sos ae OUTS i Fader groups dum lide tee tes a DISPLAY ACCESS section 18 Pu 4 oe 22 e Display Brightness preference cos 229 Display section esee 19 167 Colpressns DIST gt DELAY omi i e uU DISTORTION 20 Ciara dA ar DATE ie A 2 a 142 STIN 166 5 DOUBLE CHANNEL s STEREO 167 DOUBLE SPEED iid
75. 76 Chapter 6 Analog I O amp Digital I O 01V96 Owner s Manual SINGLE In Single mode digital audio data is received and transmitted at a sampling rate that is half 44 1 48 kHz the current higher sampling rate of the 01V96 For example this is useful when you wish to send 44 1 kHz digital signals from an external HDR to the 01V96 running at 88 2 KHz Note This mode is unavailable for the slot in which the optional Yamaha MY9 AE96 or 8 965 Digital I O card is installed You cannot select this mode unless the 01V96 is operating at a high sampling rate When the 01V96 operates at a high sampling rate 88 2 kHz 96 kHz only two internal effects processors are available Tip The parameter fields display if the slot contains no I O card or if an AD DA card or other I O card that does not allow you to set the transfer format has been installed Input Channels 77 7 Input Channels This chapter describes how to adjust the 01V96 s Input Channel parameters About Input Channels The input Channel section enables you to adjust the level and tone of the signals input to the 01V96 and the signals output from the internal Effects processors 1 4 and route the signals to Buses 1 8 the Stereo Bus and Aux Sends 1 8 There are two types of Input Chan nels each featuring slightly different functions monaural Input Channels 1 32 and stereo ST IN Channels 1 4 Input
76. 88 8 00 02 RUX 2 1 Be 56 1 7 8 sec 88 8 880 80 80 0 08 0 88 0 08 8 08 8 00 0 STEREO TT s SCENE IN FADE A PCL SAFE fI 1 BUS1 8 These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for each Out 1 8 in the range of 00 0 through 30 0 seconds 2 AUX1 8 These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for Aux Outs 1 8 8 STEREO This parameter enables you to set the Fade Time for the Stereo Out Tip You can copy the currently selected Output Channel Fade Time setting to all Output Channels by double clicking the ENTER button 01V96 Owner s Manual SalJOUJ9 A 9Uu95S 168 Chapter 15 5 Memories Recalling Scenes Safely When a Scene is recalled all mix parameters are set accordingly However in some situa tions you can retain the current settings of certain parameters on certain channels by using the Recall Safe function Recall Safe settings are stored in Scene memories To set the Recall Safe function press the DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE button repeatedly until the Scene Rcl Safe page appears SCENE Initial Data STI2 5113 5714 mamo 0 O 0 EJ Global Recall Safe SAFE RECALL SAFE CHANNEL DISABLED MODE STEREO AUX AUX ON EFFECT SCENE M IN FADE M OUT FADE RCL SAFE 1 Global Recall Safe When this check box is checked Recall Safe settings stored in Scene memories are
77. Appendix MIDI High Mid Low 59 NO ASSIGN 60 NO ASSIGN 61 NO ASSIGN 62 NO ASSIGN 63 NO ASSIGN 64 EQ F HI MID INPUT25 65 F HI MID INPUT26 66 EQ F HI MID INPUT27 67 EQ F HI MID 28 68 EQ F HI MID INPUT29 69 F HI MID INPUT30 70 EQ F HI MID INPUT31 71 EQ F HI MID INPUT32 72 EQ F HI MID ST IN1 73 EQ F HI MID ST IN2 74 EQ F HI MID ST IN3 75 EQ F HI MID 5 4 76 NO ASSIGN 77 NO ASSIGN 78 NO ASSIGN 79 NO ASSIGN 80 NO ASSIGN 81 NO ASSIGN 82 NO ASSIGN 83 NO ASSIGN 84 NO ASSIGN 85 NO ASSIGN 86 NO ASSIGN 87 NO ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ Q HI MID INPUT25 90 EQ Q HI MID INPUT26 91 EQ Q HI MID INPUT27 92 EQ Q HI MID INPUT28 93 EQ Q HI MID INPUT29 94 EQ Q HI MID INPUT30 95 EQ Q HI MID INPUT31 102 EQ Q HI MID INPUT32 103 EQ Q HI MID ST IN1 104 EQ Q HI MID ST IN2 105 EQ Q HI MID ST IN3 106 EQ Q HI MID ST IN4 107 NO ASSIGN 108 NO ASSIGN 109 NO ASSIGN 110 NO ASSIGN 111 NO ASSIGN 112 NO ASSIGN 113 NO ASSIGN 114 NO ASSIGN 115 NO ASSIGN 116 NO ASSIGN 11
78. EQ G HI MID H 8 EQ HI MID H INPUT8 9 EQ G HI MID H INPUT9 10 EQ G HI MID H INPUT10 11 HI MID H INPUT11 12 EQ G HI MID H INPUT12 13 HI MID H INPUT13 14 EQ G HI MID H INPUT14 15 EQ G HI MID H INPUT15 16 EQ G HI MID H INPUT16 17 EQ HI MID H INPUT17 18 EQ G HI MID H INPUT18 19 EQ G HI MID H INPUT19 20 EQ G HI MID H INPUT20 21 EQ G HI MID H INPUT21 22 EQ G HI MID H INPUT22 23 EQ G HI MID H INPUT23 24 EQ G HI MID H INPUT24 25 ASSIGN 26 ASSIGN 27 ASSIGN 28 ASSIGN 29 ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 31 NO ASSIGN 32 NO ASSIGN 33 EQ G HI MID L INPUT1 34 EQ G HI MID L INPUT2 35 EQ G HI MID L INPUT3 36 EQ G HI MID L INPUT4 37 G HI MID L INPUT5 38 EQ G HI MID L INPUT6 39 EQ G HI MID L 40 EQ G HI MID L INPUT8 41 G HI MID L INPUT9 42 G HI MID L INPUT10 43 EQ G HI MID L INPUT11 44 EQ G HI MID L INPUT12 45 G HI MID L INPUT13 46 EQ G HI MID L INPUT14 47 G HI MID L INPUT15 48 EQ G HI MID L INPUT16 49 EQ G HI MID L INPUT17 50 EQ G HI MID L INPUT18 51 EQ G HI MID L INPUT19 52 EQ G HI MID L INPUT20 53 EQ G HI MID L INPUT21 54 EQ G HI MID L INPUT22 55 EQ G HI MID L INPUT23 56 EQ G HI MID L INPUT24 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN
79. EQ G LOW H INPUT12 13 EQ G LOW H INPUT13 14 EQ G LOW H INPUT14 15 EQ G LOW H INPUT15 16 G LOW H INPUT16 17 EQ GLOWH INPUT17 18 EQ GLOWH INPUT18 19 EQ G LOW H INPUT19 20 EQ G LOW H INPUT20 21 EQ G LOW H INPUT21 22 EQ G LOW H INPUT22 23 EQ G LOW H INPUT23 24 EQ G LOW H INPUT24 25 NO ASSIGN 26 NO ASSIGN 27 NO ASSIGN 28 NO ASSIGN 29 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 31 NO ASSIGN 32 NO ASSIGN 33 EQ G LOW L INPUT1 34 EQ GLOWL INPUT2 35 EQ GLOWL INPUT3 36 EQ GLOWL INPUTA 37 EQ GLOWL INPUTS 38 EQ GLOWL INPUT6 39 EQ GLOWL 40 EQ GLOWL INPUT8 41 EQ GLOWL INPUT9 42 EQ GLOWL INPUT10 43 GLOWL INPUT11 44 GLOWL INPUT12 45 EQ GLOWL INPUT13 46 EQ GLOWL INPUT14 47 EQ GLOWL INPUT15 48 EQ GLOWL INPUT16 49 EQ GLOWL INPUT17 50 EQ GLOWL INPUT18 51 EQ GLOWL INPUT19 52 EQ GLOWL INPUT20 53 EQ GLOWL INPUT21 54 EQ GLOWL INPUT22 55 EQ GLOWL INPUT23 56 EQ GLOWL INPUT24 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN High Mid Low 59 NO ASSIGN 60 NO ASSIGN 61 NO ASSIGN 62 NO ASSIGN 63 NO ASSIGN 64 F LOW INPUT1 65 EQ F LOW INPUT2 66 EQ F LOW INPUT3 67 EQ F LOW INPUT4 68 EQ F LOW INPUTS 69 EQ F LOW INPUT6 70 EQ F LOW 71
80. Enter the password and select the OK button Operation Lock is cancelled Note If you forget the password you cannot cancel Operation Lock Be sure to write down the password 2 OPERATION LOCK SAFE section This section enables you to select certain controls on the panel to exclude from Opera tion Lock To cancel all safe buttons simultaneously move the cursor to the CLEAR ALL button then press ENTER suonounj 01V96 Owner s Manual 234 Chapter 19 Other Functions 8 PASSWORD This button enables you to change the current password Move the cursor to the PASS WORD button then press ENTER The Set Password window appears enabling you to change the password SET PRSSHORD USE SEL1 SEL 101 PRSSHORD PRSSHORD REENTRY _____ Enter the current password in the PASSWORD field and a new password the NEW PASSWORD field The factory default password is 1234 Enter the new password again in the REENTRY field located below the NEW PASSWORD field Move the cursor to the OK button then press ENTER to change the password Tip To clear the registered password move the cursor to the CLEAR button then press ENTER If you forget the password initialize the password setting see page 239 Cascading Consoles The 01V96 features a Cascade Bus that enables cascade connection You can connect two 01V96s in cascade using the digital
81. F3 button to display the EQ In Att page Initial p LINPUT ATTENUATOR m Q Q Gis ar m e de GdB de de 16 11 12 13 gt e m m de de 18 19 28 21 u Move the cursor to the knob for the desired Input Channel then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the amount of attenuation in the range of 96 dB to 12 dB Tip You can also set the attenuation amount in dB for the currently selected channel on the EQ EQ Edit page 01V96 Owner s Manual Sjouueu 1ndul N 84 Chapter 7 Input Channels EQ ing Input Channels The 01V96 s Input Channels feature 4 band LOW LOW MID HIGH MID HIGH para metric EQ The LOW MID and HIGH MID bands are a peaking type of EQ The LOW and HIGH bands can be set to shelving peaking or HPF and LPF respectively 1 Press the SEL button of the channel for which you want to adjust EQ 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCEESS EQ button then press the F1 button to dis play the EQ EQ Edit page 4 L EQ _ nitial Data gis STI2 STI3 STI4 CHi ai 0 oO EQUALIZER ED TJ LIBRARY 4 IN ATT f amp OUT RTT The parameters on this page are described below D EQ ON The ON OFF button turns the currently selected Input Channel s EQ on or off You can press the ENTER but
82. Fader Mode HOME button Channel Strip Fader 1 8 9 16 Input Channel 1 16 level AUX1 AUX8 buttons Input Channel 1 16 Aux Send level 17 32 button HOME button Input Channel 17 32 level AUX1 AUX8 buttons Input Channel 17 32 Aux Send level REMOTE button HOME button Operation depends on the selected target see page 185 AUX1 AUX8 buttons No operation MASTER button HOME button Aux Send master 1 8 Bus Out 1 8 output level output level AUX1 AUX8 buttons No operation Note You cannot select the AUX1 AUX8 buttons while the Master layer or Remote layer is selected If you switch to the Master layer while one of the AUX1 AUX8 button indicators is lit the indicator automatically turns off and the HOME button indicator lights up 01V96 Owner s Manual soiseg w 34 Chapter 3 Operating Basics Metering This section describes how to check Input and Output Channel levels using the Meter pages 1 Press the FADER MODE HOME button repeatedly until the Meter Position page appears This page enables you to set the metering position for Input and Output Channels METERING POSITION PRE PRE FADER POST FADER IN ON FRDER GRTE EG DELAY PRE EG PRE FADER POST FADER oo ON FADER oo OUT o EG DELRY ESI STEREO
83. INPUT PRTCH 5 INPUT 1L 1R zL 2 SL 4L IN PATCH fi INPUT INS fi EFFECT ACASCADE INE pJ Inputs ADAT IN channels and slot channels that are currently assigned to Input Channels are shown in the parameter boxes 1 below the channel numbers The parameter indica tors are explained below Parameter value Description No assignment AD1 AD16 INPUT connectors 1 16 1 8 IN Input Channels 1 8 SL 01 SL 16 Slot Channels 1 16 FX1 1 amp FX1 2 Outputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 1 FX2 1 amp FX2 2 Outputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2 FX3 1 amp FX3 2 Outputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3 FX4 1 amp FX4 2 Outputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4 2TD L amp 2TD R 2TR DIGITAL IN L R 2 Move the cursor to an input patch parameter you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the patching The long name of the currently selected channel is indicated in the upper right corner of the screen 1 Below the channel name is the long name of the selected input channel 2 See page 94 for informa tion on changing channel names LIE LE N BG 181 M 4 2 3 Press ENTER to confirm the change Tip You can patch an input signal to multiple Input Chan
84. MIDI IN can use as TIME CODE IN MTC Dimensions B 150 i Hl P H m I P r P z 6 L b 1 uz D Pi E 3 E N e So Oc Hd indi b ES 59 d Ze B Oo vt 5 a ro nn m oH 000 Hi En P 101 350 xl 540 548 Unit mm Specifications and descriptions in this owner s manual are for information purposes only Yamaha Corp reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any
85. Messages Active Sense X Reset X quarter frame message is recognized Notes 1 Bulk Dump Request Parameter Change Request and MMC For MIDI Remote ALL messages can be transmitted Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO O Yes X NO 01V96 Block Diagram Gain Reduction METER METER Out Meter o COMP
86. ON MASTER 8054 80 ON MASTER BUS5 81 ON MASTER BUS6 82 ON MASTER BUS7 83 ON MASTER BUS8 84 NO ASSIGN 85 NO ASSIGN 86 NO ASSIGN 87 NO ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 89 PAN CHANNEL INPUT25 90 PAN CHANNEL INPUT26 91 PAN CHANNEL INPUT27 92 PAN CHANNEL INPUT28 93 PAN CHANNEL INPUT29 94 PAN CHANNEL INPUT30 95 PAN CHANNEL INPUT31 102 PAN CHANNEL INPUT32 103 PAN CHANNEL ST INTL 104 PAN CHANNEL ST INTR 105 PAN CHANNEL ST IN2L 106 PAN CHANNEL ST IN2R 107 PAN CHANNEL ST IN3L 108 PAN CHANNEL ST IN3R 109 PAN CHANNEL ST INAL 110 PAN CHANNEL ST INAR 111 ON MASTER AUX1 112 ON MASTER AUX2 113 ON MASTER AUX3 114 ON MASTER AUX4 115 ON MASTER AUX5 116 ON MASTER AUX6 117 ON MASTER AUX7 118 ON MASTER AUX8 119 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL2 High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 1 FADER CHANNEL INPUT25 2 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT26 3 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT27 4 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT28 5 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT29 6 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT30 7 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT31 8 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT32 9 FADER H CHANNEL ST IN1 10 FADER H CHANNEL ST IN2 11 FADER H CHANNEL ST IN3 12 FADER H CHANNEL ST IN4 13 FADER H MASTER BUS1 14 FADER H MASTER BUS2 15 FADER H MASTER BUS3 16 FADER H MASTER BUS4 17 FADER H MASTER 8055 18 FADERH MASTER BUS6 19 FADERH MASTER BUS7 20 FADERH MASTER 8058 21 FADERH MASTER AUX1 22 FADERH MASTER AUX2 23 FADERH MASTER AUX3 24
87. SEL button to select the channel that was assigned the plug in you want to edit 3 Inthe INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section move the cursor to the parameter con trol Insert 1 4 that was assigned the parameter you want to edit Note To adjust a plug in assigned to insert 5 press the Tab Scroll button We to change the parameter indication in the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section then select a parameter con trol NSERT RSSIGN EDIT InyL Off InvR Off i iin L 8 8 In R 8 8 HixL 1BB MixR 188 1 MFTFD 1 mmm 4 Press ENTER to display the parameters IntheINSERT ASSIGN EDIT section the PARAM button is automatically selected and the Information box indicates the selected plug in parameters You can now use parameter controls 1 4 and the ENTER button to adjust the parameters NSERT BSSIGN EDIT iInvL Off InvR Off iln L 8 8 In R 8 8 188 HixR 188 rr MFTFD l mem 5 Use the Tab Scroll buttons to display the parameter value you wish to change Most plug ins feature five or more parameters To edit the fifth or subsequent parameters use the Tab Scroll buttons to display the desired parameters and their values in the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section The current page number and the plug in name appear for a moment immediately after you press the Tab Scroll buttons 01V96 Owner s Manual 0430u0 200 Chapter 17 Remote Control
88. Surround mode indicator This indicator identifies the currently selected Surround mode ST stereo 3 1 5 1 or 6 1 see page 135 01V96 Owner s Manual 28 Chapter 3 Operating Basics 7 Sampling rate indicator This indicator identifies the 01V96 s current sampling rate 44 1 kHz 44k 48 kHz 48k 88 2 kHz 88k or 96 kHz 96k ST IN channel levels These level controls indicate the level of ST IN channels 1 4 9 Page title This section indicates the title of the current page Channel name On certain pages this area displays the Long name of the currently selected channel 1 Page area This page area displays various page contents 12 Page tabs These tabs enable you to select a display page 3 Tab Scroll arrows These arrows indicate that more pages are available Selecting Display Pages To select a display page Press the corresponding button on the top panel to select the desired page group Display pages are grouped by function To select a page group press the desired button in the DISPLAY ACCESS section You can select pages that have currently displayed tabs by pressing the F1 F4 buttons If the selected display page group contains multiple pages press the F1 F4 buttons below the corresponding tab to select a specific page To select a page for which a tab is not currently displayed press either the Left or Right lt gt Tab Scroll button depending on wher
89. Up to eight port MIDI data 16 channels x 8 ports can be transmitted and received MIDI Port Setup Selecting a Port for MIDI Message Transfer To configure MIDI ports for MIDI message transfer press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears This page enables you to set MIDI message input and output DIO SETUPIC Initial 8 smi 5 Py CHi CHi 48k MIDI TO HOST SETUP Rx PORT StudioManaser Tx PORT f DRH CASCADE LINK Em TRANSMIT REQUEST A nonton FR MACHINE AEN E SJA MIDI HOST The following parameters are available on this page D GENERAL section This section enables you to select ports that transmit and receive MIDI messages such as Program Changes and Control Changes This parameter specifies a port for general MIDI data recep tion In the left parameter box select MIDI USB or SLOT available only with an optional mLAN card installed If you select USB or SLOT specify the port number 1 8 in the right parameter box TR PORT This parameter specifies port general MIDI data transmis sion The available ports are the same as for the Rx PORT parameter 2 MIDI THRU section These parameters enable you to route incoming MIDI data from one port or slot to another without changes Select a port for rec
90. User memories 32 i Presets 1 Output patch library User memories 32 01V96 Owner s Manual Analog Input Spec Analog Input Spec 289 4 ide Input level Input PAD GAIN E Sensitivity Nominal crore clip Ew 70 dB 60 dB 40 dB 0 245 mV 0 775 mV 7 75 mV XLR 3 31 type INPUT A B eS 26dB 1648 x4 dB Balanced 1 12 vd 38 8 123 mV 1 23 Phone jack 20 6 4 24 dB TRS Balanced 338 123V 1228 V pu 36 dB 26 dB 6 dB INPUT 13 16 ioca dod pes 12 3 mV 38 8 mV 388 mV Phone EM 44 dB 6 dB 4 dB 24dB Balanced 388 123V 12 28 V CH INSERT IN 1 12 dB 2 dB 18 Phone jack TRS 1 12 2 6009 tines 195 616 616V Unbalanced 10 10 dBV 10 RCA pin jack 2TR IN L R L R WKE 600 Lines Gl6mV 8 16V Unbalanced 1 Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of 4 dB 1 23 V or the nominal output level when the unit is set to maximum gain All faders and level controls are maximum position 2 XLR 3 31 type connectors are balanced 1 GND 2 HOT 3 COLD 3 Phone jacks are balanced Ring COLD Sleeve GND 4 CH INSERT IN OUT phone jacks are unbalanced Ring IN
91. YAMAHA DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE Owner s Manual Keep This Manual For Future Reference FCC INFORMATION U S A 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT This product when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual meets FCC requirements Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority granted by the FCC to use the product IMPORTANT When connecting this product to accessories and or another product use only high quality shielded cables Cable s supplied with this product MUST be used Follow all installation instructions Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA NOTE This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in Regulations Part 15 for Class digital devices Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices This equipment generates uses radio frequencies and if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations If this product is found to be the source of interference which can be determined by turning the unit OF
92. buttons can be grouped There are eight Input Channel mute groups and four Output Channel mute groups When channel ON buttons are grouped pressing any one of them turns the ON buttons for all the grouped channels on or off A mute group can include On channels and Off channels at the same time which turn off or on respectively when you press any one of the grouped ON buttons EQLink Input or Output Channel EQ parameters can be linked There are four EQ links for Input Channels and Output Channels respectively channels in an EQ link share the same EQ parameter settings When you change an EQ parameter value for one of the linked channels the change is applied to all other linked channels Compressor Link Input or Output Channel compressor parameters can be linked There are four compressor links for Input Channels and Output Channels respectively All channels in a compressor link share the same compressor parameter settings When you change a compressor parameter value for one of the linked channels the change is applied to all other linked channels Tip Compressor Link is not available for the ST IN Channels since they do not feature com pressors 8 sjauueyD BuidnoiS 01V96 Owner s Manual 148 Chapter 13 Grouping Channels amp Linking Parameters Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups Follow the steps below to group faders or ON buttons for Input Channe
93. outputs ADAT OUT output channels and slot output channels for Input Channels 1 32 2 DIRECT OUT Determines the Direct Out signal source position from the following three options 01V96 Owner s Manual indul 126 Chapter 10 1 amp Output Patching PRE EQ Immediately before Input Channel EQ Immediately before Input Channel fader POSTFADER Immediately after Input Channel fader 2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter 1 32 you want to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the destination If necessary specify the signal source position using the DIRECT OUT parameter Press ENTER to confirm the change Note If you select a destination that has already been used for an output patch the patch parameter box indicates no assignment If you assign the Direct Out to an unused des tination the parameter box indicates the corresponding output Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until one of the following pages containing the channels you want to patch to the Direct Out appears Routl 16 page This page enables you to change the Input Channel 1 16 rout ings Routl7 STI page This page enables you to change the Input Channels 17 32 and ST IN Channel 1 4 routings Tip Refer to page 86 for
94. sec 08 0 08 8 SCENE A OUT FADE RCL SAFE 13 CD Global Fade Time When this check box is checked a Scene is recalled using the currently specified Fade Time The Fade Time setting stored in the recalled Scene is temporarily ignored This check box setting works in unison with the Out Fade page 2 ALL INPUT CLEAR This button resets all channel Fade Times on the page to 00 0 second 8 INPUT CH1 32 ST IN 1 4 These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for each Input Channel in the range of 00 0 through 30 0 seconds The Fade Time setting for one channel in a pair works in unison with its partner Tip If you operate a fader while fading channels the fader s Fade Time setting is temporarily ignored Youcan copy the currently selected Input Channel Fade Time to all Input Channels by dou ble clicking the ENTER button to display a window for copying This is convenient when you wish to set the Fade Time for all channels simultaneously 01V96 Owner s Manual Fading Scenes 167 Fading Output Channels To set the Fade Time for the Output Channels Stereo Out Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 press the DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE button repeatedly until the Scene Out Fade page appears The basic operation is the same as on the In Fade page CHISHI OO nia ij a OUTPUT FADE TINE Global Fade Time BUS L i 2 3i 4i 5 6 8 tsec 8 2 00 0 i 00 0 08 8 08 8
95. the channel signal is patched to the Direct Out selected in the parameter box below the button The D button is unavailable for the ST IN Channels FOLLOW PAN This button determines whether the Input Channel s Pan set ting is applied to the paired Bus Outs Follow Pan function When the button is turned off the Follow Pan function is dis abled and an identical signal is sent to the paired Bus Outs 4 AUX section s AUX tede These controls set the currently selected Input Channels Aux Send 1 8 levels and positions See page 109 for more informa tion on Aux Sends 5 Meter section e Meters These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel PREEQ PRE FADER POST FADER The metering position is displayed below the meters 6 GROUP section e FADER MUTE EQ COMP These buttons indicate which Fader Mute EQ or Comp group if any the currently selected Input Channel is in If the channel is in a group the group number appears If the channel is not in a group appears The compressor is unavailable for the ST IN Channels 01V96 Owner s Manual Sjouueu 1ndul N 90 Chapter 7 Input Channels Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface You can use the faders SEL buttons and various buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control most parameters for Input Chan nels Setting
96. 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010001 11 Function call Pair 0000 Of function 05555555 sh Source channel 05555555 sl Source channel L DATA dh Destination channel H Oddddddd dl Destination channel L EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive function channel PAIR ON with COPY 0x00 1 PAIR ON with RESET BOTH 0x01 1 PAIR OFF 0x02 1 1 0 1 31 CH32 128 BUS1 135 BUS8 256 AUX1 263 AUX8 512 STEREO Effect is O Effect 1 3 Effect 4 the case of PAIR you must specify channels for which pairing is pos sible In the case of PAIR ON with COPY you must specify Source Channel as the copy source and Destination Channel as the copy destination 01V96 Owner s Manual MIDI Data Format 321 2 8 3 26 Parameter change Function call Event Effect Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received the corresponding effect s function activates depending on the effect type STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010010 12 Function call Effect Event 0000 Of function 00000000 00 Oppppppp pp Release 0 Press DATA 00000
97. 01V96 internal signals or 2TR IN digital inputs PHONES The Monitor signal is also fed to the PHONES jack You can set the level independently 01V96 Owner s Manual 132 Chapter 11 Monitoring Monitor and Solo Setup For monitoring and solo setup press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeat edly until the DIO Setup Monitor page appears DIO SETUP nitial Dati 51125113 5114 cien 00 G D D SEL _ LISTEN ENABLED INPUT CH 81121151141 53 E D G9 9 2 5 4 5 6 Ez 8 9 Es 24 2 2 84 5 Es Ez Es ES 22 This page contains the following parameters D SOLO This parameter turns the Solo function on or off By default it is set to Enabled 2 MODE This parameter determines how the Solo function works There are two options The setting affects only Input Channels RECORDING In Recording Solo mode soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Solo bus and output via the Monitor outputs Other buses Stereo bus and Bus 1 8 are unaffected by this mode MIXDOWN In Mixdown Solo mode soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Stereo bus and output via the Monitor outputs Unso loed Input Channels are not fed to the Stereo bus while the Solo function is enabled Tip Recording Solo mode is convenient when you wish to monitor certain Input Channels while recording since t
98. 1 EQ G LOW H INPUT25 60 NO ASSIGN 2 EQ G LOW H INPUT26 61 NO ASSIGN 3 EQ G LOW H INPUT27 62 NO ASSIGN 4 G LOW H INPUT28 63 NO ASSIGN 5 EQ G LOW H INPUT29 64 FLOW INPUT25 6 EQ G LOW H INPUT30 65 EQ F LOW INPUT26 7 EQ GLOW H INPUT31 66 EQ F LOW INPUT27 8 EQ GLOW H INPUT32 67 EQ F LOW INPUT28 9 GLOWH ST IN1 68 EQ F LOW INPUT29 10 EQ GLOWH ST IN2 69 EQ F LOW INPUT30 11 EQ G LOW H ST IN3 70 EQ FLOW INPUT31 12 EQ G LOW H 5 4 71 FLOW INPUT32 13 NO ASSIGN 72 EQ FLOW ST IN1 14 NO ASSIGN 73 EQ FLOW ST IN2 15 NO ASSIGN 74 EQ FLOW ST IN3 16 NO ASSIGN 75 EQ FLOW ST IN4 17 NO ASSIGN 76 NO ASSIGN 18 NO ASSIGN 77 NO ASSIGN 19 NO ASSIGN 78 NO ASSIGN 20 NO ASSIGN 79 NO ASSIGN 21 NO ASSIGN 80 ASSIGN 22 NO ASSIGN 81 NO ASSIGN 23 ASSIGN 82 NO ASSIGN 24 ASSIGN 83 NO ASSIGN 25 55 84 NO ASSIGN 26 NO ASSIGN 85 NO ASSIGN 27 ASSIGN 86 NO ASSIGN 28 ASSIGN 87 ASSIGN 29 ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ Q LOW INPUT25 31 NO ASSIGN 90 EQ Q LOW INPUT26 32 NO ASSIGN 91 EQ Q LOW INPUT27 33 GLOWL INPUT25 92 EQ Q LOW INPUT28 34 GLOW L INPUT26 93 EQ Q LOW INPUT29 35 EQ GLOWL INPUT27 94 EQ Q LOW INPUT30 36 EQ GLOWL INPUT28 95 EQ Q LOW INPUT31 37 EQ GLOWL INPUT29 102 EQ Q LOW INPUT32 38 EQ GLOWL 0 103 EQ Q LOW ST IN1 39 EQ GLOWL INPUT31 104
99. 10 Pitch shift precision SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY 1 RH kJ RF 4407 h 4 J d d Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 01V96 Owner s Manual 261 Effects Parameters DUAL PITCH Two input two output pitch shifter Parameter Range Description PITCH 1 24 to 24 semitones Channel 1 pitch shift FINE 1 50 to 50 cents Channel 1 pitch shift fine LEVEL 1 100 to 100 Channel 1 level plus values for normal phase minus values for reverse phase PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel 1 pan DELAY 1 0 0 1000 0 ms Channel 1 delay time Channel 1 feedback gain plus values for normal phase 0 Ho feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback PITCH 2 24 to 24 semitones Channel 2 pitch shift FINE 2 50 to 50 cents Channel 2 pitch shift fine LEVEL 2 100 to 100 Channel 2 level plus values for normal phase minus values for reverse phase PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel 2 pan DELAY 2 0 0 1000 0 ms Channel 2 delay time Channel 2 feedback gain plus values for normal phase zzi 0 pees PR 10 122 feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback MODE 1 10 Pitch shift precision SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 1 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel 1 delay NOTE 2 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channe
100. 104 Naming i eps 107 Paiting ett 105 Routing signals to the stereo bus Ve REESE ERE 101 Setting from the control surface UA UN RESI AT 104 Setting from the display 99 Setting the levels 104 Viewing the settings 102 BUSI BUSS 138 Buttons 29 Cascade COMM Link preference 228 Cascading consoles 234 Cascade page 236 SYNC parameter 237 CATEGORY estate el 73 CH1 4 ON OFF switch 23 CH5 8 ON OFF switch 23 CH9 12 ON OFF switch 23 Changing names eee 225 Channel Copy Parameter preference Channel faders Channel ID Channel preference 228 Channel library s 173 Channel strip section 16 CHORUS etit rers 257 CLEAR button 2 22 22 Compressor 180 Preset Rete 181 Compressors 82 100 111 Compressor link 147 Linking aee 150 parameter table 287 Confirmation messages 30 uem 37 Configuring a recording system that uses a DAW 39 Configuring a recording system with a hard disk recorder EE 38 Configuring an analog 24 channel mixing
101. 109 9 Aux Outs This chapter describes how to control Aux Out 1 8 Aux Out 1 8 The Aux Out 1 8 section mixes signals routed from the Input Channels to the correspond ing Aux Sends processes them using on board EQ compressor etc then routes them to the specified internal effects processors output connectors or I O card connectors The 01V96 features eight Aux Sends which can be used to send signals to the internal and external effects processors and monitors The following diagram illustrates the Aux Out 1 8 signal flow Gain Reduction Meter METER METER 2 INSERT METER INSERT INSERT ON LE VEL ll on ll OUTPUT AUX 1 8 DELAY OUTPUT PATCH n y g INSERT ATT Attenuator 4 BAND EQ 4 equalizer COMP Compressor ON On Off LEVEL OUTPUT DELAY Output delay METER These parameters are the same as the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 see page 97 Tip You can also pair adjacent odd even Aux Sends in this order for stereo Aux operation Note With the default setting Aux Out 1 4 are patched to OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 and to internal Effects processors 1 4 However you can change this patching on the Patch Output page 01V96 Owner s Manual 110 Chapter 9 Aux Outs Setting Aux Out 1 8 from the Display To set Aux Out
102. 119 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Owner s Manual 304 Appendix C MIDI CHANNEL12 High Mid Low High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 59 NO ASSIGN 1 EQ ATT H INPUT25 60 NO ASSIGN 2 EQ ATT H INPUT26 61 NO ASSIGN 3 EQ ATT H INPUT27 62 NO ASSIGN 4 INPUT28 63 NO ASSIGN 5 EQ ATT H INPUT29 64 EQ HPF ON INPUT25 6 INPUT30 65 EQ HPF ON INPUT26 7 EQ ATT H INPUT31 66 EQ HPF ON INPUT27 8 EQ ATT H INPUT32 67 EQ HPF ON INPUT28 9 ST INTL 68 EQ HPF ON INPUT29 10 EQ ATT H ST INTR 69 HPF ON INPUT30 11 EQ ATT H ST IN2L 70 EQ HPF ON INPUT31 12 EQ ATT H ST IN2R 71 EQ HPF ON INPUT32 13 EQ ATT H ST IN3L 72 EQ HPF ON ST IN1 14 EQ ATT H ST IN3R 73 EQ HPF ON ST IN2 15 EQ ATT H ST INAL 74 EQ HPF ON ST IN3 16 EQ ATT H ST INAR 75 EQ HPF ON 5 4 17 NO ASSIGN 76 NO ASSIGN 18 NO ASSIGN 77 NO ASSIGN 19 NO ASSIGN 78 NO ASSIGN 20 ASSIGN 79 NO ASSIGN 21 NO ASSIGN 80 NO ASSIGN 22 NO ASSIGN 81 NO ASSIGN 23 ASSIGN 82 NO ASSIGN 24 ASSIGN 83
103. 17 18 SL SR L63 LE3 RB3 L23 ROB Reo 110 L63 RBS 26 27 28 29 31 4L OOH OO LES 1 CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER LBS PAN E ROUTI 16 HEBOUTTIT STIALBUS TO ST E Psy 6 Pressthe DISPLAY ACCESS HOME button then press the F1 button to dis play the Meter CH1 32 page 7 Make sure that ON button indicators 9 and 10 are steadily lit 8 While the musicians play the musical instruments raise faders 9 and 10 to set the appropriate monitoring level If necessary play back the recording on the digital MTR and adjust the volume balance between the recorded and recording signals Recording 1 Start recording on the digital MTR and cue the musicians to start playing the musical instruments while monitoring the recorded tracks During recording display the Meter CH1 32 page and confirm that the Input Channel levels are not clipping 2 When the musicians finish playing stop the digital MTR 3 To check the recording play the digital MTR from the beginning 4 If you are satisfied with the recording stop the playback and disarm Tracks 9 and 10 on the recorder 01V96 Owner s Manual Mixing Mixing Recorded Tracks into Stereo Mixdown 63 Recorded Tracks into Stereo Mixdown Mixdown is the process of mixing recorded tracks into stereo and recording the stereo sig nal to an external master recorder This section describes how to mi
104. 258 Appendix Parameter Lists FLANGE Two input two output flange effect Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time Fc rene WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 412 0 dB Low shelving filter gain 100 2 8 00 2 peaking type frequency EQ G 12 0 to 412 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQQ 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH 12 0 to 412 0 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 FF k h 44 d 4 J d d SYMPHONIC Two input two output symphonic effect Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 412 0 dB Low shelving filter gain 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQG 12 0 to 412 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQQ 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH 12 0 to 412 0 dB High shelving
105. 40 40 83 83 126 41 41 84 84 127 42 42 85 85 128 43 43 86 86 01V96 Owner s Manual Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 293 Initial Parameter to Control Change Table CHANNEL1 High Mid Low High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 57 NO ASSIGN 1 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT1 58 NO ASSIGN 2 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT2 59 NO ASSIGN 3 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT3 60 NO ASSIGN 4 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT4 61 NO ASSIGN 5 FADER H CHANNEL INPUTS 62 FADERL MASTER STEREO 6 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT6 63 NO ASSIGN 7 FADER H CHANNEL 64 CHANNEL INPUT1 8 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT8 65 ON CHANNEL INPUT2 9 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT9 66 ON CHANNEL INPUT3 10 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT10 67 ON CHANNEL INPUT4 11 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT11 68 ON CHANNEL INPUTS 12 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT12 69 ON CHANNEL INPUT6 13 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT13 70 CHANNEL 14 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT14 71 ON CHANNEL INPUT8 15 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT15 72 ON CHANNEL INPUT9 16 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT16 73 ON CHANNEL INPUT10 17 F
106. 6 Move the cursor to a parameter control then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the ENTER button to adjust the value One or two parameters are assigned to a single parameter control To turn the parameter setting on or off press ENTER To modify the parameter variable rotate the Parameter wheel INSERT ASSIGN EDIT Pe SYPASS PARAM InvL n _ InvR Off In L 14 9 In 8 8 188 MixR 188 of 9 ENTER ENTER a TUAHHEI TETEn 0 mw 7 When you finish adjusting the parameters move the cursor to the INSERT PARAM button then press ENTER to switch it to INSERT Bypassing Plug ins You can bypass plug ins assigned to Pro Tools channels Before bypassing plug ins you must press the corresponding SEL button to select a chan nel to which the plug ins have been assigned then press the F2 button to select Insert Dis play mode bypass plug ins display the parameters of the plug in you wish to bypass in the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section then turn on the BYPASS button SERT ASSIGN EDIT ASSIGN COMPARE PARAM iInvL Off InvR Of i iin L 8 8 In R 8 8 NWixL 188 NMixR 168 1 MFTFD l mmm Scrub amp Shuttle By assigning the DAW SCRUB parameter to one of the User Defined buttons 1 8 you can scrub Pro Tools tracks back and forth by turning the Parameter wheel By assigning the DAW SHUTTLE parameter to one of the User Defined buttons 1 8
107. 73 F LO MID INPUT10 74 F LO MID INPUT11 75 F LO MID INPUT12 76 F LO MID INPUT13 77 EQ F LO MID INPUT14 78 EQ F LO MID INPUT15 79 F LO MID INPUT16 80 EQ F LO MID INPUT17 81 EQ F LO MID INPUT18 82 EQ F LO MID INPUT19 83 EQ F LO MID INPUT20 84 EQ F LO MID INPUT21 85 EQ F LO MID INPUT22 86 EQ F LO MID INPUT23 87 EQ F LO MID INPUT24 88 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ Q LO MID INPUT1 90 EQ Q LO MID INPUT2 91 EQ Q LO MID INPUT3 92 EQ Q LO MID INPUT4 93 EQ Q LO MID INPUTS 94 EQ Q LO MID 6 95 Q LO MID 102 Q LO MID INPUT8 103 EQ Q LO MID INPUT9 104 EQ Q LO MID INPUT10 105 EQ Q LO MID INPUT11 106 EQ Q LO MID INPUT12 107 EQ Q LO MID INPUT13 108 EQ Q LO MID INPUT14 109 EQ Q LO MID INPUT15 110 EQ Q LO MID INPUT16 111 EQ Q LO MID INPUT17 112 EQ Q LO MID INPUT18 113 EQ Q LO MID INPUT19 114 Q LO MID INPUT20 115 EQ Q LO MID INPUT21 116 EQ Q LO MID INPUT22 117 EQ Q LO MID INPUT23 118 EQ Q LO MID INPUT24 119 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Owner s Manual 298 Appendix MIDI Hi
108. 8 4 5 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 5 dB 0 0 dB 1 5 dB 0 0 dB 125 Hz 180 Hz 1 12 kHz 12 5 kHz 1 6 8 2 2 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 6 0 dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 4 0 dB 95 Hz 950 Hz 3 15 kHz 7 50 kHz 8 0 9 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 3 5 dB 8 5 dB 1 5 dB 3 0 dB 224 Hz 600 Hz 3 15 kHz 5 30 kHz 5 6 10 0 7 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 0 dB 5 5 dB 0 5 dB 2 5 dB 265 Hz 400 Hz 1 32 kHz 4 50 kHz 0 18 10 6 3 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 4 5 dB 0 0 dB 4 0 dB 2 0 dB 140 Hz 1 00 kHz 1 90 kHz 5 60 kHz 8 4 5 0 63 9 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 5 dB 1 5 dB 2 5 dB 0 0 dB 125 Hz 450 Hz 3 35 kHz 19 0 kHz 8 0 4 0 16 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 5 0 dB 0 0 dB 3 5 dB 0 0 dB 355 Hz 950 Hz 3 35 kHz 12 5 kHz 9 10 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 6 0 dB 8 5 dB 4 5 dB 4 0 dB 315Hz 1 06 kHz 4 25 kHz 12 5 kHz 10 4 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 1 0 dB 4 0 dB 106 Hz 1 00 kHz 1 90 kHz 5 30 kHz 0 9 4 5 3 5 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 3 5 dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 300 Hz 750 Hz 2 00 kHz 3 55 kHz 9 4 5 01V96 Owner s Manual 276 Appendix Parameter Lists 01V96 Owner s Manual Parameter Title LOW L MID H MID HIGH L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEA
109. CH INPUT faders at minimum level Input Pad 0 dB Input Sensitivity 60 dB 64 dB 68 dB S N STEREO OUT STEREO fader at nominal level and one CH INPUT fader at nominal level Maximum Voltage Gain Crosstalk 8 1 kHz Input Gain Min 74 dB CH INPUT CH1 12 to MONITOR OUT via STEREO BUS 74 dB CH INPUT CH1 12 to STEREO OUT OMNI BUS OUT 40 dB CH INPUT CH13 16 to STEREO OUT 74 dB CH INPUT CH1 12 to OMNI AUX OUT via pre input fader 80 dB adjacent input channels 1 12 80 dB adjacent input channels CH13 16 80 dB input to output AD Input 1 12 Phantom switch 48 V DC each Pad switch 0 20 dB attenuation Gain control 44 dB 60 to 16 detented Peak indicator LED red turns on when post HA level reaches 3 dB below clipping at dig ital domain Signal indicator AD converter LED green turns on when post HA level reaches 20 dB below nominal at digital domain 24 bit linear 128 times oversampling fs 44 1 48 kHz 64 times over sampling fs 88 2 96 kHz AD Input 13 16 Gain control 30 dB 26 to 4 detented Peak indicator LED red turns on when post HA level reaches 3 dB below clipping at dig ital domain Signal indicator LED green turns on when post HA level reaches 20 dB below nominal at digital domain AD converter 24 bit linear 128 times oversampling fs 44 1 48 kHz 64 tim
110. DATA TRANSFER FORMAT SRC fadat 2TR OUT DIGITAL O I 8 B Ei Fi PREFER fi PREFERZ 2 4 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to an IN OUT parameter field CD then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to set the data transfer format The IN OUT parameters are used to set one of the following data transfer formats for each slot input and output DOUBLE CHANNEL In Double Channel mode digital audio data is received and transmitted as mono signals at a sampling rate that is exactly half 44 1 48 kHz the current higher sampling rate Data is handled by two channels This is useful when you wish to transfer data between the 01V96 running at a higher sampling rate and legacy 44 1 48 kHz digital MTRs or HDRs Note Double Channel mode reduces the total number of inputs or outputs on the corresponding slot The even numbered channels are disabled You cannot select this mode unless the 01V96 is operating at a high sampling rate DOUBLE SPEED In Double Speed mode digital audio data is received and transmitted at the current high sampling rate i e 88 2 or 96 kHz Select this mode if the devices that support the higher sampling rates transmit or receive data Note This mode is available only for the slot in which the optional Yamaha MY8 AE96 or MYS AE96S Digital I O card is installed 01V96 Owner s Manual
111. DAW software so that the 01V96 communicates with the software Refer to the DAW software s user s manual for more information on setting up the software Configuring the 01V96 1 Refer to page 188 to configure the DIO Setup MIDI HOST page 2 Press the LAYER REMOTE button to set the TARGET parameter to General DAW You can now remotely control the DAW software using the Remote Layer 01V96 Owner s Manual MIDI Remote Layer 203 MIDI Remote Layer If you select USER DEFINED as the target for the Remote Layer you can remotely control the parameters of external MIDI devices such as synthesizers and tone generators by oper ating the channel ON buttons and faders to output various MIDI messages This is called MIDI Remote function You can store MIDI messages assigned to the channel controls in four banks When the 01V96 is shipped from the factory it includes MIDI settings in these banks which you can quickly recall to use the MIDI Remote function If necessary you can also assign other MIDI messages to the faders or ON buttons to remotely control the parameters of a connected MIDI device Using the MIDI Remote Function This section describes how to recall and use the factory preset MIDI Remote settings stored in the banks By default the 01V96 s four MIDI Remote banks Banks 1 4 contain the following MIDI messages Control Function Bank Usage ON buttons Faders 1 Panning and setti
112. DEFINED KEYS 193 Attenuator Output signals Auto Channel Select preference 227 Auto Direct Out On preference 228 Auto EQUALIZER Display preference 227 AUTO eet tnter ien 259 Auto PAN Display preference 227 Auto SOLO Display preference 227 Auto update function 165 Auto WORD CLOCK Display preference 227 AUX 1 AUX 8 buttons 17 sisse WHAT 109 Aux send mode 114 118 Aux sends tette 113 Attenuating 222222 110 Comp settings occ 111 Copying channel fader positions Delaying 110 EQ settings 2 22 2222 111 113 Fixed mode s 114 PANNING 119 Setting from the control surface 113 Setting from the display 110 113 Setting levels sus 113 Variable mode 115 Viewing settings 112 Viewing settings for multiple channels 422224444 117 Aux View1 16 page 117 Aux View17 STI page AUXI AUXGS button indicators 33 B Balancing 104 Battery cete mene 238 Bulk dump 5 222 MESSaB6S eiie rerit 211 Bus out 97 Attenuating 222224 99 Compressing eene 100 Delaying eee 99 EQ ing zen etre 100 EQ ing and Balancing
113. DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears 1 16 page This page enables you to change the routing for Input Channels 1 16 ROUT I7 STI page This page enables you to change the routing for Input Channels 17 32 and ST IN Chan nels 1 4 The parameters on these two pages and the procedure for setting them are the same PAN ROUTE Initial Data CH1 CH1 48k ALL BUS ALL CLEAR 7 ALL STEREO TO 80 80 80 8 MODE STEREO ROUTINE fAROUTIT STI Reus To D PAN buttons These buttons determine whether the channel s Pan setting is applied to the Bus outs 2 Bus buttons 1 8 These buttons route the currently selected Input Channel to the Bus Outs If the 01V96 isin Surround mode the button indicators change as follows depending on the selected Surround mode Bus buttons 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Surround mode 3 1 L R C S 5 6 7 8 Surround mode 5 1 L R Ls Rs C E 7 8 Surround mode 6 1 L R Ls Rs 8 L Left R Right C Center S Surround Ls Left Surround Rs Right Surround E Low Frequency Effect Bs Back Surround The above table shows the default assignment The actual assignment may vary depend ing on the settings on the DIO Setup Surround Bus Setup page 01V96 Owner s Manual Setting the Input Channels fr
114. EDIT Toggles between the Mix window and Edit window Both windows are not displayed at the same time DAW WIN MEM LOC Shows or hides the Memory Locations window DAW WIN STATUS Shows or hides the Status window DAW UNDO Executes the Edit menu s Undo Redo command DAW SAVE Executes the Edit menu s Save command DAW EDIT MODE Pressing the button to which this function is assigned repeatedly selects Shuffle Slip Spot or Grid edit mode in this order DAW EDIT TOOL Pressing the button to which this function is assigned repeatedly selects one of seven edit tools Zoomer Trimmer Selector Grabber Smart Tool Scrubber and Pencil in this order 01V96 Owner s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 195 Parameter Function DAW SHIFT ADD Functions in the same way as Macintosh keyboard keys Shift Option Con DAW OPTION ALL trol and Alt Pressing one of the buttons to which these functions are DAW CTRL CLUCH assigned along with another button enables you to execute various com mands DAW ALT FINE DAW BANK Executes the Bank Swap operation Pressing the button to which this function DAW BANK is assigned switches the entire 16 channel bank DAW Channel Executes the Channel Scroll operation Pressing the buttons to which these DAW Channel functions are assigned enables you to scroll channels horizontally DAW REC RDY 1 DAW REC
115. EFFECT IN CASCADE Port ID Description Port ID Description Port ID Description Port ID Description SL 07 Slot CH7 IN Slot CH7 IN InsertOut CH23 AD7 AD IN 7 SL 08 Slot CH8 IN Slot CH8 IN InsertOut CH24 AD8 AD IN 8 SL 09 Slot CH9 IN Slot CH9 IN InsertOut CH25 9 AD IN 9 SL 10 Slot CH10 IN Slot CH10 IN InsertOut CH26 AD10 AD IN 10 SL 11 Slot CH11 IN Slot CH11 IN InsertOut CH27 AD11 AD IN 11 SL 12 Slot CH12 IN Slot CH12 IN InsertOut CH28 AD12 AD IN 12 SL 13 Slot CH13 IN Slot CH13 IN InsertOut CH29 AD13 AD IN 13 SL 14 Slot CH14 IN Slot CH14 IN InsertOut CH30 AD14 AD IN 14 SL 15 Slot CH15 IN Slot CH15 IN InsertOut CH31 AD15 AD IN 15 SL 16 Slot CH16 IN Slot CH16 IN InsertOut CH32 AD16 AD IN 16 FX1 1 Effect OUT 1 Effect OUT 1 InsertOut BUS1 2TD L 2TR IN Dig L FX1 2 Effect OUT 2 Effect OUT 2 InsertOut BUS2 2TD R 2TR IN Dig R FX2 1 Effect2 OUT 1 Effect2 OUT 1 InsertOut BUS3 FX2 2 Effect2 OUT 2 Effect2 OUT 2 InsertOut BUS4 FX3 1 Effect3 OUT 1 Effect3 OUT 1 InsertOut BUS5 FX3 2 Effect3 OUT 2 Effect3 OUT 2 InsertOut BUS6 FX4 1 Effect4 OUT 1 Effect4 OUT 1 InsertOut BUS7 FX4 2 Effect4 OUT 2 Effect4 OUT 2 InsertOut BUS8 2TD L 2TR IN Dig L 2TD L 2TR IN Dig L INS AUX1 InsertOut AUX1 2TD R 2TR IN Dig R 2TD R 2TR IN Dig R INS AUX2 InsertOut AUX2 NS AUX3 InsertOut AUX3 NS AUX4 InsertOut AUX4 NS 5 InsertOut AUX5 NS AUX6 InsertOut AUX6 NS AUX7 InsertOut AUX7 NS AUX8 InsertOut
116. Filter resonance LEVEL 0 100 Output level SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ RU h h ddd h J J d d s DISTORTION One input two output distortion effect Parameter Range Description 0571 DST2 OVD1 5 mw DST TYPE OVD2 CRUNCH Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive MASTER 0 100 Master volume TONE 10 to 410 Tone N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction 01V96 Owner s Manual Effects Parameters 263 AMP SIMULATE One input two output guitar amp simulator Parameter Range Description AMP TYPE Guitar amp simulation type DST TYPE Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive MASTER 0 100 Master volume BASS 0 100 Bass tone control MIDDLE 0 100 Middle tone control TREBLE 0 100 High tone control CAB DEP 0 10096 Speaker cabinet simulation depth 100 8 00 kHz Parametric equalizer frequency EQG 12 0 to 412 0 dB Parametric equalizer gain EQQ 10 0 0 10 Parametric equalizer bandwidth N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction 1 5 1 STK M2 THRASH MIDBST CMB PG CMB VR CMB DX CMB TW MINI FLAT DYNA FILTER Two input two output dynamically controlled filter Parameter Range Description SOURCE INPUT MIDI Control source input si
117. GND 4 PHONES stereo phone jack is unbalanced Tip LEFT Ring RIGHT Sleeve GND In these specifications when dB represents a specific voltage 0 dB is referenced to 0 775 Vrms 2TR OUT L R levels O dBV is referenced to 1 00 Vrms output DA converters are 24 bit 128 times oversampling fs 44 1 48 kHz 01V96 Owner s Manual 290 Appendix B Specifications Digital Input Spec Input 2TR IN DIGITAL Format IEC 60958 Data length Level 24 bit 0 5 Vpp 75 Q RCA pin jack Connector ADAT IN ADAT 24 bit OPTICAL 1 Digital Output Spec ALESIS proprietary multichannel optical digital interface format Output Format Data length Level Connector 1 2TR OUT DIGITAL IEC 60958 24 bit 0 5V pp 75 RCA pin jack Consumer use ADAT OUT ADAT 24 bit OPTICAL 1 Type Category code Digital signal mixer Copy prohibit NO Emphasis Clock accuracy Level 11 1000 ppm Sampling rate depends on the internal configuration Channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL linear PCM NO 2 ALESIS proprietary multichannel optical digital interface format 3 Dither word length 16 20 24 bit I O SLOT Spec Each I O SLOT accepts a Digital interface card SLOT1 has a serial interface Maker Model Function INPUT OUTPUT Format Yamaha Resolution Frequency The number
118. H ST IN2 11 EQ G LO MID H ST IN3 12 EQ G LO MID H 5 4 13 NO ASSIGN 14 NO ASSIGN 15 NO ASSIGN 16 NO ASSIGN 17 NO ASSIGN 18 NO ASSIGN 19 NO ASSIGN 20 ASSIGN 21 NO ASSIGN 22 NO ASSIGN 23 ASSIGN 24 ASSIGN 25 55 26 55 27 55 28 55 29 55 30 NO ASSIGN 31 NO ASSIGN 32 NO ASSIGN 33 G LO MID L INPUT25 34 G LO MID L INPUT26 35 EQ G LO MID L INPUT27 36 EQ G LO MID L INPUT28 37 G LO MID L INPUT29 38 EQ G LO MID L INPUT30 39 EQ G LO MID L INPUT31 40 EQ G LO MID L INPUT32 41 G LO MID L ST IN1 42 G LO MID L ST IN2 43 G LO MID L ST IN3 44 G LO MID L ST IN4 45 NO ASSIGN 46 NO ASSIGN 47 NO ASSIGN 48 NO ASSIGN 49 NO ASSIGN 50 NO ASSIGN 51 NO ASSIGN 52 NO ASSIGN 53 NO ASSIGN 54 NO ASSIGN 55 NO ASSIGN 56 NO ASSIGN 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Owner s Manual Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 299 CHANNEL7 High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 1 EQ G HI MID H INPUT1 2 HI MID H INPUT2 3 EQ G HI MID H INPUT3 4 G HI MID H INPUT4 5 EQ G HI MID H INPUT5 6 EQ G HI MID H INPUT6 7
119. IN BB o ct 2 SEREI SEER Foot switch 01V96 Owner s Manual 206 Chapter 17 Remote Control 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Remote page appears then set the TARGET parameter to USER DEFINED You can now use the MIDI Remote function Refer to the previous section for more infor mation on using the MIDI Remote function 3 Move the cursor to the desired bank button BANK parameter buttons 1 4 then press ENTER 4 Press the SEL buttons for the desired channels Currently assigned MIDI messages appear in the ON and FADER sections Tip You can also choose the desired channels using the ID SHORT and LONG parameters 5 Move the cursor to the LEARN button the ON section then press ENTER MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port of the 01V96 will be assigned to the DATA parameter boxes in the ON section 6 Press and hold down the MIDI keyboard foot switch The MIDI Hold On message is assigned in the DATA parameter box MIDI messages are described below MIDI messages are expressed in hexadecimal END This message indicates the end of MIDI messages Subsequent mess
120. If you select a Scene memory other than the currently recalled Scene its number flashes at the to of the display Scene memories U Ud and 0 00 are special read only memories to which you cannot store Scenes Also you cannot store Scenes to write protected Scene memories see page 164 3 Press the SCENE MEMORY STORE button The Title Edit window appears which enables you to name the Scene to be stored Tip You can disable this window by turning the Store Confirmation parameter to Off on the DIO Setup Prefer1 page see page 226 In this case the stored Scene will hve the same name as the one recalled most recently 4 Enter the title move the cursor to the OK button then press ENTER The Title Edit window closes and the current Scene is stored to the selected Scene memory 5 Torecall a Scene press the SCENE MEMORY Up or Down Y buttons to select a Scene memory number then press the SCENE MEMORY RECALL button Tip If you turn the Recall Confirmation parameter to On on the DIO Setup Prefer1 page Scene recall confirmation window for Scene recalls appears before the Scene is recalled see page 226 SalJOUJ9 A 91925 01V96 Owner s Manual 164 Chapter 15 5 Memories Storing and Recalling Scenes Using the Scene Memory Page On the Scene Memory page you can store recall write protect delete and edit the titles of Scenes 1 Adjust the mix param
121. MODE section for the currently selected Aux Send to select a mode Fixed Mode In this mode Aux Send levels are fixed at nominal 0 0 dB Also channel ON OFF buttons appear instead of the Send level rotary controls and PRE POST buttons Initial Data m CH1 CH1 43k 4 6 728 3 5 VARIABLE GLOBAL POST 9 19 11 12 1 14 15 16 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 5 ING 17 18 19 28 21 22 23 24 1 2 OFF OFF OFF 0 OFF OFF 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 4 5 OFF prr FF CA CA SEND A PAN fi 16 JAUIEHTT STIZ 01V96 Owner s Manual Setting Aux Send Levels 115 Variable Mode In this mode Aux Send levels are variable and the signal source point can be either pre fader or post fader Channel Send level rotary controls and PRE POST buttons appear on the screen VARIABLE Fost pos 19 GLOBRL SEND Tip You can select Variable or Fixed mode individually for each of the eight Aux Note In Fixed mode all ON OFF buttons are turned OFF When you switch to Variable mode the signal source points are set to post fader PRE POST buttons are set to POST and Send level rotary controls are reset to sino xny 4 Ifyouswitched to Fixed mode in Step 3 the ON OFF buttons turn each Input Channel on or off for the currently selected Aux Send 0 Initial Data CH1
122. Meter Position page 34 Meter ST IN page 35 Meter Stereo page 36 Me te tihg deter 34 Meters Stereo meters 19 MADD 187 211 Bulk dump 222 Bulk dump messages 211 Control changes 216 Data format FADER H L Initial parameter to control change table 293 MIDI IN THRU OUT ports MIDI indicator MIDI note on off 211 Parameter changes 221 Parameters 217 Program changes 215 Scene memory to program change table 292 212 212 System exclusive messages 211 Transmission and Reception 214 USB port eere 211 MIDI Bulk page MIDI Ctl Asgn page MIDI Pgm Asgn page MIDI Setup page MIDI IN THRU OUT ports MIDI interface TARGET parameter MIDI Warning preference MIDI Control Section mini YGDAI I O cards MOD FILTER MONITOR LEVEL control Monitor out amp Headphones section MONITOR OUT connectors Monitor Source selector Digital input channel status RECORDING Solo safe function MONO DELAY MULTI FILTER Multitrack recording Operating basics About the display AUXI AUXG button indicators 33 Channel name C
123. No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00001101 OD 01996 ADDRESS 00100001 21 Remote meter Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL ch CountH cl CountL EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 32 Parameter change Remote Time Counter When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote Time Counter the Time Counter data is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds When you want to transmit Counter information continuously a Request must be trans mitted within every 10 seconds Reception This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON Transmission When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request the Time Counter infor mation is transmitted on RxCH channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again or if the PORT setting is changed If Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message is retransmitted without change STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001 1n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00001101 0D 01 96 ADDRESS 00100010 22 Remote Time counter 0000tttt Ot 0 code 1 Measure Beat Clock Oddddddd dd Hour Measure Odddddd
124. O GAIN controls Inputs 1 through 16 feature rotary gain controls that adjust input E sensitivity Input sensitivity for INPUT connectors 1 12 ranges from IX 16 dB to 60 dB when the Pad is off and from 4 dB to 40 dB e when the Pad is on Input sensitivity for INPUT connectors 13 16 ranges from 4 dB to 26 dB PEAK amp SIGNAL Indicators ps The SIGNAL indicator lights up when the input signal level at INPUTS 1 16 exceeds 34 dB The PEAK indicator lights up when the input signal level is 3 dB below clipping Q peak ooo 2TRIN connectors These unbalanced RCA phono connectors accept line level signals from master recorders When the AD 15 16 source selector is turned on pushed in signals input at these conductors are routed to AD Inputs 15 and 16 When the Monitor source selector is turned on pushed in you can mon itor these signals from the MONITOR OUT connectors 2TR 10dBV UNBAL Output Section The 01V96 top and rear panels feature output connectors that enable you to connect a mon itoring system master recorder effects processors and other line level devices MONITOR OUT connectors L R MONITOR OUT These balanced TRS type phone connectors output monitoring sig nals or input signals routed from the 2TR IN connectors The nom 2 inal output level is 4 dB Use the Monitor source selector in the AD Input section to select the signal output from these con
125. OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY NOTE R 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY 1 J F h ddd h d J 3 d Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 01V96 Owner s Manual 256 Appendix A Parameter Lists MOD DELAY One input two output basic repeat delay with modulation Parameter Range Description DELAY 0 0 2725 0 ms Delay time s rina S 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off DLY NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY MOD NOTE 2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 ffi F h ddd tempo setting h J J d d Maximum value depends on the 2 HP BI R h J ded dj DELAY LCR One input two output 3 tap delay left center right Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 2730 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY C 0 0 2730 0 ms Center channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 2730 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 2730 0 ms Feedback
126. ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 Ha BOIS F h 44 h 4 J J d 01V96 Owner s Manual 268 REV gt PAN Appendix A Parameter Lists One input two output reverb and autopan effects in parallel Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV BAL 0 10096 Leg reverb balance 0 all panned reverb FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth DIR 1 Panning direction WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 L R L R L R L Turn R 2 H3 B 4 k h 44 JD ded 3 s ss DELAY ER One input two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse
127. POSITION CD INPUT section This section enables you to select the metering position for Input Channel and ST IN Channel signals 2 OUTPUT section This section enables you to select the metering position for Output Channel Aux Out 1 8 Bus Out 1 8 Stereo Out signals 2 Move the cursor to the desired parameter button in the INPUT or OUTPUT section then press ENTER You can select one of the following three positions in each section Immediately before EQ PREFADER Immediately before the fader POST FADER Immediately after the fader 3 Press the FADER MODE HOME button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears CH1 32 page This page displays the Input Channel 1 32 levels respectively METER MODE PEAK HOLD 1 2 354 58 7 8 9 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 LL INPUT c0 00 00 00 co co co co co 00 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 38 31 32 CHi 32 ST IN MASTER JA EFFECT 221 01V96 Owner s Manual Metering 35 STIN page This page displays the left and right ST IN Channel 1 4 levels separately METER 0 Initial Data CHi CHi METER MODE LEVEL co 00 00 00 00 iL 1R 21 ZR SL SR 4L 4R ee STEREO INPUT soiseg 6unej do
128. Program Changes 1 through 99 and Scene 0 is assigned to Program Change 100 although you can change these assign ments Tip You can store a Scene to Program Change assignment table to an external device by using MIDI Bulk Dump or the included Studio Manager software 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI messages see page 212 2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the 01V96 can transfer MIDI messages to and from the external device 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F2 button The MIDI Pgm Asgn page appears HIDI Initial rr Bp ss cies uni ux O O PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN MNO TITLE I Data 1 Data 1 5 5 1 No Data 1 lt 4 4 Data 1 3 3 I Ho Data 1 2 1j INITIRLIZE SETUP fA ASGN fi CTL ASON fi BULK 01V96 Owner s Manual 216 Chapter 18 MIDI 4 Move the cursor to a parameter box in the PGM CHG column and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the Program Change numbers to which you want to assign Scenes 5 Press the cursor button to move the cursor to a parameter box in the SCENE NO TITLE column then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC button
129. R channels of the Ste reo Out e OUTPUT DELAY Output delay This section delays the output signals It is mainly used to fine tune the signal timing 01V96 Owner s Manual 98 Chapter 8 Outs METER This section enables you to switch the metering position of signal levels that are displayed on the Meter page or by the stereo meter to the right of the screen See page 34 for more information on selecting the metering position Note You can also patch the Stereo Out signals to other output connectors or the I O card by using the Patch Out Patch pages Bus Out 1 8 BUS2 8053 8054 BUSS BUS6 BUS7 BUS8 STEREO L The Bus Out 1 8 section mixes signals routed from Input Channels to the specified buses processes them using on board EQ compressor etc then routes them to the specified out put connectors or I O card The following diagram illustrates the Bus Out signal flow Gain Reduction Out Meter METER METER a STEREO R ON LEVEL 8 lt METER INSERT INSERT dI INSERT METER ON LEVEL BUS 1 8 BAND our EU Ez OUTPUT PATCH S715 d BUS to STEREO INSERT ATT Attenuator 4 BAND EQ 4 band equalizer COMP Compressor ON On Off LEVEL OUTPUT DELAY Output delay METER The parameters and sections listed above are identical to those for the Stereo Out For
130. REV FLANGE 266 SLOT SECO d ns nette dens 25 Preferences adeste 226 DUCATU Solo 132 145 186 196 REV SYMPHO 267 SOO 3 201 REV gt CHORUS 2265 LAST SOLO ees 132 7 191 REV gt FLANGB 266 152 Bs ay mode REV gt PAN 268 MIX SOLO 132 Chabal 5 REV gt PAN CL 1222 REV 267 MIXDOWN ent 132 En surface operation gt REVERB HALL 254 RECORDING eee 132 Explicit mut 1196 REVERBHALL e ipd q ms 254 SOLO 4 1440 132 Ip mo eem 197 REVERB 254 Solo function 134 Implicit mute 196 REVERB STAGE 254 SOLO SAFE CHANNEL 133 Insert display mode 89r Ea EN LE NN SIE REVERSE GATE 255 01V96 Owner s Manual 328 Index Solo safe function 133 T Connections 40 SOLO TRIM e 133 Daisy chain distribution 40 Tab scroll arrows 28 SOLO buttons 16 17 SO f 6 42 nn Tab scroll buttons 20 mor SOLO indicator 22 Target 188 Specifyi
131. Ratio 1 20 Attack ms 15 27 Hip Comp COMPAND S Out gain dB 0 0 Width dB 15 Release ms 163 Threshold dB 20 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 31 28 Solo Vocal1 COMP Out gain dB 2 0 Knee 1 Release ms 342 01V96 Owner s Manual 282 Appendix A Parameter Lists 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Title Solo Vocal2 Chorus Click Erase Announcer Limiter1 Limiter2 Total Comp1 Total Comp2 Type COMP COMP EXPAND COMPAND H COMPAND S COMP COMP COMP Parameter Value Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 26 Out gain dB 1 5 Knee 3 Release ms 331 Threshold dB 9 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 39 Out gain dB 2 5 Knee 2 Release ms 226 Threshold dB 33 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 1 Out gain dB 2 0 Knee 2 Release ms 284 Threshold dB 14 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 1 Out gain dB 2 5 Width dB 18 Release ms 180 Threshold dB 9 Ratio 1 3 Attack ms 20 Out gain dB 3 0 Width dB 90 Release ms 3 905 Threshold dB 0 Ratio 1 Attack ms 0 Out gain dB 0 0 Knee hard Release ms 319 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 94 Out gain dB 2 5 Knee hard Release ms 447 Threshold dB 16 Ratio 1 6 Attack ms 11 Out gain dB 6 0 Knee 1 Release ms 180
132. SER H mA gt B E T t E E E i E E Ed E E E E EHE E E Eg E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 JE ts J 20 21 J 22 23 C 24 J 25 J 26 J 7 J 29 J so 31 32 me1 ee eT _ Channel Strip Section p 16 STEREO Section p 16 USER DEFINED KEYS Section p 21 01V96 Owner s Manual 14 Chapter 2 Control Surface amp Rear Panel AD Input Section INSERT 2 80 1 INSERTO INSERT INSERT INSERT Ge e o 16 16 16 60 16 60 EZI GANEA EZI GAN EZJGAN EN EZI GAN ET 9 lt S z 6 m E 5 16 60 16 0 16 0 16 EZI ED GAIN GAN ET GAIN Q peak Q peak Q peak Q peak SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL i peak y 15 PEKO o SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL INPUT connectors A B INPUT A connectors are balanced XLR 3 31 type connectors that accept line level and microphone signals Each of the phantom 48V switches on the rear panel turns on or off the 48V phantom power feed to the corresponding input INPUT B connectors are bal anced TRS phone type co
133. ST INTR 40 SURROUND FR INPUT32 105 SURROUND DEPTH ST IN2L 41 SURROUND FR ST INTL 106 SURROUND DEPTH ST IN2R 42 SURROUND FR ST INTR 107 SURROUND DEPTH ST IN3L 43 SURROUND FR ST IN2L 108 SURROUND DEPTH ST IN3R 44 SURROUND FR ST IN2R 109 SURROUND DEPTH ST IN4L 45 SURROUND FR ST IN3L 110 SURROUND DEPTH ST IN4R 46 SURROUND FR ST IN3R 111 NO ASSIGN 47 SURROUND FR ST IN4L 112 NO ASSIGN 48 SURROUND FR ST IN4R 113 NO ASSIGN 49 NO ASSIGN 114 NO ASSIGN 50 NO ASSIGN 115 NO ASSIGN 51 NO ASSIGN 116 NO ASSIGN 52 NO ASSIGN 117 NO ASSIGN 53 NO ASSIGN 118 NO ASSIGN 54 NO ASSIGN 119 NO ASSIGN 55 NO ASSIGN 56 NO ASSIGN 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Owner s Manual 309 MIDI Data Format MIDI Data Format 1 DATA FORMAT 1 1 CHANNEL MESSAGE Command rx tx function 8n NOTE OFF TX Control the internal effects 9n NOTE ON TX Control the internal effects Bn CONTROL CHANGE rx tx Control parameters Cn PROGRAM CHANGE rx tx Switch scene memories 1 2 SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE Command rx tx function F1 MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER TX MTC FRAME 1 3 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE Command rx tx function F8 TIMING CLOCK TX MIDI clock FE ACTIVE SENSING TX Check MIDI cable connections FF RESET TX Clear running status 1 4 EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE 1 4 1 Real Time System Exclusive Command rx tx function FO 7F dd 06 F7 MMC tx COMMAND FO 7F dd 0
134. The library contains 40 preset memories and 160 user read able amp writable memories Follow the steps below to use the EQ library 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS EQ button then press the F2 button The EQ EQ Library page appears EQ Initial Data Ema 2 EQUALIZER LIBRARY CURRENT CURVE D CURRENT I 100 LOK 1K No LIBRARY TITLE Cymbal Tom tom 1 Snare Drum 2 Snare Drum 1 Bass Drum 2 1 CURRENT TYPE This parameter displays the currently selected channel EQ type TYPE I or II 2 CURRENT CURVE This graph displays the current EQ curve 3 Level meters These meters indicate the post EQ levels of the currently selected channel and its avail able pair partner 4 Type amp Curve section The type and curve of the currently selected EQ program are displayed here 2 Usethe LAYER buttons to select layers then press the SEL buttons to select channels You can now store the selected channel EQ settings or recall the EQ library memories to channels For details on storing and recalling memories see General Library Operation on page 171 01V96 Owner s Manual Using Libraries 183 The following table lists the preset memories in the EQ library Preset Name Description Bass Drum 1 Emphasizes the low range of a bass drum and the attack created by the beater Bass Drum 2
135. These buttons capture the current position on external machines and import the information into the TIME column 2 TRACK ARMING section This section controls the tracks on external machines 1 24 buttons These buttons turn external tracks 1 24 on or off and set or cancel their Record Ready mode ALL CLEAR Turning on this button switches all buttons 1 24 simulta neously 01V96 Owner s Manual 0430u0 210 Chapter 17 Remote Control 3 TRANSPORT section This section enables you to control the transport functions on external machines REW This button starts rewind on external machines This button starts fast forward on external machines STOP eee This button stops external machines PLAY sa S aqa a This button starts playback on external machines REG This button is used in conjunction with PLAY button to start recording on external machines 4 FRAMES This parameter selects the timecode frame rate from 24 25 30D drop frame and 30 To control the transport functions move the cursor to the desired button in the TRANSPORT section then press ENTER If you desire move the cursor to the buttons and parameters in the LOCATE TIME section and the TRACK ARMING section then press the ENTER button or rotate the Parameter wheel to control the transport func tions on external machines
136. Universal format STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS Ottttttt tt Datatype ee Element If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Oppppppp pp Parameter no Channel 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 01V96 Owner s Manual MIDI Data Format 317 2 8 3 1 5 Parameter Address Consult your dealer for parameter address details 2 8 3 2 Parameter change STATUS 11110000 ID No 01000011 SUB STATUS 0001nnnn GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID 01111111 ADDRESS 00000001 Oppppppp 11110111 2 8 3 3 Parameter request STATUS 11110000 ID No 01000011 SUB STATUS 0011 GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID 01111111 ADDRESS 00000001 11110111 FO 43 1 01 7 FO 43 3n 3E 01 7 2 8 3 4 Parameter change STATUS 11110000 ID No 01000011 SUB STATUS 0001nnnn GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID 00001101 ADDRESS 00000010 Oddddddd EOX 11110111 2 8 3 5 Parameter request STATUS 11110000 ID
137. Web site at lt http www yamahaproaudio com gt Package Contents 01V96 Digital Mixing Console CD ROM Power cord This manual Studio Manager Installation Guide Optional Extras 1 Rack Mount Kit mini YGDAI I O cards 01V96 Owner s Manual About this Owner s Manual About this Owner s Manual This Owner s Manual explains how to operate the 01V96 Digital Mixing Console The Table of Contents can help you to familiarize yourself with the manual s organization and to locate tasks and topics The index can help you locate specific information Before diving in it s recommend that you read the Operating Basics chapter starting on page 27 Each chapter in this manual discusses a specific section or function of the 01V96 The Input and Output Channels are explained in the following chapters Input Channels Bus Outs and Aux Outs Where possible these chapters have been organized in order of sig nal flow from input to output Conventions Used in this Manual The 01V96 features two types of buttons physical buttons that you can press e g ENTER and DISPLAY and buttons that appear on the display pages References to physical buttons are enclosed in square brackets for example press the ENTER button References to display page buttons are not emphasized for example move the cursor to the ON button You can select display pages by using the DISPLAY buttons or the Left
138. and Compressor Parameters 150 14 Internal 5 153 Aboutthe Internal Effects v vor eer eer ave ve Y wal tes 153 Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends 154 Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels 156 Editing Etftects ii sa a as Leo MER Ee Ss 157 About Plug Ins sup cating E EUREN ER LIE MERE 159 15 Scene Memories 161 About Scene Memories 161 Whatds Stored ima Scene uu vx RP RECIPE EE eS E IS 161 About Scene Numbers orri o TE USE REUS 162 Storing amp Recalling Scenes 163 Auto Scene Memory Update 165 epos erp evene UE E NUS 166 Recalling Scenes 5d eue ene Pep tur ose Pise 168 Sorting SCenes 255 eo etre VERITAS HOT eae d ERE 169 16 Libraries Sle Be eee uda 171 About the libraries uya an sau dut vr Os erre rete os s v p reds 171 General Library Operation 171 Using libraries inrer ec EAE US I RC P PR DH s 173 17 Remote Control
139. bracket using three screws included in the RK1 package 3 Attach the other bracket to the other side of the 01V96 in the same way 01V96 Owner s Manual 324 Index Index Symbols o INS DLY DLY 1 16 page 80 o INS DLY DLY 17 32 page 80 9 INS DLY Insert page 9 INS DLY Out Dly page 9 INS DLY Phase page o INSERT DELAY button 48V ON OFF switches Numerics 1 16 17 32 buttons 19 1 8 buttons 21 2 IN connectors 15 70 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 24 2TRIN DIGITAL connector 71 2TRD deterret 42 2TR OUT connectors 15 70 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL 24 2TR OUT DIGITAL connector 71 2TRD 42 About the display 27 AC IN connector 25 AD Input reco ue a 14 AD output section 23 AD15 16 selector 2 2 22 15 T 42 72 IN OUT connector 24 71 AES EBU card 72 AMP SIMULATE 263 Analog inputs amp outputs 69 Assigne Control changes 216 MIDI messages 205 Program changes 215 Remote Layer 185 USER
140. currently selected memory is displayed here Use the LAYER buttons to select layers then press the SEL buttons to select channels You can now store the selected channel comp settings and recall the compressor library memories to channels For details on storing and recalling memories see General Library Operation on page 171 Since ST IN Channels do not feature compressors if you select an ST IN Channel the message Stereo in has no Comp appears on the display 01V96 Owner s Manual 181 Using Libraries The following table lists the preset memories in the Compressor library Preset Name Type Description Compressor for reducing the overall volume level Use Comp COMP it on the stereo output during mixdown or with paired Input or Output Channels Expand EXPAND Expander template Compander H COMPAND H Hard kneed compressor template Compander 5 COMPAND S Soft kneed compressor template A Dr BD COMP Compressor for use with acoustic bass drum A Dr BD COMPAND H Hard kneed compander for use with acoustic bass drum A Dr SN COMP Compressor for use with acoustic snare drum A Dr SN EXPAND Expander for use with acoustic snare drum A Dr SN COMPAND S Soft kneed compander for use with acoustic snare drum Expander for use with acoustic tom toms which auto A Dr Tom EXPAND matically reduces the volume when the
141. decrement a parameter value by one Pressing the INC but ton increments the value pressing the DEC button decrements the value Holding down either key increments or decrements the value continuously 4 Left Right Up Down gt A cursor buttons These buttons move the cursor around the display pages or select parameters and options Holding down a cursor button moves the cursor continuously in the corresponding direc tion SOLO Section Tl SOLO CLEAR SOLO indicator This indicator flashes when single or multiple channels are soloed 2 CLEAR button This button unsolos all soloed Channels 01V96 Owner s Manual 23 48 23 AD Output Section Digital I O Section MIDI Control Section p 23 p 24 p 25 on fT oe on rere m ym SEO OUT WORD CLOCK En AUN MIDI TO HOST MONITOR OUT OMNI QUT o Ol Ot IN OUT COAXIAL COAXIAL pued Jeay 8 e ejing 5 IN SLOT Buenas a Je ax ACIN Power Section p 25 SLOT Section p 25 PHANTOM 48V PHANTOM 48V CH9 12 CH5 8 1 4 on orF on D CH1 4 ON OFF switch 2 CH5 8 ON OFF switch 8 CH9 12 ON OFF switch Each of these switches turns or off the 48V
142. flashes The SELECT ASSIGN parameter on the display indicates FLIP 2 Press the FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 5 buttons to select the desired Aux Sends The button indicator of the selected send lights up 3 Use the faders ON buttons and the PAN control to control the cur rently selected Aux send For stereo Aux input channels you can set the left and right panpots individually To do this press the FADER MODE AUX 7 button repeatedly When the button indicator is lit con tinuously you can set the left panpot When the button indicator is flashing you can set the right panpot 01V96 Owner s Manual 0430u0 198 Chapter 17 Remote Control Assigning Plug ins to Pro Tools Channels You can assign plug ins to five inserts available for Pro Tools channel strips as follows 1 Press the F2 button to select Insert Display mode 2 Press the FADER MODE AUX 8 button The AUX 8 button indicator flashes You can now select a channel to which you want to insert plug ins Press the SEL button of each desired channel 4 Make sure that the INSERT PARAM button 1 is selected in the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section If the PARAM button is selected instead move the cursor to the button then press ENTER to select INSERT INSERT ASSIGN EDIT ASSIGN COMPARE BYPASS INSERT I 1 i Insert 1 4 kick i D Verb ws No Insert Mo Insert Insert a oY oD E
143. humidity or dust accumulation Hold the power cord plug when disconnecting it from an AC outlet Never pull the cord A damaged power cord is a potential fire and electrical shock hazard Do nottouch the power plug with wet hands Doing so is a potential electrical shock hazard 01V96 Owner s Manual Operating Notes V This unit has ventilation holes along the top front rear and sides to prevent the internal temperature from rising too high Do not block them Blocked ventilation holes are a fire hazard In particular do not operate the unit while it s on its side is upside down or while it s covered with a cloth or dust sheet This unit is equipped with a dedicated ground connection to prevent electrical shock Before connecting the power plug to an AC outlet be sure to ground the unit To relocate the unit turn the power switch off remove the power plug from the AC outlet and remove all connecting cables Damaged cables may cause fire or electrical shock If you know you will not use this unit for a long period of time such as when going on vaca tion remove the power plug from the AC outlet Leaving it connected is a potential fire haz ard Operating Notes XLR type connectors are wired as follows pin 1 ground pin 2 hot and pin 3 cold Insert TRS phone jacks are wired as follows sleeve ground tip send and ring return The performance of components with moving contacts such switches rotary controls
144. life please consult your retailer or Yamaha Service Center as follows Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center Address Kanaalweg 18 G 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel 030 2828425 Do not throw away the battery Instead hand it in as small chemical waste CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The above warning is located on the rear of the unit Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is Intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and mainte nance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufacturer s instruc tions 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other appa ratus includi
145. minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency Delay and early reflected delay balance 096 all early 0 BEY Pat reflected delay 100 all delay S Hall L Hall Random Revers Plate Spring Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 2 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel 1 NOTEL DELAY L Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel 1 NOTER DELAY R NOTE FB 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB DLY 1 setting FH HS F JH R h Ah d J d 3 Maximum value depends on the tempo 01V96 Owner s Manual 270 Appendix A Parameter Lists DELAY REV One input two output delay and reverb effects in parallel Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB GAIN 9
146. mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010100 14 Function call 0010 2f link Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low EOX 11110111 7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 24 Parameter change Function call response link Transmission When link data is modified as a result of receiving a parameter change from Stu dio Manager the result of execution will be transmitted as the following param eter change STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 01010100 54 Function call 0010 2f link Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low DATA ee result HH ee result HL ee result LH ee result LL EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 25 Parameter change Function call pair copy Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received pairing will be enabled disabled for the specified channel STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID
147. more information refer to the explanation of the Stereo Out see page 97 Bus to Stereo Bus Out 1 8 signals are also routed to the Stereo Bus In addition to the ON LEVEL and other parameters you can also set the Send Level On Off Pan and other parameters Tip Youcan also pair adjacent odd even buses for stereo operation see page 105 By default Slot channels 1 8 and 9 16 and OUT channels 1 8 are patched to the Bus Out 1 8 outputs However you can change this patching on the Patch Out Patch page see page 123 01V96 Owner s Manual Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 from the Display 99 Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 from the Display set the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 parameters you can either move the cursor to the desired parameter on the display and change the value or operate the desired button or control on the top panel This section explains how to set the parameters on the display Tip Refer to Chapter 10 Input amp Output Patching on page 121 for more information on how to set inserts Attenuating the Stereo Out and Bus Out To attenuate the Stereo Out and Bus Out signals press the DISPLAY ACCESS EQ button then press the F4 button to display the EQ Out Att page On this page you can attenuate the Bus Out 1 8 Aux Out 1 8 and Stereo Out signals E 7 E E to H EH Initial Data J CHI CHI
148. mul titrack and master recorders 01V96 monitoring power amplifiers 2 AC IN connector This connector enables you to connect the 01V96 to an AC outlet via the supplied power cord 01V96 Owner s Manual 26 Chapter 2 Control Surface amp Rear Panel Installing an Optional Card Visit the following Yamaha Pro Audio web site to ensure that the card you are installing is supported by the 01V96 lt http www yamahaproaudio com gt Follow the steps below to install an optional mini YGDAI card 1 Make sure that the power to the 01V96 is turned off 2 Undo the two fixing screws and remove the slot cover as shown below Keep the cover and fixing screws in a safe place for future use 3 Insert the card between the guide rails and slide it all the way into the slot as shown below You may have to push firmly to fully insert the card into the internal connector 4 Secure the card using the attached thumbscrews Tighten the screws firmly to secure the card Otherwise the card may not be grounded cor rectly 01V96 Owner s Manual Operating Basics 27 3 Operating Basics This chapter describes basic operations on the 01V96 including how to use the display and operate the controls on the top panel About the Display The top panel display indicates various parameters that you must set before you can operate the 01V96 The display indicates the following items DEDIT indicator
149. number the lowest numbered program number will be transmitted Transmission to Studio Manager using Program Change messages will not be performed since there is no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match Parameter Changes will always be used STATUS DATA 1100nnnn Cn Program change Onnnnnnn nn Program number 0 127 2 5 TIMING CLOCK Reception It is used to control effects This message is transmitted 24 times per quarter note F8 STATUS 11111000 Timing clock 2 6 ACTIVE SENSING Reception Once this message has been received the failure to receive any message for an interval of 400 ms or longer will cause MIDI transmission to be initialized such as by clearing the Running Status FE STATUS 11111110 FE Active sensing 2 7 SYSTEM RESET Reception When this message is received MIDI communications will be cleared e g by clearing the Running Status FF STATUS 11111111 FF System reset 2 8 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE FO 2 8 1 MIDI MACHINE CONTROL MMC These messages are transmitted when the Machine Control section of the 01V96 is operated For details refer to the MMC specification 2 8 2 BULK DUMP This message sends or receives the contents of various memories stored within the 01V96 The basic format is as follows For DUMP DATA FO 43 7E cc cc Model ID tt mm mm Data cs F7 For DUMP REQUEST FO 43 2n Model ID tt mm mm F7 n Device Number cc cc D
150. of Available cards Note AP8AD ANALOG IN Apogee AP8DA ANALOG OUT 44 1 48 88 2 96 2 8 8 ABE 44 1 48 kHz 1 16 16 16 44 1 48 kHz 1 Can handle 24 bit 96 kHz by 8 8 TASCAM 44 1 48 kHz 1 double channel mode Digital gital 8 8 24pit 441 48 kHz 1 MYS AE96S 8 8 AES EBU 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz 1 Sampling Rate verter for input MY8 AE96 8 8 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz 1 MY4 AD 4 44 1 48 kHz 1 8 20 bit 44 1 48 kHz 1 ANALOG IN MY8 AD24 8 M 44 1 48 kHz 1 i MY8 AD96 8 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz 1 MY4 DA 4 20 bit 44 1 48 kHz 1 ANALOG OUT MY8 DA96 8 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz 1 MY8 mLAN mLAN Interface 8 1 394 44 1 48 2 1 Maximum 5 nodes Y56K Effect amp I O 8 24 bit 44 1 48 kHz 1 1 1 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz Ach fs 88 2 96 kHz 1 Details depend on each interface card Selectable from STEREO BUS AUX DIRECT OUT INSERT OUT CASCADE OUT STEREO 051 8 AUX1 8 SOLO 01V96 Owner s Manual CONTROL I O Spec 291 CONTROL Spec Port Format Level Connector in Console TO HOST USB USB 0 V 3 3 V B type USB connector MIDI DIN Connector 5P MIDI OUT MIDI DIN Connector 5P THRU MIDI DIN Connector 5P TTL 75 BNC Connector OUT TTL 75 Q BNC Connector 1
151. patches enable assignment of input signals to desired signal paths Output patches enable assignment of Bus Out signals and Input Channel Direct Outs to desired output jacks 01V96 Owner s Manual 12 Chapter 1 Welcome Channel Configuration 32Input Channels and four ST IN channels can be mixed at a time Group multiple channels and pair channels for stereo Eight Bus Outs and eight Aux Sends Bus Outs 1 8 can be routed to Stereo Buses for use as Group Buses Channel library for storing and recalling the channel settings for each Input Channel and Output Channel Four band on each channel Dynamics processors on all channels excluding ST IN channels Dynamics processor settings and EQ settings can be stored in libraries and recalled Effects Four high quality multi channel effects Apply effects via Aux Sends or Channel Inserts Effect library for storing and recalling effect settings Scene Memory Scene memories for storing and recalling mix settings as Scenes Surround Sound Supports 3 1 5 1 and 6 1 channel surround sound production Surround channel outputs can be assigned to suit connected devices Remote Control Control and manage your 01V96 from your Mac or PC using bundled Studio Manager software Remote Layer for remote control of Pro Tools Nuendo and other DAWs that support the Pro Tools protocol e Control an external recorder via MMC command
152. phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency i O06 DLY ER 0 100 Delay and early reflections balance 0 all delay 100 all early reflections S Hall L Hall Random 2 5 Revers Plate Spring Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 2 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel 1 NOTEL DELAY L Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel 1 NOTER DELAY R NOTE FB 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB DLY 1 01V96 Owner s Manual setting ffi F h ddd h J J d 4 Maximum value depends on the tempo DELAY ER 269 Effects Parameters One input two output delay and early reflections effects in series Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback
153. recording narration 01V96 Owner s Manual 184 Chapter 16 Libraries 01V96 Owner s Manual Remote Control 185 17 Remote Control This chapter describes the Remote function which enables you to control external equip ment directly from the 01V96 top panel About Remote Function The 01V96 s Remote function enables you to control external DAW Digital Audio Work station equipment MIDI devices recorders etc There are two types of Remote functions Remote and Machine Control REMOTE Remote Layer To use these types of Remote functions you must connect the 01V96 to a target device via USB oran optional MY8 mLAN card installed in the slot and operate the faders and ON buttons on the top panel to control the external device remotely You can specify a target device and parameter values on the DIO Setup Remote page This layer is enabled when you turn on the LAYER REMOTE button During Remote opera tion the controls on the top panel enable you to control the external device You cannot adjust the 01V96 s parameters unless you select a different layer You can assign functions of a target device to the controls on the top panel of the 01V96 by using Remote layer The following targets are available for remote control ProTools You can remotely control Digidesign Pro Tools Nuendo You can remotely control Steinberg Nuendo G
154. recording starts DAW PLAY Starts playback from the current cursor position DAW STOP Stops playback and recording DAW FF Fast forwards the cursor position DAW REW Fast rewinds the cursor position DAW SHUTTLE Switches the Wheel mode to Shuttle DAW SCRUB Switches the Wheel mode to Scrub Jog DAW AUDITION You can audition the pre roll post roll in point area or out point area by holding down the button to which this function is assigned and pressing a button to which DAW PRE DAW POST DAW IN or DAW OUT is assigned 01V96 Owner s Manual 0430u0 194 Chapter 17 Remote Control Parameter Function DAW PRE Plays back from the pre roll point up to the beginning of the selected area DAW IN Plays back from the beginning of the selected area for a duration specified as the pre roll DAW OUT Plays back to the end of the selected area for a duration specified as the post roll DAW POST Plays back from the end of the selected area for a duration specified as the post roll DAW RTZ Moves the playback cursor to the beginning of the session DAW END Moves the playback cursor to the end of the session DAW ONLINE Toggles between on line and off line DAW LOOP Toggles Loop Playback on and off DAW QUICKPUNCH Toggles QuickPunch on and off DAW AUTO FADER DAW AUTO MUTE DAW AUTO PAN DAW AU
155. rx tx General purpose digital mixer REQUEST parameter request The following data types of parameter change are used by the 01V96 Type HEX tx rx function 1 01 tx rx Edit buffer 2 02 tx rx Patch data 3 03 tx rx Setup data 4 04 tx rx Backup data 15 tx rx Cascade data 16 10 tx rx Function recall store title clear 17 11 TX Function pair copy 18 12 TX Function effect 19 13 tx rx Sort table 20 14 tx rx Function attribute link 32 20 TX ey remote 33 21 tx rx Remote meter 34 22 tx rx Remote time counter 80 50 tx rx Function response recall store title clear 84 54 tx rx Function response attribute link 126 7E tx rx Version 127 75 tx Active sense tx indicates that the data can be transmitted from the 01V96 and rx indicates that the data can be received by the 01V96 2 Format Details 2 1 NOTE OFF 8n Reception If OTHER ECHO is ON these message are echoed from MIDI OUT Ifthe Rx CH matches these messages are received and used to control effects STATUS 1000nnnn 8n Note off message DATA Onnnnnnn nn Note number Ovvvvvvv vv Velocity ignored 2 2 NOTE ON 9n Reception If OTHER ECHO is ON these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT Ifthe Rx CH matches these messages are received and used to control effects STATUS 1001nnnn 9n Note message DATA Onnnnnnn nn Note number Ovvvvvvv vv Velocity 1
156. set tings are stored are retained while the 01V96 is turned off This allows the 01V96 to restore the edited mix settings when you turn on the power 102 uut Display 102 Eni pamm 57 Edit indicator The contents of recalled Scene memory The parameters of recalled Scene memory 2 2 match the current settings on the were edited Therefore the Edit indicators 01V96 and the Edit indicator remains off appear indicating that the current settings on the 01V96 do not match Scene memory 2 01V96 Owner s Manual Storing and Recalling Scenes 163 Storing and Recalling Scenes You can store and recall Scenes by pressing the buttons on the top panel or using the dedi cated Scene memory page on the display Note When you store Scenes make sure that there are no settings in the Edit Buffer that you do not want to store Make sure that no settings especially faders have been adjusted uninten tionally f you are not sure of the Edit Buffer s contents recall the last Scene make the adjustments you want then store the Scene You may wish to store the current Scene to an unused Scene memory just in case Storing and Recalling Scenes Using the SCENE MEMORY Buttons You can use the SCENE MEMORY buttons to store and recall Scenes 1 Adjust the mix parameters on the 01V96 to the conditions you wish to store as a Scene 2 Press the SCENE MEMORY Up A or Down Y buttons to select a Scene memory number
157. set to the Tx CH When the title is changed on the 01V96 this message will be transmitted with the device number set to Tx CH STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010000 10 Function call 0100 4f title Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low DATA Oddddddd dd title 1 Oddddddd dd title x depend on the library EOX 11110111 7 End of exclusive function number size SCENE LIB TITLE 0x40 0 99 256 0 response only 16 EQ LIB TITLE 0x41 1 128 1 40 response only 16 GATE LIB TITLE 0x42 1 128 1 4 response only 16 COMP LIB TITLE 0x43 1 128 1 36 response only 16 EFF LIB TITLE 0x44 1 128 1 52 response only 16 CHANNEL LIB TITLE 0x46 0 128 0 response only 16 INPATCH LIB TITLE 0x47 0 32 0 response only 16 OUTPATCH LIB TITLE 0x48 0 32 0 response only 16 01V96 Owner s Manual MIDI Data Format 319 2 8 3 15 Parameter request Function call title Reception When this is received a parameter change will be transmitted with the device number set to Rx CH Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODE
158. system 37 Contrast control sees 19 Control changes 211 216 Control surface 13 AD input section 14 Channel strip section 16 Data entry section 22 DISPLAY ACCESS section 18 Display section 19 FADER MODE section 17 LAYER section us ananassa 19 Monitor out amp Headphones section EE 15 SCENE MEMORY section 21 SELECTED CHANNEL section 20 SOLO section ses 22 ST IN section see 17 STEREO section 16 USER DEFINED KEYS section 21 COPY uester 74 Cursor buttons 22 D Daisy chain distribution 40 Data entry section 22 DAW 202 Nuendo 4202 Other 202 Pro tools 186 Recording system 39 Remote 185 DEC amp INC buttons 22 DEL DUON erm 30 ette 80 99 110 DELAY SCALE 80 eter 80 DELAY LGR ient sisis 256 DELAY SCALE eee 80 I Ta 268 DELAY EREV 270 gt 269 DELAY gt REV 270 Digital I O section 24 Digital inputs amp outputs
159. the 2TR IN connectors When the button is turned off raised you can monitor the Stereo Out signals or soloed channel signals 3 MONITOR LEVEL control This control adjusts the monitoring level of the signals output from the MONITOR OUT connectors PHONES LEVEL control This control sets the level of the PHONES See page 131 for more information on moni toring through the headphones 5 PHONES jack You can connect a set of stereo headphones to this stereo phone jack The signals output from the MONITOR OUT connectors are also output from this jack 01V96 Owner s Manual 16 Chapter 2 Control Surface amp Rear Panel Channel Strip Section SEL buttons These buttons enable you to select desired channels The SEL button indicator for the cur rently selected channel lights up The channel selected by each SEL button depends on the layer selected in the LAYER section see page 19 These buttons also allow you to create or cancel channel pairs and add channels to or remove them from Fader Mute EQ and Compressor groups 2 SOLO buttons These buttons solo the selected channels The SOLO button indicator of the cur rently soloed channel lights up 9 ON buttons These buttons turn the selected channels on or off The ON button indicators for On channels light up 4 Channel faders Depending on the button selected in the FADER MODE section see page 17 these faders adjust the select
160. time without prior notice Since specifications equipment or options may not be the same in every locale please check with your Yamaha dealer European Models Purchaser User Information specified in EN55103 1 and EN55103 2 Inrush Current 20 A Conforms to Environments El E2 E3 and E4 01V96 Owner s Manual 292 Appendix C MIDI Appendix C MIDI Scene Memory to Program Change Table Program Initial User Program Initial User Program Initial User Change Scene Scene Change Scene Scene Change Scene Scene 1 01 44 44 87 87 2 02 45 45 88 88 3 03 46 46 89 89 4 04 47 47 90 90 5 05 48 48 91 91 6 06 49 49 92 92 7 07 50 50 93 93 8 08 51 51 94 94 9 09 52 52 95 95 10 10 53 53 96 96 11 11 54 54 97 97 12 12 55 55 98 98 13 13 56 56 99 99 14 14 57 57 100 00 15 15 58 58 101 16 16 59 59 102 17 17 60 60 103 18 18 61 61 104 19 19 62 62 105 20 20 63 63 106 21 21 64 64 107 22 22 65 65 108 23 23 66 66 109 24 24 67 67 110 25 25 68 68 111 26 26 69 69 112 27 27 70 70 113 28 28 71 71 114 29 29 72 72 115 30 30 73 73 116 31 31 74 74 117 32 32 75 75 118 33 33 76 76 119 34 34 77 77 120 35 35 78 78 121 36 36 79 79 122 37 37 80 80 123 38 38 81 81 124 39 39 82 82 125
161. tom toms are not played improving mic separation Soft kneed compander for emphasizing the attack and A Dr OverTop COMPAND S ambience of cymbals recorded with overhead mics It automatically reduces the volume when the cymbals are not played improving mic separation E B Finger COMP Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a fin ger picked electric bass guitar E B Slap COMP Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a slapped electric bass guitar Syn Bass COMP Compressor for controlling or emphasizing the level of a synth bass 1 Compressor for brightening the tonal color of a piano 16 Piano2 COMP A variation on preset 15 using a deep threshold to change the overall attack and level Compressor for electric guitar cutting or arpeg 17 E Guitar COMP gio style backing The sound color can be varied by playing different styles 18 A Guitar COMP Compressor for acoustic guitar stroke or arpeg gio style backing 19 Strings COMP Compressor for use with strings 20 Strings2 COMP A variation on preset 19 intended for violas or cellos A variation on preset 20 intended for string instru 21 Strings3 COMP ments with a very low range such as cellos or contra bass 22 BrassSection COMP Compressor for brass sounds with a fast and strong attack Compressor for musical instruments that feature gentle Svn Pad sounds which depending on the tones could diffuse 23 gt Y COME such as synth pa
162. trigger is received For minus values recording starts before the trigger is received TRG LVL 60 to 0 dB Input trigger level i e the signal level required to trigger recording or playback Once playback has been triggered subsequent triggers are TRO MASK ignored for the duration of the TRG MASK time In MOMENT mode the sample plays only while the that the PLAY button is pressed In CONT mode playback continues PLY MODE i once the PLAY button has been pressed number of times the sample plays is set using the LOOP NUM parame ter In INPUT mode playback is triggered by the input signal START 1 Playback start point in milliseconds END 1 Playback end point in milliseconds LOOP 1 Loop start point in milliseconds LOOP NUM 0 100 Number of times the sample plays START 2 7 SAMPLE Playback start point in samples END Le 2 SAMPLE Playback end point in samples LOOP me 2 SAMPLE Loop start point in samples PITCH 12 to 12 semitones Playback pitch shift FINE 50 to 50 cents Playback pitch shift fine MIDI TRG OFF C1 C6 ALL PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on off messages 1 0 0 2970 5 ms fs 44 1 kHz 0 0 2729 2 ms 15 48 kHz 0 0 2970 5 ms fs 88 2 kHz 0 0 2729 2 ms fs 96 kHz 2 0 131000 ms fs 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 0 262000 fs 88 2 kHz 96 kHz ST REVERB Two input two output stereo reverb Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Rev
163. you can shuttle back and forth by turning the Parameter wheel 1 Assign the DAW SCRUB or DAW SHUTTLE parameter to one of the User Defined buttons 1 8 Before assigning parameters to these buttons you must switch layers to cancel the Remote function See page 231 for more information on assigning the parameters to the User Defined buttons 2 Press the LAYER REMOTE button to enable remote control of Pro Tools Make sure that Pro Tools is stopped 4 Press the User Defined button to which you assigned the DAW SCRUB or DAW SHUTTLE parameter in Step 1 You can now use the Scrub or Shuttle function 01V96 Owner s Manual 5 Rotate the Parameter wheel Rotate the Parameter wheel clockwise to scrub or shuttle forwards Turn it counterclock wise to scrub or shuttle backwards Pro Tools Remote Layer 201 The minimum scrub playback step varies depending on the zoom setting in the Pro Tools Edit window 6 To cancel the Scrub or Shuttle function press the User Defined button or DAW SHUTTLE to which you assigned the DAW SCRUB parameter in Step 1 Alternatively you can cancel the Scrub or Shuttle function by pressing the User Defined button to which the DAW STOP parameter is assigned The Scrub function is automatically cancelled if you commence playback or fast forward Note The Scrub Shuttle operation might be stopped unexpectedly by Pro Tools Therefore whenever you use the Scrub or Shuttle function make sur
164. your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below Pour plus de d tails sur les produits veuillez vous adresser Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd 135 Milner Avenue Scarborough Ontario MIS 3R1 Canada Tel 416 298 1311 U S A Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 U S A Tel 714 522 9011 CENTRAL amp SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S A De C V Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No 1149 Col Gpe Del Moral Deleg Iztapalapa 09300 Mexico D F Tel 55 5804 0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA Av Rebou as 2636 S o Paulo Brasil Tel 011 3085 1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America S A Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2 B 1053 Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 1 4371 7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America S A Torre Banco General Piso 7 Urbanizaci n Marbella Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia Ciudad de Panam Panam Tel 4 507 269 5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Kemble Music U K Ltd Sherbourne Drive Tilbrook Milton Keynes MK7 8BL England Tel 01908 366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstrafe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 SWITZERLAND LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Cent
165. 0 ask OUTPUT ATTENUATOR BUS1 Bus 4 5 5 1 2 3 7 8 GdB GdB GdB GdB GdB de GdB AUX 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 5 GdB de de de de de O STEREO EG EDIT fAEG LIBRARY ZA ATT f OUT RTT The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels see page 83 Delaying the Stereo Out and Bus Outs delay the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 signals press the INSERT DELAY button repeatedly until the INS DLY Out page appears INSZDLY Initial Data 815717 5112 5113 STI4 1 1 Oo DELAY SCALE sampe BUS 1 2 3 4 15 16 1 8 0 9 sampe AUX 12 BO m Xpo4 p5 i 8 1 7 Ger GE EE Ger EE msecl G G Isamriel 5 i ih GFF msec 0 0 Isamriel The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels except that this page does not include the MIX FB GAIN parameters see Tip You can also display the Out Dly page by pressing the INSERT DELAY button once then press the SEL button to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out
166. 000 00 ee Effect number 0 Effect1 3 Effect4 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive function channel Freeze Play button 0x00 O Effect1 3 Effect4 Freeze Record button 0x01 0 1 3 4 This does not activate when the effect type is different 2 8 3 27 Parameter change Sort Table When scene memory sort is executed on the 01V96 the memory sort table will be transmitted to Studio Manager Studio Manager will sort the memories according to this data If Studio Manager performs a scene memory sort it will transmit this data to the 01V96 STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00001101 OD 01996 ADDRESS 00010011 13 Library sort table 0000ffff Of Library type DATA Oddddddd ds Data Oddddddd de Data EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 8 7 conversion is performed on the data area in the same way as for bulk 2 8 3 28 Parameter request Sort Table When the 01V96 receives this data it will transmit Sort Table Data STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODELID digital mixer MODEL ID 00001101 OD 01996 ADDRESS 00010011 13 Library sort table 0000ffff Of Library type EOX 11110111 7
167. 011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01001100 4c l 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01001110 4E N Ommmmmmm mh m 0 SLOT 1 Ommmmmmm ml EOX 11110111 rF7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 PARAMETER CHANGE 2 8 3 1 Basic behavior Reception If Parameter change ECHO is ON these messages are echoed If Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the Device Number included in the SUB STATUS these messages are received A specific parameter is controlled when a Parameter Change is received When a Parameter Request is received the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a Parameter Change with the Device Number set to Rx CH Transmission If Parameter change TX is ON and you operate a parameter for which Control Change transmission is not enabled a parameter change will be transmitted with Tx CH as the Device Number As a response to a Parameter Request a parameter change will be transmitted with Rx CH as the Device Number 2 8 3 1 1 Parameter change basic format STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00001101 OD 01V96
168. 01V96 Owner s Manual 283 Appendix B Specifications General Spec Number of scene memories 99 Internal 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz Sampling Frequency External Normal rate 44 1 kHz 1096 to 48 kHz 6 Double rate 88 2 2 10 to 96 kHz 6 Sec fs 48 kHz Less than 1 6 ms CH INPUT to STEREO OUT ignal Delay fs 96 kHz Less than 0 8 ms CH INPUT to STEREO OUT Fader 100 mm motorized x 17 Fader Resolution 10 to 138 dB input faders 0 to 7138 dB master faders stereo fader np 1 fs 48 kHz Less than 0 05 20 Hz 20 kHz 14 dB into 600 Q Total Harmonic Distortion Less than 0 0196 1 kHz 24 dB into 600 Q CH INPUT to STEREO OUT Input Gain Min fs 96 kHz Less than 0 0596 20 Hz 40 kHz 14 dB into 600 Less than 0 01 1 kHz 24 dB into 600 Q Frequency Response fs 48 kHz 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 5 1 5 dB 4 dB into 600 Q CH INPUT to STEREO OUT 96 kHz 20 Hz 40 kHz 0 5 1 5 dB 4 dB into 600 Dynamic Range maximum level to noise level 110 dB typ DA Converter STEREO OUT 105 dB typ AD DA to STEREO OUT fs 48 kHz 105 dB typ AD DA to STEREO OUT fs 96 kHz Hum amp Noise2 20 2 20 kHz Rs 150 Q 128 dB Equivalent Input Noise 86 dB residual output noise STEREO OUT STEREO OUT off Input Gain Max Input Pad 0 dB 86 dB 90 dB S N STEREO OUT STEREO fader at nominal level and all
169. 01V96 only the user area is valid 36 127 256 00100000 20 STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message 00100000 20 ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA 00111000 38 8 SUB STATUS 0000nnnn n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel 01000011 43 C FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 00111001 39 9 COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 cl 00110011 33 COUNT LOW cl DATA NAME 01010000 50 01001100 4c 1 00000010 02 01001101 4D M 00000000 00 No 256 Current 00100000 20 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 2 8 2 15 Equalizer library bulk dump format 01000011 43 The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number 00111001 39 9 O Library no 1 199 Library no 200 00110011 33 3 256 CH1 287 CH32 288 STEREO 1L 295 STEREO 384 BUSI m 391 BUS8 512 AUXI 519 AUX8 768 STEREO 8192 UNDO DATA NAMES 0011001 E Y 256 and following are data the corresponding channel of the edit buffer Ommmmmmm mh 0 127 Library no 1 128 For reception by the 01V96 only the user area is valid 40 199 256 Ommmmmmm ml 256 Channel current data BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number DATA Oddddddd ds Library data of block bb STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID
170. 03 Snare Drum 1 132 Hz 1 00 kHz 3 15 kHz 5 00 kHz 1 2 4 5 0 11 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 41 5 dB 8 5 dB 2 5 dB 4 0 dB 04 Snare Drum 2 180 Hz 335 Hz 2 36 kHz 4 00 kHz 10 0 7 0 1 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 2 0 dB 7 5 dB 2 0 dB 41 0 dB 05 Tom tom 1 212Hz 670 Hz 4 50 kHz 6 30 kHz 1 4 10 1 2 0 28 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 13 0 dB 06 Cymbal 106 Hz 425 Hz 1 06 kHz 13 2 kHz 8 0 9 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 0 dB 2 5 dB 1 0 dB 40 5 dB 07 High Hat 95 Hz 425 Hz 2 80 kHz 7 50 kHz 0 5 1 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 5 dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 08 Percussion 100 Hz 400 Hz 2 80 kHz 17 0 kHz 4 5 0 56 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 7 5 dB 4 5 dB 2 5 dB 0 0 dB 09 E Bass 1 35 5 Hz 112 Hz 2 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 5 4 5 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 3 0 dB 0 0 dB 2 5 dB 40 5 dB 10 E Bass 2 112 Hz 112 Hz 2 24 kHz 4 00 kHz 0 1 5 6 3 Preset Parameters 275 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Title Syn Bass 1 Syn Bass 2 Piano 1 Piano 2 E G Clean E G Crunch 1 E G Crunch 2 E G Dist 1 E G Dist 2 A G Stroke 1 A G Stroke 2 Parameter LOW L MID H MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 3 5 dB 8 5 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 85 Hz 950 Hz 4 00 kHz 12 5 kHz 0 1
171. 1 4 settings its Surround mode and Aux pairing infor mation are also displayed below this parameter sauelqn 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers then press the SEL buttons to select channels For details on the Store and Recall functions see General Library Operation on page 171 If the selected memory s channel type does not match the type of the destination channel an alarm mark 44 and the word CONFLICT appear next to the STORED FROM parameter These alarms indicate that you tried to recall unrecallable channel settings to the currently selected channel 01V96 Owner s Manual 174 Chapter 16 Libraries The alarm indicators also appear when the Surround mode Aux pair and other non chan nel parameter settings originally stored in the memory do not match those for the destina tion channel However if the channel type of the memory and that of the destination channel match you can recall the settings even with the alarm indicators displayed For unmatched parameter settings the 01V96 will use the settings in the memory that is to be recalled The following preset memories are available for the Channel library No Preset Name Description This preset memory resets all parameters of the currently selected channel Reset dB 3 Ce dB to their initial values and sets the channel fader level to dB This preset memory resets all parameters of the currently selected channel Rese
172. 1 8 01V96 Owner s Manual 100 Chapter 8 Outs Compressing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs set the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 compressors press the DYNAMICS button then the F3 button to display the Dynamics Comp Edit page and use the SEL buttons to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1 8 DYNRHICS ID Initial Data BUS1 BUS EN res 0 0 O THRESHOLD RRTIO i 8 098 i 2 58 RELEASE OUT GAIN KNEE 229 5 i D e 2 EDIT f LIE f COMP EDIT COMP LIE The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels see page 82 EQ ing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs set the EQ for the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 EQ press the DISPLAY ACCESS EQ button then press the F1 button to display the EQ EQ Edit page and use the SEL but tons to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1 8 E Initial Data 2111 5112 5713 5714 G O 8051 EQUALIZER EDIT LIBRARY ZA IN ATT OUT ATT 2 The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels see page 84 Note that the Stereo Out does not feature the STEREO LINK parameter 01V96 Owner s Manual Setting the Stereo Out and Bus 1 8 from the Display 101 Routing Bus Out 1 8 Signals to the Stereo Bus
173. 1 8 parameters you can either move the cursor to the desired parameter on the screen and change the value or operate the desired button or control on the top panel This section explains how to set the parameters on the screen Tip Refer to Chapter 10 Input amp Output Patching on page 121 for more information on how to set inserts Attenuating Aux Outs To attenuate Aux Out 1 8 signals press the EQ button then press the F4 button to dis play the EQ Out Att page Initial Data 5112 5113 5714 OUTPUT ATTENUATOR AU Fi de GdB de AUX 4 5 66 dB GdB 898 GdB 898 de 898 STEREO LEG EDIT 1 OUT f parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels see page 83 Delaying Aux Outs To delay Aux Out 1 8 signals press the DISPLAY ACCESS INSERT DELAY button repeatedly until the INS DLY page appears Init Initial Bata 5 STI2 STI3 ST 4 RUX 1 RUXI GIH ao O OUTPUT DELAY AUX DELAY SCALE poo 5 oA Em en A oA m a msec 2 sampe d e AUX 5 em em Em
174. 1 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT3 92 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT4 93 SURROUND DEPTH INPUTS 94 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT6 95 SURROUND DEPTH 102 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT8 103 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT9 104 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT10 105 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT11 106 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT12 107 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT13 108 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT14 109 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT15 110 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT16 111 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT17 112 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT18 113 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT19 114 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT20 115 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT21 116 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT22 117 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT23 118 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT24 119 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Owner s Manual 308 Appendix C MIDI CHANNEL16 High Mid Low High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 59 ASSIGN 1 SURROUND LR INPUT25 60 NO ASSIGN 2 SURROUND LR INPUT26 61 NO ASSIGN 3 SURROUND LR INPUT27 62 NO ASSIGN 4 SURROUND LR INPUT28 63 ASSIGN 5 SURROUND LR INPUT29 64 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT25 6 SURROUND LR 0 65 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT26 7 SURROUND LR IN
175. 1 0 Knee hard Release ms 238 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 7 Out gain dB 6 0 Knee 2 Release ms 174 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 7 Out gain dB 2 5 Knee 4 Release ms 261 Threshold dB 10 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 5 Out gain dB 1 5 Knee 2 Release ms 238 Threshold dB 11 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 33 Out gain dB 1 5 Knee 2 Release ms 749 Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 1 5 Attack ms 93 Out gain dB 1 5 Knee 4 Release ms 1 35 5 Preset Compressor Parameters fs 44 1 kHz 281 Title Type Parameter Value Threshold dB 17 Ratio 1 1 5 Attack ms 76 21 Strings3 COMP Out gain dB 2 5 Knee 2 Release ms 186 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 18 22 BrassSection COMP Out gain dB 4 0 Knee 1 Release ms 226 Threshold dB 13 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 58 23 Syn Pad COMP gt Out gain dB 2 0 Knee 1 Release ms 238 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 8 24 SamplingPerc COMPAND S Out gain dB 2 5 Width dB 18 Release ms 238 Threshold dB 14 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 2 25 Sampling BD COMP Out gain dB 3 5 Knee 4 Release ms 35 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 4 Attack ms 8 26 Sampling SN COMP Out gain dB 8 0 Knee hard Release ms 354 Threshold dB 23
176. 111 EQ INPUT17 112 EQ ON INPUT18 113 EQ ON INPUT19 114 EQ INPUT20 115 EQ INPUT21 116 EQ ON INPUT22 117 EQ ON INPUT23 118 EQ ON INPUT24 119 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Owner s Manual 306 Appendix C MIDI CHANNEL14 High Mid Low High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 59 ASSIGN 1 SURROUND LFE H INPUT25 60 NO ASSIGN 2 SURROUND LFE H INPUT26 61 NO ASSIGN 3 SURROUND LFE H INPUT27 62 NO ASSIGN 4 SURROUND LFE H INPUT28 63 NO ASSIGN 5 SURROUND LFE H INPUT29 64 SURROUND DIV F INPUT25 6 SURROUND LFE H 0 65 SURROUND DIV F INPUT26 7 SURROUND LFE H INPUT31 66 SURROUND DIV F INPUT27 8 SURROUND LFE H INPUT32 67 SURROUND DIV F INPUT28 9 SURROUND LFE H ST INTL 68 SURROUND DIV F INPUT29 10 SURROUND LFE H ST INTR 69 SURROUND DIV F INPUT30 11 SURROUND LFE H ST IN2L 70 SURROUND DIV F INPUT31 12 SURROUND LFE H ST IN2R 71 SURROUND DIV F INPUT32 13 SURROUND LFE H ST IN3L 72 SURROUND DIV F ST INTL 14 SURROUND LFE H ST IN3R 73 SURROUND DIV F ST INTR 15 SURROUND LFE H ST INAL
177. 111 113 HOME button PR eene 17 34 HOME button indicator 33 HORIZONTAL eere 93 HQ PITCH aereis 260 EQ EQ Library page 182 EQ Out Att page 99 110 EQ button 18 01V96 Owner s Manual 326 Index L L R Nominal Pan preference 227 LASTASOLO eter 132 LATCH 207 LAYER section 19 Layers Asl Initial bank settings 250 LEARN button 206 Level controls sss 17 Levels 104 113 nete eren 142 171 Channel library 173 Compressor library 180 Effects library aaa a 175 EQ lHbrapy 182 Gate library sess 179 General operation 171 Input patch library 174 Output patch library 175 specifications 2022 288 Link REESE 147 Compressors 4 22 0 150 PAR 150 LOW button erret 20 LOW MID button 20 M M BAND DYNA 273 Machine control 208 MASTER button eee 19 MASTER MODE 44 36 Meter CH1 32 page 34 Meter Effect page 35 Meter Master page 35
178. 127 on 0 off 2 3 CONTROL CHANGE Bn Reception If Control Change ECHO is ON these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT If TABLE is selected these message are received if Control Change Rx is ON and will control parameters according to the Control assign table settings The parameters that can be set are defined in the Control Change Assign Pa rameter List If NRPN is selected these messages are received if Control Change Rx is ON and the Rx CH matches and will control the parameter that is specified by the four messages NRPN control number 62h 63h and Data Entry control num ber 06h 26h Parameter settings are defined in the Control Change Assign Pa rameter List Transmission If TABLE is selected operating a parameter specified in the Control assign ta ble will cause these messages to be transmitted if Control Change Tx is ON The parameters that can be specified are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter List If NRPN is selected operating a specified parameter will cause data to be transmitted on the Tx CH if Control Change Tx is ON using the four mes sages NRPN control number 62h 63h and Data Entry control number 06h 26h Parameter settings are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter List This data cannot be transmitted via control change to Studio Manager since there is no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match Parameter Change messages will always be used
179. 2 Ver X XX X XX represents the version number This indicator identifies the system version number Check the current system version number before you update the system software 01V96 Owner s Manual Initializing the 01 96 239 Initializing the 01996 You can delete all currently recorded settings and restore the factory preset values and reset the Operation Lock password to its initial setting Follow the steps below Note Ifyou initialize the 01V96 to the factory preset values all Scene library and other data you stored previously will be erased Proceed with caution f you want to keep the current internal data be sure to first back up the data using the included Studio Manager software Tip Youcan also store the data to an external MIDI device such as a MIDI data filer by using MIDI Bulk Dump see page 222 1 Make sure that the power to the 01V96 is turned off 2 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY STORE button turn on the POWER ON OFF switch After a moment the 01V96 displays the following confirmation window CONF RMAT I ON Initialize or Password Reset CRHNCEL I LINITIALIZE PASSWORD 3 To reset the 01V96 to factory default settings move the cursor to the INI TIALIZE button then press ENTER To cancel the initialization operation move the cursor to the CANCEL button then press ENTER When the internal data is thoroughly overwritten the 01V96 re
180. 2 Vocal off Vocal off Intro Mix 169 2 Move the cursor to the SOURCE list 1 in the left column then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the Scene mem ory you wish to move 3 Move the cursor to the DESTINATION list 2 in the right column then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the position to which you want to move the source Scene memory 4 Press ENTER to move the source Scene memory to the specified destina tion The Scene memory numbers are updated accordingly 01V96 Owner s Manual SalJOUJ9 A 9Uu95S 170 15 5 01V96 Owner s Manual Libraries 171 16 Libraries This chapter describes the 01V96 s various libraries About the Libraries The 01V96 features seven libraries that enable you to store Channel Input Patch Output Patch Effects and other data You can also quickly recall this data from the libraries to restore previous parameter values The 01V96 offers the following libraries Channel Library Input Patch Library Output Patch Library Effects Library Gate Library Compressor Library EQ Library Tip You can store library data to a computer hard disk using the included Studio Manager soft ware Be sure to back up your important data You can also store library data to an external MIDI device such as a MIDI data file
181. 20 53 EQ G HIGH L INPUT21 54 EQ G HIGH L INPUT22 55 EQ G HIGH L INPUT23 56 EQ G HIGH L INPUT24 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN High Mid Low 59 NO ASSIGN 60 NO ASSIGN 61 NO ASSIGN 62 NO ASSIGN 63 NO ASSIGN 64 INPUT1 65 EQ F HIGH INPUT2 66 EQ F HIGH INPUT3 67 EQ F HIGH INPUT4 68 EQ F HIGH INPUTS 69 EQ F HIGH INPUT6 70 EQ F HIGH 71 EQ F HIGH INPUT8 72 EQ F HIGH INPUT9 73 F HIGH INPUT10 74 F HIGH INPUT11 75 INPUT12 76 F HIGH INPUT13 77 EQ F HIGH INPUT14 78 EQ F HIGH INPUT15 79 INPUT16 80 EQ F HIGH INPUT17 81 EQ F HIGH INPUT18 82 EQ F HIGH INPUT19 83 EQ F HIGH INPUT20 84 EQ F HIGH INPUT21 85 EQ F HIGH INPUT22 86 EQ F HIGH INPUT23 87 EQ F HIGH INPUT24 88 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ Q HIGH INPUT1 90 EQ Q HIGH INPUT2 91 EQ Q HIGH INPUT3 92 Q HIGH INPUTA 93 EQ Q HIGH INPUTS 94 EQ Q HIGH INPUT6 95 Q HIGH 102 Q HIGH INPUT8 103 EQ Q HIGH INPUT9 104 EQ Q HIGH INPUT10 105 EQ Q HIGH INPUT11 106 EQ Q HIGH INPUT12 107 EQ Q HIGH INPUT13 108 EQ Q HIGH INPUT14 109 EQ Q HIGH INPUT15 110 EQ Q HIGH INPUT16 111 EQ Q HIGH INPUT17 112 EQ Q HIGH INPUT18 113 EQ Q
182. 26 Range dB 56 1 Gate GATE Attack ms 0 Hold ms 2 56 Decay ms 331 Threshold dB 19 Range dB 22 2 DUCKING Attack ms 93 Hold ms 1 20 S Decay ms 6 32 S Threshold dB 11 Range dB 53 3 Dr BD GATE Attack ms 0 Hold ms 1 93 Decay ms 400 Threshold dB 8 Range dB 23 4 A Dr SN GATE Attack ms 1 Hold ms 0 63 Decay ms 238 Preset Compressor Parameters fs 44 1 kHz Title Type Parameter Value Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 60 1 Comp COMP Out gain dB 0 0 Knee 2 Release ms 250 Threshold dB 23 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 1 2 Expand EXPAND Out gain dB 3 5 Knee 2 Release ms 70 Threshold dB 10 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 1 3 Compander H COMPAND H 5 Out gain dB 0 0 Width dB 6 Release ms 250 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 4 Attack ms 25 4 Compander S COMPAND S Out gain dB 0 0 Width dB 24 Release ms 180 01V96 Owner s Manual Preset Compressor Parameters fs 44 1 kHz 279 Title Type Parameter Value Threshold dB 24 Ratio 1 3 Attack ms 9 5 A Dr BD COMP Out gain dB 5 5 Knee 2 Release ms 58 Threshold dB 11 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 1 6 A Dr BD COMPAND H Out gain dB 1 5 Width dB
183. 4 gt CH3 CH3 gt gt lt CH3 gt CH2 2 gt gt lt 2 gt gt ir IHITIRLIZE Aou fAGUTPUT You can specify Short names in the center column 1 and Long full names in the right column 2 When the Name Input Auto Copy check box 3 is on the first four characters of a newly entered Long name are automatically copied to the Short name On the other hand a newly entered Short name is automatically added to the beginning of the Long name You can reset all channel names to their default names by moving the cursor to the INI TIALIZE button then pressing ENTER 01V96 Owner s Manual Naming Input Channels 95 2 Move the cursor to a name you wish to change then press ENTER The Title Edit window appears enabling you to enter a name TITLE EDIT PRESS OK TO STORE 3 Edit the name move the cursor to the OK button then press ENTER The new name is now effective Tip The edited name is stored in the Input Patch library Sjouueu 1ndul N 01V96 Owner s Manual 96 Chapter 7 Input Channels 01V96 Owner s Manual Bus Outs 97 8 Bus Outs This chapter describes how to adjust the 01V96 s Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 parameters About Stereo Out The Stereo Out section receives Input Channel and Bus Out 1 8 signals mixes them into two channels processes
184. 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1811 12 13 14 15 16 _ 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 T 32 ZT IN MASTER M EFFECT 2 EQ ing the Input Signals The 01V96 s Input Channels feature 4 band full parametric EQ This section describes how to apply EQ to the signals before they are recorded to the tracks 1 Press the LAYER 1 16 button Input Channel Layer 1 16 is now available for control from the channel strip section 2 Pressthe SEL button for the Input Channel to which you want to apply EQ 3 Press the EQ button then the F1 button to display the EQ EQ Edit page The EQ Edit page enables you to adjust the EQ parameters for the currently selected chan nel Initial Data 5112 5113 8714 mamo 0 O 0 EQUALIZER EDIT LIBRARYA IN ATT OUT ATI Z 4 Make sure that the EQ ON button in the upper left corner is turned ON The EQ ON OFF button turns the currently selected Input Channel s EQ on or off If the button is off press the ENTER button to turn it on 5 While a musician plays the musical instrument adjust the EQ parameters To do so move the cursor to the parameters in the lower half of the page then rotate the Parameter wheel to change the values You can adjust the following parameters for the LOW L MID H MID and HIGH bands individually 01V96 Owner s Manual Ini
185. 5714 chi eur 0 oO OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY LIBRARY TITLE The Output Patch preset memory 0 contains the following settings Slot output channels 1 8 Bus Outs 1 8 Slot output channels 9 16 Bus Outs 1 8 ADAT OUT channels 1 8 Bus Outs 1 8 OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 Aux Outs 1 4 Effects Library The Effects library enables you to store and recall Effects processor 1 4 programs The library contains 44 preset programs and 84 user readable amp writable programs Note The Effects library is shared by Effects processors 1 4 However only Effects processors 1 2 enable the recall of Effect 19 Pitch and Effect 42 Freeze To store and recall settings to and from the library you must locate the corresponding Effects processor s page To access the Effects library press the DISPLAY ACCESS EFFECT button repeatedly until the library page for the desired Effects processor appears Each Effects processor features the library pages listed below Internal Effects Processor 1 Library FXI Lib page s Internal Effects Processor 2 Library 2 Lib page 2 Internal Effects Processor 3 Library FX3 Lib page Internal Effects Processor 4 Library FX4 Lib page 01V96 Owner s Manual 176 Chapter 16 Libraries EFFECT Initial Data m CH1 CH1 EFFECT NAME Reverb Hall 1 N ZOUT
186. 58 Output MUTE Group Enable U Out Mute Group U 10 Effect 3 Lib Recall 1 Fx3 Lib 1 Recall 59 Output MUTE Group Enable V Out Mute Group V 11 Effect 3 Lib Recall 1 Fx3 Lib 1 Recall 60 Output MUTE Group Enable W Out Mute Group W 12 Effect 3 Lib Recall No XX Fx3 LibXXX RCL 61 Output MUTE Group Enable X Out Mute Group X 13 Effect 4 Lib Recall 1 Fx4 Lib 1 Recall 62 PEAK HOLD On Off Peak Hold 14 Effect 4 Lib Recall 1 Fx4 Lib 1 Recall 63 OSCILLATOR On Off OSC ON OFF 15 Effect 4 Lib Recall No XX Fx4 LibXXX RCL 64 SOLO Enable SOLO ENABLE 16 Effect 1 Bypass On Off Bypass 65 Control Room Monitor MONO C R MONO 17 Effect 2 Bypass On Off Fx2 Bypass 66 Pan Surround Link PAN SURR LINK 18 Effect 3 Bypass On Off Fx3 Bypass 67 Channel Name ID Short CH ID Short 19 Effect 4 Bypass On Off Fx4 Bypass 68 Channel Copy Channel Copy 20 Channel Lib Recall 1 CH Lib 1 Recall 69 Channel Paste Channel Paste 21 Channel Lib Recall 1 CH Lib 1 Recall 70 Display Back Display Back 22 Channel Lib Recall No XX CH LibXXX Recall 71 Display Forward Display Forward 23 GATE Lib Recall 1 Gate Lib 1 RCL 72 UDEF KEYS BANK 1 UDEF KEYS BANK 1 24 GATE Lib Recall 1 Gate Lib 1 RCL 73 UDEF KEYS BANK 1 UDEF KEYS 1 25 GATE Lib Recall No XX Gate LibXXX RCL 74 UDEF KEYS BANK X UDEF KEYS BANK x 26 COMP Lib Recall 1 Comp Lib 1 RCL 75 MIDI NOTE No XX MIDI NOTE XXX 27 COMP Lib Recall 1 Comp
187. 7 F7 MMC RESPONSE rx FO 7F dd 01 F7 MIDI TIME CODE rx MMC command MMC response MTC full message 1 4 2 System Exclusive Message 1 4 2 1 Bulk Dump Command rx tx function FO 43 7E F7 BULK DUMP BULK DUMP DATA DATA rx tx FO 43 2n 7E F7 BULK DUMP BULK DUMP REQUEST REQUEST rx tx The following data types of bulk dump are used on the 01V96 Data name tx rx function m tx rx Scene Memory amp Request compressed data St tx rx Setup Memory amp Request tx rx Input patch library amp Request 0 tx rx Output patch library amp Request tx rx Channel library amp Request tx rx Gate library amp Request tx rx Compressor library amp Request Q tx rx Equalizer library amp Request E tx rx Effect library amp Request P tx rx Program change table amp Request dod tx rx Control change table amp Request vw tx rx User define layer amp Request tx rx User define key amp Request Ur tx rx User assignable layer amp Request tx rx Plug in Effect Card Data amp Request 1 4 2 2 PARAMTER CHANGE Command rx tx function FO 43 1n OD F7 RARAMETER rx tx 01V96 specific parameter change CHANGE FO 43 OD F7 PARAMETER rx tx 01V96 specific parameter change REQUEST FO 43 1n 7F F7 PARAMETER rx tx General purpose digital mixer CHANGE parameter change FO 43 7F F7 PARAMETER
188. 7 NO ASSIGN 118 NO ASSIGN 119 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL8 High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 1 EQ G HI MID H INPUT25 2 G HI MID H INPUT26 3 EQ G HI MID H INPUT27 4 G HI MID H INPUT28 5 EQ HI MID H INPUT29 6 EQ G HI MID H 0 7 EQ HI MID H INPUT31 8 EQ G HI MID H INPUT32 9 EQ G HI MID H ST IN1 10 EQ G HI MID H ST IN2 11 EQ G HI MID H ST IN3 12 EQ G HI MID H 5 4 13 NO ASSIGN 14 NO ASSIGN 15 NO ASSIGN 16 NO ASSIGN 17 NO ASSIGN 18 NO ASSIGN 19 NO ASSIGN 20 ASSIGN 21 NO ASSIGN 22 NO ASSIGN 23 ASSIGN 24 ASSIGN 25 NO ASSIGN 26 NO ASSIGN 27 5 28 5 29 ASSIGN 30 55 31 NO ASSIGN 32 NO ASSIGN 33 G HI MID L INPUT25 34 G HI MID L INPUT26 35 EQ G HI MID L INPUT27 36 EQ G HI MID L INPUT28 37 G HI MID L INPUT29 38 EQ G HI MID L INPUT30 39 EQ G HI MID L INPUT31 40 EQ G HI MID L INPUT32 41 G HI MID L ST IN1 42 G HI MID L ST IN2 43 EQ G HI MID L ST IN3 44 G HI MID L ST IN4 45 NO ASSIGN 46 NO ASSIGN 47 NO ASSIGN 48 NO ASSIGN 49 NO ASSIGN 50 NO ASSIGN 51 NO ASSIGN 52 NO ASSIGN 53 NO ASSIGN 54 NO ASSIGN 55 NO ASSIGN 56 NO ASSIGN 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Owner s Manual Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 301
189. 7 Release ms 192 Threshold dB 17 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 8 7 A Dr SN COMP Out gain dB 3 5 Knee 2 Release ms 12 Threshold dB 23 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 0 8 A Dr SN EXPAND Out gain dB 0 5 Knee 2 Release ms 151 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 11 9 A Dr SN COMPAND S Out gain dB 0 0 Width dB 10 Release ms 128 Threshold dB 20 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 2 10 A Dr Tom EXPAND Out gain dB 5 0 Knee 2 Release ms 749 Threshold dB 24 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 38 11 A Dr OverTop COMPAND S Out gain dB 3 5 Width dB 54 Release ms 842 Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 15 12 E B Finger COMP Out gain dB 4 5 Knee 2 Release ms 470 01V96 Owner s Manual 280 Appendix A Parameter Lists 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 01V96 Owner s Manual Title E B Slap Syn Bass 1 2 E Guitar A Guitar Strings1 Strings2 Type COMP COMP COMP COMP COMP COMP COMP COMP Parameter Value Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 6 Out gain dB 4 0 Knee hard Release ms 133 Threshold dB 10 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 9 Out gain dB 3 0 Knee hard Release ms 250 Threshold dB 9 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 17 Out gain dB
190. 7 AUX7 ADAT7 IN AD8 AD IN 8 AUX8 ADAT8 ADATS IN AD9 AD IN 9 InsertOut CH1 SL 01 Slot CH1 IN AD10 AD IN 10 InsertOut CH2 SL 02 Slot CH2 IN AD11 AD IN 11 InsertOut CH3 SL 03 Slot CH3 IN AD12 AD IN 12 InsertOut CH4 SL 04 Slot CH4 IN AD13 AD IN 13 InsertOut CH5 SL 05 Slot CH5 IN AD14 AD IN 14 InsertOut CH6 SL 06 Slot CH6 IN AD15 AD IN 15 InsertOut CH7 SL 07 Slot CH7 IN AD16 AD IN 16 InsertOut CH8 SL 08 Slot CH8 IN ADAT1 IN InsertOut CH9 SL 09 Slot CH9 IN ADAT2 ADAT2 IN ADAT2 IN InsertOut CH10 SL 10 Slot CH10 IN ADAT3 ADAT3 IN ADAT3 IN InsertOut CH11 SL 11 Slot CH11 IN InsertOut CH12 SL 12 Slot CH12 IN 5 ADATS 5 InsertOut CH13 SL 13 Slot CH13 IN ADAT6 ADAT6 IN ADAT6 IN InsertOut CH14 SL 14 Slot CH14 IN 7 7 ADAT7 IN InsertOut CH15 SL 15 Slot CH15 IN ADAT8 ADATS IN ADAT8 IN InsertOut CH16 SL 16 Slot CH16 IN SL 01 Slot CH1 IN Slot CH1 IN InsertOut CH17 1 AD IN 1 SL 02 Slot CH2 IN Slot CH2 IN InsertOut CH18 AD2 AD IN 2 SL 03 Slot CH3 IN Slot CH3 IN InsertOut CH19 AD IN 3 SL 04 Slot CH4 IN Slot IN InsertOut CH20 AD4 AD IN 4 51 05 Slot CH5 IN SL 05 Slot CH5 IN INS CH21 InsertOut CH21 AD5 AD IN 5 SL 06 Slot CH6 IN SL 06 Slot CH6 IN INS CH22 InsertOut CH22 AD6 AD IN 6 01V96 Owner s Manual 244 Appendix A Parameter Lists INPUT INSERT IN
191. 74 SURROUND DIV F ST IN2L 16 SURROUND LFE H ST INAR 75 SURROUND DIV F ST IN2R 17 NO ASSIGN 76 SURROUND DIV F ST IN3L 18 NO ASSIGN 77 SURROUND DIV F ST IN3R 19 NO ASSIGN 78 SURROUND DIV F ST INAL 20 NO ASSIGN 79 SURROUND DIV F ST INAR 21 NO ASSIGN 80 NO ASSIGN 22 NO ASSIGN 81 NO ASSIGN 23 ASSIGN 82 NO ASSIGN 24 ASSIGN 83 NO ASSIGN 25 55 84 NO ASSIGN 26 NO ASSIGN 85 NO ASSIGN 27 ASSIGN 86 NO ASSIGN 28 ASSIGN 87 ASSIGN 29 ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ ON INPUT25 31 NO ASSIGN 90 EQ ON INPUT26 32 NO ASSIGN 91 EQ INPUT27 33 SURROUND LFEL INPUT25 92 EQ ON INPUT28 34 SURROUND LFE L INPUT26 93 EQ 29 35 SURROUND LFEL INPUT27 94 EQ INPUT30 36 SURROUND LFEL INPUT28 95 EQ ON INPUT31 37 SURROUND LFEL INPUT29 102 EQ ON INPUT32 38 SURROUND LFEL 0 103 ST IN1 39 SURROUND LFEL INPUT31 104 EQ ON ST IN2 40 SURROUND LFEL INPUT32 105 EQ ON ST IN3 41 SURROUND LFEL ST INTL 106 ON ST IN4 42 SURROUND LFEL ST INTR 107 NO ASSIGN 43 SURROUND LFEL ST IN2L 108 NO ASSIGN 44 SURROUND LFEL ST IN2R 109 NO ASSIGN 45 SURROUND LFEL ST IN3L 110 NO ASSIGN 46 SURROUND LFEL ST IN3R 111 NO ASSIGN 47 SURROUND LFEL ST INAL 112 NO ASSIGN 48 SURROUND LFEL ST INAR 113 NO ASSIGN 49 NO ASSIGN 114 NO ASSIGN 50 ASSIGN 115 NO ASSIGN 51 ASSIG
192. 78 OUT R AUX1 8 amp Ty FX4 SEND 1 2 lt FX4 Return L R STEREO L STEREO L DA 8 FAS 4dBu STEREO OUT SEND an STEREO _STEREOR oto DA R r o SURROUNDL When 96kHz FX3 4 cannot be used SURROUNDR 01V96 Level Diagram Analog Digital Digital Analog Analog Digital PAD GAIN INSERT AD PHASE GATE INSERT EQ INSERT COMP DELAY ON LEVEL INSERT PAN 208 INSERT EQ INSERT comp MASTER MASTER INSERT DELAY QUIPUT Analog dBu dBFS Bit dBu Max Max Output DA p PPule24dBu ids COCHE Digital Clipping Level 420 4 _ 18dBu 20 10 Nominal Output 10 4A _ 3 1 4dBu _ 4dBu Nominal zB 4 Input bi egBul STEREO OUT 30 5 GAIN MIN OMNI OUT 10 6 MONITOR OUT 10 40 50 87 30 9 30 60 10 40 40 70 50 x 50 80 Nominal E 80 4 44 input 60dBu 60 GAIN 4 k 100 4 80 17 80 eS 90 19 90 120 4 20 4 100 214 100 130 110 110 sag gt 120 24 120 150 25 130 26 130 160 140 27 140 702 150 29 150 180 30 160 S 160 190 nm DSP Noise Floor 170 200 180 34 180 210 35 190 38 190 DdBu 0 775Vrms OdBFS Full Scale For details of products please contact
193. 8 2 29 Plug in effect card bulk dump format The second byte of the DATA NAME indicates the slot number 0 SLOT 1 1 SLOT 2 The data is not received if the Developer ID and Product ID are different than the card that is installed in the slot The data is not transmitted if a valid plug in effect card is not installed STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 COUNT LOW cl 01001100 4C U 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 C 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 01001110 4E N Ommmmmmm mh m 0 SLOT 1 Ommmmmmm ml BLOCK INFO Obbbbbbb bh current block number 0 total block number Obbbbbbb bl Ottttttt th total block number minimum number is 0 Ottttttt tl 00001111 01 Developer id High 00001111 01 Developer id Low 0000 0j Product id High 00003333 03 Product id Low DATA NAME DATA Oddddddd ds Plug in Effect card memory data of block bb 0ddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee Invert L 4 de 1 amp Ox7F EOX 11110111 7 End ofexclusive 2 8 2 30 Plug in effect card bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the slot number See above STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000
194. 87 CH32 8192 UNDO 256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer For reception by the 01V96 only the user area is valid 4 127 256 STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On nz0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH 0 ch data count ch 128 cl COUNT LOW cl 01001100 4c LU 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 01000111 47 Ommmmmmm mh 0 127 Library 1 128 Ommmmmmm ml 256 351 Channel current data BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number DATA NAME DATA Oddddddd ds GATE Library data of block bb 0ddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee Invert L 4 de 1 amp Ox7F EOX 11110111 7 End ofexclusive 2 8 2 20 Gate library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes ofthe DATA NAME indicate the bank number See above STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01001100 4c Ll 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43
195. 9 to 49996 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY HI 0 1 1 0 Delay high frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency DLY BAL 0 10096 Delay and reverb balance 096 all delay 10096 all reverb REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel 1 NOTEL DELAY L Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel 1 NOTER DELAY R NOTE FB 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB DLY 1 RH kJ RF 447 h J J d d Maximum value depends the tempo setting DELAY REV One input two output delay and reverb effects in series Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB GAIN 99 to 49996 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY HI 0 1 1 0 Delay high frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency 0 DLY BAL 0 10096 Delay and delayed reverb bal
196. 990 HIGHER SAMPLE RATE DATA TRANSFER FORMAT DITHER 2TR OUT Digital 2 Move the cursor to the output or channel to which you want to apply dith ering then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the value that matches the resolution of the receiving device Note the 01V96 You cannot apply dithering to outputs or channels that are set to Dithering is effective only when the resolution of the receiving device is lower than that of Tip To copy the currently selected setting to all channels double click the ENTER button The copy confirmation window is displayed 01V96 Owner s Manual Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates 75 Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates To operate the 01V96 at higher sampling frequencies 88 2 kHz or 96 kHz and transfer dig ital audio signals to and from connected external devices you must set the data transfer for mat in accordance with the sampling frequencies supported by the external devices 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Word Clock page appears 2 Select INT88 2k or INT96k as the wordclock source 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Format page appears 01075 Initial Data 815717 5112 5113 8114 CHI CHI 0 oO HIGHER SAMPLE RF TE
197. ACHINE CONTROL section cene memory 04 162 p 209 SCENE MEMORY section 21 Phantom Power pies 69 MIDI messages 205 Scenemu mlbers tet 162 ES s MIDI remote 203 Scene up down buttons 2 CHT SONOR 16 Vu ji Nuendo eerte 185 SEL buttons ss 16 17 ProTools 185 SELECTED CHANNEL section 20 PHASE eee 79 REMOTE 185 Selecting channels 32 PHASER Hosp DD 259 Target parameter 188 Selecting display pages 28 jack EL 15 131 TRACK ARMING section 209 Selecting fader modes 33 PHONES LEVEL HUET conto 2 TRANSPORT section 210 Setting levels sse 113 REMOTE button 19 185 Setup Ves esp seseuseves 37 Plug ins eee Res 198 Remote Layer Shadow memory 165 56 eiie 159 Nuendo 202 SHIFT LOCK button 30 POWER ON OFF switch 25 Pro tools 186 SIGNAL indicators 15 70 2 5 RESET BOTH 2 93 SINGLE 76 page REV4CHORUS ss 265 SHOP cede cio rct oos 25 42 71 212 Prefer2 page HH 228
198. ADDRESS Ottttttt tt Datatype ee Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Oppppppp pp Parameter no Channelno DATA Oddddddd data EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive For parameters with a data size of 2 or more data for that size will be transmitted 2 8 3 1 2 Parameter Change basic format Universal format STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS Ottttttt tt Datatype Oeeeeeee ee Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Oppppppp pp Parameter no cc Channelno DATA Oddddddd dd data EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive For parameters with a data size of 2 or more data for that size will be transmitted 2 8 3 1 3 Parameter request basic format STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00001101 OD 01996 ADDRESS Ottttttt tt Datatype Oeeeeeee ee Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Oppppppp pp Parameter no cc Channelno EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 1 4 Parameter request basic format
199. ADER H CHANNEL INPUT17 74 ON CHANNEL INPUT11 18 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT18 75 CHANNEL INPUT12 19 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT19 76 CHANNEL INPUT13 20 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT20 77 ON CHANNEL INPUT14 21 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT21 78 ON CHANNEL INPUT15 22 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT22 79 CHANNEL INPUT16 23 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT23 80 ON CHANNEL INPUT17 24 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT24 81 ON CHANNEL INPUT18 25 NO ASSIGN 82 ON CHANNEL INPUT19 26 NO ASSIGN 83 ON CHANNEL INPUT20 27 NO ASSIGN 84 ON CHANNEL INPUT21 28 NO ASSIGN 85 ON CHANNEL INPUT22 29 NO ASSIGN 86 ON CHANNEL INPUT23 30 FADER H MASTER STEREO 87 ON CHANNEL INPUT24 31 NO ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 32 NO ASSIGN 89 PAN CHANNEL INPUT1 33 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT1 90 PAN CHANNEL INPUT2 34 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT2 91 PAN CHANNEL INPUT3 35 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT3 92 PAN CHANNEL INPUT4 36 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT4 93 PAN CHANNEL INPUTS 37 FADERL CHANNEL 5 94 CHANNEL INPUT6 38 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT6 95 PAN CHANNEL 39 FADERL CHANNEL 102 CHANNEL INPUT8 40 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT8 103 PAN CHANNEL INPUT9 41 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT9 104 PAN CHANNEL INPUT10 42 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT10 105 PAN CHANNEL INPUT11 43 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT11 106 PAN CHANNEL INPUT12 44 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT12 107 PAN CHANNEL INPUT13 45 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT13 108 PAN CHANNEL INPUT14 46 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT14 109 PA
200. AE TIER IU atching AD AUDI 228 2TR digital outputs 125 E Scen inemoties 161 ADAT OUT connector 124 Digital I O section QA ea ERS 125 MIDI Control Section 25 Auto update function 165 rect ey Mire atiis Power section Edit indicators 162 Input Output eere 43 i cb n reli i SLOT section vr Fading Ree 166 channels RECALL button PROTECT button 164 Input patching 121 122 ete ge Recall safe function 168 129 Recall Confirmation preference 22 a a chi aby CO an te a Recall safe function 168 Scene numbers 162 Insert patching 127 RECORDING Shadow memory a 165 OMNI OUT connector 124 Sorti j Remote OFting xen 169 OMNI ttes 44 FRAMES Storing amp Recalling 163 Output patching 123 Using the S M P 164 PATCH button 43 Insert display mode 189 SINS UNE vceDe vie noryssage TA D n AN gt EN LOCATE TIME section 209 What is stored 161 Peak level 56 Machine control 185 208 ue memory 162 v M
201. ATA COUNT the number of bytes that follow this ending before the checksum 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 33 tt DATA TYPE mm mm DATA NUMBER cs CHECK SUM A unique header Model ID is used to determine whether the device is a 01V96 CHECK SUM is obtained by adding the bytes that follow BYTE COUNT LOW and end before CHECK SUM taking the binary compliment of this sum and then setting bit 7 to 0 CHECK SUM sum amp 0x7F Reception This message is received if Bulk RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS When a bulk dump is received it is immediately written into the specified memory When a bulk dump request is received a bulk dump is immediately transmit ted Transmission This message is transmitted on the Tx CH by key operations in the DI BULK DUMP screen A bulk dump is transmitted on the Rx CH in response to a bulk dump request The data area is handled by converting seven words of 8 bit data into eight words of 7 bit data Conversion from actual data into bulk data d 0 6 actual data b 0 7 bulk data b 0 0 for 1 0 1 lt 7 1 if d I amp 0x80 1 lt lt 6 b I 1 d I amp Ox7F Restoration from bulk data into actual data d 0 6 actual data b 0 7 bulk data or 1 0 lt 7 I b 0 lt lt 1 b I 1 0x80 amp b 0 2 8 2 1 Scene memory bulk dump format compress The 01V96 can transmit and receive
202. AUX8 NS ST L InsertOut ST L NS ST R InsertOut ST R 01V96 Owner s Manual Initial Input Patch Settings 245 Initial Input Patch Settings EFFECT IN PATCH 1 1 AUX1 1 2 NONE 2 1 AUX2 2 2 NONE 3 1 AUX3 3 2 NONE 4 1 AUX4 4 2 NONE CASCADE IN PATCH 8051 8052 8053 8054 8055 8056 8057 8058 AUX1 NONE AUX2 NONE AUX3 NONE AUX4 NONE AUX5 NONE AUX6 NONE AUX7 NONE AUX8 NONE ST L NONE STR NONE SOLO L NONE SOLO R NONE EFFECT TYPE EFFECT1 REVERB HALL EFFECT2 REVERB ROOM EFFECT3 REVERB STAGE EFFECT4 REVERB PLATE CHANNEL 1 AD1 2 AD2 3 AD3 4 AD4 5 AD5 6 AD6 7 AD7 8 AD8 9 AD9 10 AD10 11 AD11 12 AD12 13 AD13 14 AD14 15 AD15 16 AD16 17 ADAT1 18 ADAT2 19 ADAT3 20 ADAT4 21 5 22 ADAT6 23 ADAT7 24 ADAT8 25 S 1 26 5 2 27 5 3 28 5 4 29 5 5 30 5 6 31 5 7 32 5 8 STHL FX1 1 STHR FX1 2 STI2L FX2 1 STI2R FX2 2 STI3L FX3 1 STI3R FX3 2 STI4L FX4 1 STI4R FX4 2 mono input 01V96 Owner s Manual 246 Appendix A Parameter Lists CHANNEL NAME
203. AVEFORM parameter buttons then press ENTER You can select the following waveforms SINE 100Hz 100 Hz sinewave SINE IKHz 1 kHz sinewave SINE 10KHz 10 kHz sinewave PINK NOISE Pink noise BURST NOISE Burst noise 200 msec pink noise pulses at four second inter vals 4 Move the cursor to the parameter control in the LEVEL section then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the Oscillator level to minimum Note Sinewave and pink noise create unusually high sound pressure Oscillator levels that are too high can damage the speakers When you use the Oscillator be sure to set the level to minimum then raise the level gradually 5 Movethe cursor to the OSCILLATOR ON OFF button then press the ENTER or INC DEC buttons to turn on the Oscillator The Oscillator signal is now routed to the channels selected in the ASSIGN section 01V96 Owner s Manual Using the User Defined Keys 231 6 Move the cursor to the parameter control in the LEVEL section then rotate the Parameter wheel to raise the Oscillator level You can view the current Oscillator level on the LEVEL meter Using the User Defined Keys USER DEFINED You can assign any of more than 160 functions to the USER DEFINED KEYS 1 8 buttons 1 z If you assign to one
204. CH1 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 ODE u LE 09 GE GE Oo VARIABLE GLOBAL 9 18 11 12 15 14 15 16 POST OFF MST 184 17 18 19 28 21 22 23 24 1 2 25 26 27 28 29 31 32 3 4 UIEHT 1O fAUIEHT STI Note In Fixed mode the Aux On Off parameters for paired Input Channels are not linked to each other 01V96 Owner s Manual 116 Chapter 9 Aux Outs 5 If you switched to Variable mode in Step 3 the PRE POST buttons and Send level rotary controls enable you to adjust the signal source points and Send levels AURI Initial Data 15711 5112 STIS 5714 cca ai nu O 6 72 SAUX SEND CH1 z 3 4 5 6 r S MODE OO OD 1745 955 37 90 3778 00 00 468 post PRE 11 12 15 14 15 16 0000 Q 2528 57 60 00 00 14 50 3 05 85 00 st INS D 000 00 00 co 00 00 00 00 co 00 OO 0 0 O 0 O 0 00 CO co co 00 00 A Post Post Post pesr pon Fon pon Post Pos SEND A PAN A VIEWi_ 16 5 You can turn each Input Channel on or off for the currently selected Aux Send even in Vari able mode To do this move the cursor to the desired Send level control then press ENTER The rotary controls for Off channels are grayed out Tip In Variable mode Aux Send levels Aux On Off and Pre P
205. CHI gt oo INITIALIZE Channel IDs Short names and Long names are listed from left to right on the page You can specify Short names in the parameter boxes 1 in the center column and Long names in the parameter boxes 2 in the right column 2 Move the cursor to the desired parameter box then use the Parameter wheel or the INC DEC buttons to select a port for which you want to change the name 3 Press ENTER The Title Edit window appears which enables you to edit the name 4 Edit the name move the cursor to the OK button then press ENTER The new name is now effective suonounj edited name is stored in the Input Patch library 01V96 Owner s Manual 226 Chapter 19 Other Functions When the Name Input Auto Copy check box 3 is on the first four characters of a newly entered Long name are automatically copied to the Short name On the other hand a newly entered Short name is automatically added to the beginning of the Long name You can reset all port names to their default names by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button then pressing ENTER Changing the Output Channel Names change output channel names press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Out Name page appears PRTCH Initial Data 571257135714 CH1 CHI mamo 0 O 0 OUTPUT CHANNEL NAME EJ Nispa Input Au
206. CHi Sz A E MASTER EFFECT Hr Master page This section displays the Output Channel Aux Out 1 8 Bus Out 1 8 Stereo Out levels altogether METER Initial Data 571257135714 chi enr oO POSITION GR DD DD oo 1234 56768 Effect page This page displays the internal effects processor 1 4 input and output levels altogether 1 2 3 4 LL EFFECT 1 2 s 4 EFFECT OUT 01V96 Owner s Manual 36 Chapter 3 Operating Basics 4 Stereo page This page displays the Stereo Out output level METER Initial Data CH1 CH1 QO k 26 32 8 2 8 E POSITION If you selected the 1 32 page or the Master page use MASTER MODE parameter to select one of the following three metering signal types The amount of gain reduction for the gate only for CH1 32 COMP The amount of gain reduction for the compressor 3EEVEL es Input Channel input level or Output Channel output level Tip These pages also allow you to change the metering position using the POSITION param eter This parameter setting operates in unison with the Meter Position page setting To activate the Peak Hold function move the cursor to the PEAK HOLD but ton then press ENTER The PEAK HOLD button turns on and the pea
207. Channel signals to the Stereo Bus 3 D button This button routes Input Channel signals to the specified output connectors and chan nels directly 01V96 Owner s Manual Initial Track Recording 53 2 Move the cursor to the S button for the Input Channel to which the musical instrument or microphone is connected then press ENTER to turn it off By default each Input Channel is routed to the Stereo Bus which enables you to monitor the signals from the MONITOR OUT connectors and the PHONES jack However during multitrack recording you may usually want to monitor the signals returned from the connected digital MTR rather than moni toring the Input Channel signals To do so you must turn off the S button so that the par ticular Input Channel signals will not be routed to the Stereo Bus CH1 16 RC Tip The S buttons for paired channels are linked 3 Toroute Input Channel signals to the connected digital MTR via Buses 1 8 use the 1 8 buttons to specify a Bus Out as the destination for each of the Input Channels to which the musical instruments and microphone are con nected In this example Input Channels 1 4 are assigned to Buses 1 and 2 and Input Channels 5 8 are assigned to Buses 3 and 4 EINPUT HIS 16 ROUTING 2 3 5 98 aa 8 Stat BH ag Bie gg 5 Ba 30 ala nem 4 Pressthe PAN ROUTING button repeatedly to dis
208. Channels 1 32 INPUT PATCH Each of these monaural Input Channels features a phase effect gate compressor attenua tor and EQ for signal processing The following diagram illustrates the Input Channel 1 32 signal flow INPUT 1 32 STEREOL STEREO R Sjouueu 1ndul N 259245524 8855 mamaamam An lt lt Gain Reduction SOLO METER Out Meter METER 19 22 5 METER INSERT INSERT j i 99 90 OR i ON wall PAN o o 33 1 3 3 Keyin s 12ch Group 1 12 13 24 AUX 1 8 3 Z LFE TH Gain Reduction Out Meter METER x PRE POST AUX o 9 1 595 1 7 Self or Stereo Link DIRECT OUT 1 32 Input Channels 1 32 feature the following parameters Phase This section switches the phase of input signals GATE This dynamics processor can be used as a gate or for ducking COMP Compressor This dynamics processor can be used as compressor expander or limiter The compressor can be pre EQ pre fader or post fader AIT Attenuator This section enables you to attenuate or amplify the level of signals that will be input to the EQ The attenuator enables you to prevent post EQ signals from clipping and to c
209. Chapter 4 Connections and Setup The source select button indicators are explained below 4 a gt lt A usable wordclock signal is present at this input and it is in sync with the current 01V96 internal clock No wordclock signal is present at this input A usable wordclock signal is present at this input but it is out of sync with the current 01V96 internal clock This input is the currently selected wordclock source This input was selected as the wordclock source but no usable signal was received Either this input is not receiving wordclock or else it cannot be used with the cur rently installed I O card Tip The FS box displays the sampling frequency at which the 01 96 is currently operating The SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any installed I O card TheIN and OUT columns indicate the number of input and output channels available for each installed I O card Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a source then press ENTER The following are possible wordclock sources These buttons select the inputs from the digital I O card installed in the slot as the wordclock source Inputs are selected in pairs odd and even numbers in this order The SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any installed I O card The num ber of pairs depends on the type of I O card installed cte These buttons select the inputs from the IN connector on
210. Creates a peak around 80 Hz producing a tight stiff sound Snare Drum 1 Emphasizes snappy and rimshot sounds Snare Drum 2 Emphasizes various ranges for that classic rock snare drum sound Tom tom 1 Emphasizes the attack of tom toms and creates a long leathery decay Cymbal Emphasizes the attack of crash cymbals extending the sparkling decay High Hat Use on a tight high hat emphasizing the mid to high range Percussion Emphasizes attack and adds clarity to the high range of instruments such as shakers cabasas and congas E Bass 1 Produces a tight electric bass sound by cutting very low frequencies E Bass 2 Unlike preset 9 this preset emphasizes the low range of an electric bass Syn Bass 1 Use on a synth bass with emphasized low range Syn Bass 2 Emphasizes the attack that is peculiar to synth bass Piano 1 Makes pianos sound brighter Piano 2 Used in conjunction with a compressor this preset emphasizes the attack and low range of pianos E G Clean Use for line level recording of an electric or semi acoustic guitar to get a slightly harder sound E G Crunch 1 Adjusts the tonal quality of a slightly distorted guitar sound E G Crunch 2 A variation on preset 16 E Dist 1 Makes a heavily distorted guitar sound clearer E G Dist 2 A variation on preset 18 A G Stroke 1 Emphasizes the bright tones of acoustic guitars A G Stroke 2 A variation on preset 20 You can also use it wit
211. D number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer 01V96 Patch data Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no End of exclusive Setup memory System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer 01V96 Setup data Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no data EOX 2 8 3 7 Parameter request STATUS 11110000 ID No 01000011 SUB STATUS 0011 GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID 00001101 ADDRESS 00000011 0eeeeeee Oppppppp 11110111 FO 43 3n 3E 0D 03 ee 7 2 8 3 8 Parameter change STATUS 11110000 ID No 01000011 SUB STATUS 0001nnnn GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID 00001101 ADDRESS 00000100 11110111 2 8 3 9 Parameter request STATUS 11110000 ID No 01000011 SUB STATUS 0011 GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID 00001101 ADDRESS 00000100 0eeeeeee 0ccccccc EOX 11110111 2 8 3 10 Parameter change Reception FO 43 1n 3E 0 04 7 FO 43 3n 3E 0 04 7 11110111 F7 End of exclusive Setup memory System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA 0 15 Device number MIDI Ch
212. EATE GROUP GROUP 01V96 Owner s Manual USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments 243 USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments BANK A BANK B BANK C BANK D BANK E BANK F BANK G BANK H TITLE Scene Recall aoe DAW 1 DAW 2 22 Assign 1 Scene 1 Recall UDEF BANK D UDEF BANK C jap MIDI PGM 1 Display Back No Assign eere Nt Jom eu uem wee 3 3 IN Fader paw gang PAW AUTO Machine RTZ mipi pam 3 Channel No Assign Group B READ Copy 4 Scene 4 Recall DAW BANK CUT Machine REC MIDI PGM 4 22 No Assign 5 Scene 5 Recall er MIDI PGM 5 No Assign No Assign 6 Scene 6 Recall aioe DAW SCRUB T 4 MIDI PGM 6 No Assign No Assign 7 Scene 7 Recall 2 DAW STOP 2d RUTO 5 MIDI 7 No Assign Assign 8 Scene 8 Recall DAW PLAY PAWAWO Machine MIDI PGM 8 No Assign No Assign Group L OFF Input Patch Parameters INPUT INSERT IN EFFECT IN CASCADE Port ID Description Port ID Description Port ID Description Port ID Description _ NONE _ NONE 1 AD IN 1 ADAT1 AD2 AD IN 2 ADAT2 ADAT2 IN AD3 AD IN 3 ADAT3 ADAT3 IN AD4 AD IN 4 AUX4 ADAT4 ADAT4 IN AD5 AD IN 5 AUX5 ADAT5 ADATS AD6 AD IN 6 AUX6 ADAT6 ADAT6 IN AD7 AD IN
213. ER to confirm the change Tip Youcan store the Output Patch settings to the Output Patch library Refer to Chapter 16 for more information 01V96 Owner s Manual Patching Direct Outs 125 Patching the 2TR Digital Outputs Follow the steps below to change the signal path patched to the 2 OUT DIGITAL 1 amp 2 connectors 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch 2TR Out page appears PRTCH Initial Data 5 STI2 5113 ST 4 CHi CHi 9 2TR OUT DIGITAL PATCH 2TR OUT Dis L STEREO ZTR OUT DIGITRL ESIADIRECT OUTA 278 OUT A OUT NAME OUT LIE Signals assigned on the Out Patch page can also be assigned on this page 2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the patching 3 Press ENTER to confirm the change Patching Direct Outs Input Channel 1 32 signals can be directly patched to any outputs or slot outputs as well as Bus Out 1 8 and Stereo Out This patching is convenient when you wish to record each Input Channel signal to an individual track on a connected recorder 1 Pressthe DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Direct Out page appears PRTCH Initial Data BSA 5112 5713 5114 THI 0 HH amo 0 02 The parameters on this page described below D 1 32 These boxes indicate the Direct Out destination
214. End of exclusive 2 8 3 29 Parameter change Key remote Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received the same processing that is executed when the key speci fied by Address is pressed released Transmission If Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message is retransmitted without change STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00001101 OD 01 96 ADDRESS 00100000 20 Key remote Okkkkkkk kk Key address H Okkkkkkk kk Key address M Okkkkkkk kk Key address L DATA Oppppppp pp Release 0 Press 1 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 30 Parameter change Remote Meter When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote meter the specified meter information is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds When you want to transmit meter information continuously a Request must be trans mitted continuously within every 10 seconds Reception This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON Transmission When transmission has been enabled by a Request the parameter specified by Address will be transmitted on the Rx CH channel at 50 msec intervals for a duration of 10 seconds Transmission will be d
215. F and please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference Utilize power outlets that are on different branch circuit breaker or fuse circuits or install AC line filter s In the case of radio or TV interference relocate reorient the antenna If the antenna lead in is 300 ohm ribbon lead change the lead in to coaxial type cable If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product If you can not locate the appropriate retailer please contact Yamaha Corporation of America Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park CA 90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries ADVARSEL Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig h ndtering Udskiftning kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type Lev r det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren WARNING THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE GREEN AND YELLOW EARTH BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Anvand samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured m
216. FADER H MASTER AUX4 25 FADERH MASTER AUX5 26 FADERH MASTER AUX6 27 FADERH MASTER AUX7 28 FADERH MASTER AUX8 29 NO ASSIGN 30 ON MASTER STEREO 31 NO ASSIGN 32 NO ASSIGN 33 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT25 34 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT26 35 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT27 36 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT28 37 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT29 38 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT30 39 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT31 40 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT32 41 FADER L CHANNEL ST IN1 42 FADER L CHANNEL ST IN2 43 FADER L CHANNEL ST IN3 44 FADER L CHANNEL ST IN4 45 FADER L MASTER BUS1 46 FADER L MASTER BUS2 47 FADER L MASTER BUS3 48 FADER L MASTER BUS4 49 FADER L MASTER BUS5 50 FADER L MASTER BUS6 51 FADER L MASTER BUS7 52 FADER L MASTER BUS8 53 FADER L MASTER AUX1 54 FADER L MASTER AUX2 55 FADER L MASTER AUX3 56 FADER L MASTER AUX4 57 FADER L MASTER AUX5 58 FADER L MASTER AUX6 01V96 Owner s Manual Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 295 CHANNEL3 High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 1 EQ G LOW H INPUT1 2 G LOW H INPUT2 3 EQ GLOW H INPUT3 4 G LOW H INPUT4 5 EQ G LOW H INPUTS 6 EQ G LOW H INPUT6 7 EQ G LOW H 8 EQ G LOW H INPUT8 9 EQ G LOW H INPUT9 10 EQ G LOW H INPUT10 11 EQ G LOW H INPUT11 12
217. H This button toggles between Latch and Unlatch for ON but ton operation LEARN eerie When you turn on this button MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port are assigned to the DATA parameter boxes DATA parameter boxes These boxes display the type of MIDI messages in hexadecimal or alphabets assigned to the ON button 6 FADER section This section displays the type of MIDI messages in hexadecimal or alphabet assigned to the faders for the currently selected channels RM01 RM16 6 Movethe cursor to the desired bank button BANK parameter buttons 1 4 then press ENTER 7 Press the LAYER REMOTE button to select Remote layer You can now use the MIDI Remote function 8 Use the faders and ON buttons to control the MIDI device Assigning MIDI Messages to Channel Controls You can quickly use the MIDI Remote function if you use the factory presets in the banks However you can also assign the desired MIDI messages to the faders or ON buttons This section describes how to assign MIDI messages to the channel controls using the example of assigning Hold On Off messages Control Change 64 Values 127 amp 0 to the Channel 1 ON button 1 Connect the 01V96 s MIDI IN port to the MIDI OUT port of a MIDI keyboard to which a Hold On Off controllable foot switch is connected Enable the MIDI Remote function on the 01V96 MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI
218. H matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received the patch link data of the specified scene will be modified Transmission In response to a request a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the Rx CH If Parameter change ECHO is ON this message will be retransmitted without change STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODELID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010100 14 Function call 0010 2f link Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low DATA Oiiiiiii ih inpatch Oiiiiiii il 00000000 oh outpatch 00000000 ol EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive function number SCENE LIB LINK 0x20 0 99 0 response only 2 8 3 23 Parameter request Function call link Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the Rx CH Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011 n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital
219. HIGH INPUT19 114 Q HIGH INPUT20 115 EQ Q HIGH INPUT21 116 EQ Q HIGH INPUT22 117 EQ Q HIGH INPUT23 118 EQ Q HIGH INPUT24 119 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Owner s Manual 302 Appendix C MIDI CHANNEL10 High Mid Low High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 59 NO ASSIGN 1 EQ G HIGH H INPUT25 60 NO ASSIGN 2 EQ G HIGH H INPUT26 61 NO ASSIGN 3 EQ G HIGH H INPUT27 62 NO ASSIGN 4 EQ G HIGH H INPUT28 63 NO ASSIGN 5 EQ G HIGH H INPUT29 64 INPUT25 6 EQ G HIGH H INPUT30 65 EQ F HIGH INPUT26 7 EQ G HIGH H INPUT31 66 EQ F HIGH INPUT27 8 EQ G HIGH H INPUT32 67 EQ F HIGH INPUT28 9 G HIGH H 5 1 68 EQ F HIGH INPUT29 10 EQ G HIGH H ST IN2 69 EQ F HIGH INPUT30 11 EQ G HIGH H ST IN3 70 EQ F HIGH INPUT31 12 EQ G HIGH H 5 4 71 INPUT32 13 NO ASSIGN 72 EQ F HIGH ST IN1 14 NO ASSIGN 73 EQ F HIGH ST IN2 15 NO ASSIGN 74 EQ F HIGH ST IN3 16 NO ASSIGN 75 EQ F HIGH 5 4 17 NO ASSIGN 76 NO ASSIGN 18 NO ASSIGN 77 NO ASSIGN 19 NO ASSIGN 78 NO ASSIGN 20 ASSIGN 79 N
220. Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency MONO DELAY One input two output basic repeat delay Parameter DELAY 0 0 2730 0 ms Description Delay time FB GAIN 99 to 49996 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY 1 FR setting STEREO DELAY ES BIS F h ddd h d d d value depends on tempo Two input two output basic stereo delay Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time FB GL 99 to 49996 Left channel feedback plus values for normal phase feed back minus values for reverse phase feedback FB GR 99 to 99 Right channel feedback plus values for normal phase feed back minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC
221. I Note On velocity SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY 1 Decay speed OFFSET 0 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency offset ERANG n ERE 5 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Number of phase shift stages LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 412 0 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH 12 0 to 412 0 dB High shelving filter gain 1 01V96 Owner s Manual 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s fs 88 2 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s 45 96 kHz 265 Effects Parameters REV CHORUS One input two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV CHO 0 100 ET and chorus balance 096 all reverb 10096 all cho FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0 100 Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0 10096 Pitch modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determin
222. INS BUS6 InsertOut BUS6 INS 056 InsertOut BUS6 INS BUS7 InsertOut BUS7 INS BUS7 InsertOut BUS7 INS BUS8 InsertOut BUS8 INS BUS8 InsertOut BUS8 INS InsertOut AUX1 INS AUXT InsertOut AUXT INS AUX2 InsertOut AUX2 INS AUX2 InsertOut AUX2 INS AUX3 InsertOut AUX3 INS AUX3 InsertOut AUX3 INS AUX4 InsertOut AUX4 INSAUX4 InsertOut AUX4 INS AUX5 InsertOut AUX5 INS 5 InsertOut AUX5 INS AUX6 InsertOut AUX6 INS AUX6 InsertOut AUX6 INS AUX7 InsertOut AUX7 INS AUX7 InsertOut AUX7 INS AUX8 InsertOut AUX8 INS AUX8 InsertOut AUX8 INS ST L InsertOut STL INS ST L InsertOut ST L INS ST R InsertOut STR INS ST R InsertOut ST R CAS BUS1 Cascade Out 1 CAS BUS1 Cascade Out 1 CAS BUS2 Cascade Out Bus2 CAS BUS2 Cascade Out Bus2 CAS BUS3 Cascade Out Bus3 CAS BUS3 Cascade Out Bus3 CAS 8054 Cascade Out 4 CAS 054 Cascade Out Bus4 CAS BUSS Cascade Out 5 CAS 055 Cascade Out Bus5 CAS 056 Cascade Out CAS BUS6 Cascade Out Bus6 CAS 8057 Cascade Out Bus7 CAS BUS7 Cascade Out 7 CAS BUS8 Cascade Out Bus8 CAS 058 Cascade Out Bus8 CAS AUXI Cascade Out Aux1 CAS AUXI Cascade Out Aux1 CAS 2 Cascade Out Aux2 CAS AUX2 Cascade Out Aux2 CAS AUX3 Cascade Out Aux3 CAS AUX3 Cascade Out Aux3 CAS AUXA Cascade Out Aux4 CAS AUXA Cascade Out Aux4 CAS 5 Cascade Out Aux5 CAS 5 Cascade Out Aux5 CAS 6 Cascade Out Aux6
223. INS CH19 InsertOut CH19 Slot CH13 IN InsertOut CH19 INS CH20 InsertOut CH20 Slot CH14 IN InsertOut CH20 INS CH21 InsertOut CH21 Slot CH15 IN InsertOut CH21 INS CH22 InsertOut CH22 Slot CH16 IN InsertOut CH22 INS 23 InsertOut CH23 Effect OUT 1 InsertOut CH23 INS 24 InsertOut CH24 Effect1 OUT 2 InsertOut CH24 INS CH25 InsertOut CH25 Effect2 OUT 1 InsertOut CH25 INS CH26 InsertOut CH26 Effect2 OUT 2 InsertOut CH26 INS CH27 InsertOut CH27 Effect3 OUT 1 InsertOut CH27 INS CH28 InsertOut CH28 Effect3 OUT 2 InsertOut CH28 INS CH29 InsertOut CH29 FX4 1 Effect4 OUT 1 INS CH29 InsertOut CH29 INS CH30 InsertOut CH30 FX4 2 4 OUT 2 INS CH30 InsertOut CH30 INS CH31 InsertOut CH31 2TD L 2TR IN Dig L INS CH31 InsertOut CH31 INS CH32 InsertOut CH32 2TD R 2TR IN Dig R INS CH32 InsertOut CH32 01V96 Owner s Manual 248 Appendix A Parameter Lists SLOT ADAT OMNI INSERT IN DIRECT OUT 2TR OUT Digital Source Description Source Description Source Description Source Description INS BUS1 j InsertOut BUST INS BUST InsertOut BUST INS BUS2 InsertOut BUS2 INS BUS2 InsertOut BUS2 INS BUS3 InsertOut BUS3 INS BUS3 InsertOut BUS3 INS BUS4 InsertOut BUSA INS BUS4 InsertOut BUSA INS BUSS InsertOut BUS5 INS BUS5 InsertOut BUS5
224. IXER 15 FADER BE 07 FAD END lt ON BF 40 SW END s RM16 CH16 VST MIXER 16 FADER BF 07 FAD END oa ES 01V96 Owner s Manual 254 Appendix A Parameter Lists Effects Parameters REVERB HALL REVERB ROOM REVERB STAGE REVERB PLATE One input two output hall room stage and plate reverb simulations all with gates Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio LO RATIO 0 1 2 4 Low frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spread DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density E R DLY 0 0 100 0 ms Delay between early reflections and reverb Balance of early reflections and reverb 05100 0 all ABA 100 all early reflections HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency GATE LVL OFF 60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in ATTACK 0 120 ms Gate opening speed HOLD 1 Gate open time DECAY 2 Gate closing speed 1 0 02 ms 2 13 s fs 44 1 kHz 0 02 ms 1 96 s fs 48 kHz 0 01 ms 1 06 s fs 88 2 kHz 0 01 ms 981 ms fs 96 kHz 2 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s fs 88 2 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s
225. Input Channel Levels and Panning the Channels Input Channels 1 32 1 Press the LAYER 1 16 or 17 32 button to select a layer 2 Pressthe SEL button of the channel for which you want to adjust the input level and or pan settings Use the faders to set the Input Channel levels 4 Rotate the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN control to adjust the pan settings When you rotate the PAN control the Pan Route Pan page is displayed automatically TOL PRN ROUTE Initial Data 571257135714 CHI CHI IO 0 oO f OO OOO Lea CENT R CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER L53 R63 7 1 12 13 14 15 16 CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER R53 17 18 13 28 21 22 23 24 SL 3R OO ODIO OO qt CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER LB3 R53 ST IN Channels 1 4 1 Use the ST IN ST IN button to select the desired ST IN Channels The indicators next to the ST IN button display the ST IN Channels currently selected for control by the ST IN section 2 Press the SEL button for the channel for which you want to adjust the level and or pan settings 3 Rotate the level control of the desired channel to set the level You can always view the current channel level at the top of the display 115711 5712 5713 5714 GOO 4 Rotate the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN control to adjust the pan setting The pan setting can be applied to either ST IN channel L
226. Input Fader Group Enable H IN Fader Group H 95 Track Arming 7 Track Arming 7 46 Input MUTE Group Enable IN Mute Group 96 Track Arming 8 Track Arming 8 01V96 Owner s Manual 242 Appendix A Parameter Lists Function Display Function Display 97 Track Arming 9 Track Arming 9 148 DAW SUSPEND GROUP DAW SUSPEND GRP 98 Track Arming 10 Track Arming 10 149 DAW WINDOW TRANSPORT DAW WIN TRANS 99 Track Arming 11 Track Arming 11 PORT 100 Track Arming 12 Track Arming 12 150 DAW WINDOW INSERT DAW WIN INSERT 101 Track Arming 13 Track Arming 13 151 DAW WINDOW MIX EDIT DAW WIN MIX EDIT 102 Track Arming 14 Track Arming 14 152 DAW WINDOW MEM LOC DAW WIN 103 Track Arming 15 Track Arming 15 104 Track Arming 16 Track Arming 16 153 DAW WINDOW STATUS DAW WIN STATUS 105 Track Arming 17 Track Arming 17 134 DAW Shortcut UNDO DAWUNDO 106 Track Arming 18 Track Arming 18 153 DAW Shortcut SAVE DAW SAVE 107 Track Arming 19 Track Arming 19 156 DAW Shortcut EDIT MODE DAW EDIT MODE 108 Track Arming 20 Track Arming 20 157 DAW Shortcut EDIT TOOL DAW EDIT TOOL 109 Track Arming 21 Track Arming 21 158 DAW Shortcut SHIFT ADD DAW SHIFT ADD 110 Track Arming 22 Track Arming 22 159 DAW Sh
227. KING G 0 5 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 42 0 dB 22 A G Arpeg 1 F 224 Hz 1 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 6 70 kHz Q 4 5 4 5 0 12 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 0 0 dB 5 5 dB 0 0 dB 4 0 dB 23 A G Arpeg 2 F 180 Hz 355 Hz 4 00 kHz 4 25 kHz Q 7 4 5 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G 2 0 dB 1 0 dB 1 5 dB 3 0 dB 24 Brass Sec F 90 Hz 850 Hz 2 12 kHz 4 50 kHz Q 2 8 2 0 7 7 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G 0 5 dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 3 5 dB 25 Male Vocal 1 F 190 Hz 1 00 kHz 2 00 kHz 6 70 kHz Q 0 11 4 5 0 56 0 11 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 2 0 dB 5 0 dB 2 5 dB 4 0 dB 26 Male Vocal 2 F 170 Hz 236 Hz 2 65 kHz 6 70 kHz Q 0 11 10 5 6 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G 1 0 1 0 dB 1 5 dB 2 0 27 1 118 Hz 400 Hz 2 65 kHz 6 00 kHz Q 0 18 0 45 0 56 0 14 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 7 0 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 2 5 dB 28 Female Vo 2 F 112 Hz 335 Hz 2 00 kHz 6 70 kHz Q 0 16 0 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G 2 0 dB 1 0 dB 1 5 dB 3 0 dB 29 Chorus amp Harmo F 90 Hz 850 Hz 2 12 kHz 4 50 kHz Q 2 8 2 0 7 7 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 0 5 dB 0 0 dB 3 0 dB 6 5 dB 30 Total EQ 1 F 95 Hz 950 Hz 2 12 kHz 16 0 kHz Q 7 2 2 5 6 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 4 0 dB 1 5 dB 2 0 dB 6 0 dB 31 Total EQ 2 F 95 Hz 750 Hz 1 80 kHz 18 0 kHz Q 7 2 8 5 6 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 1 5 dB 0 5 dB 2 0 dB 4 0 dB 32 Total EQ 3 F 67 Hz 850 Hz 1 90 kHz 15 0 kHz Q
228. L CD STORE button This button enables you to store the current mix settings See page 161 for more informa tion on Scene Memories 2 Scene Up A Down Y buttons These buttons select a Scene to store or recall Pressing the Scene Up button increments the selection pressing the Scene Down V button decrements the selection Holding down either key increments or decrements the selection continuously 8 RECALL button This button recalls the Scene memory selected by the Scene Up Down V buttons USER DEFINED KEYS Section rc USER DEFINED gt c T 72 1148 buttons You can assign any of the 167 functions to these User Defined buttons 01V96 Owner s Manual Joued S DLNS IN 22 Chapter 2 Control Surface amp Rear Panel Data Entry Section D Parameter wheel This control adjusts the parameter values shown on the display Turning it clockwise increases the value turning it counterclockwise decreases the value This wheel also enables you to scroll a displayed list and select a character for entry see page 30 2 ENTER button This button activates a selected highlighted button on the display and confirms the edited parameter values DEC amp INC buttons These buttons increment or
229. L ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010000 10 Function call O100ffff 4f title Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low EOX 11110111 rF7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 16 Parameter change Function call response title Transmission Ifthe title is modified by a parameter change received from Studio Manager the result of execution will be transmitted as the following parameter change STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 01010000 50 Function call O100ffff 4f title Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low DATA ee result HH ee result HL ee result LH ee result LL EOX 11110111 rF7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 17 Parameter change Function call Scene Library Clear Reception When this is received the specified memory library will be cleared If this is re ceived from Studio Manager or Cascade Link the operation will be executed and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a parameter response Transmission When a memory or library is cleared on the 01V96 this message will be trans mitted with the device number set to Tx CH STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number
230. LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV FLG 0 10096 12 and flange balance 0 all reverb 100 all FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time CN On WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ AP RUM h h d h d 4 J REV gt FLANGE One input two output reverb and flanger effects in series Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 5 Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV BAL 0 100 PE hrs reverb balance 096 all flanged reverb FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time mcum seem S hase WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 AP RU h h 4 h J J 01V96 Owner s Manual 4 J 267 Effects Parameters REV SYMPHO One input two output reverb and s
231. Lib 1 RCL 76 MIDI Program change No XX MIDI PGM XXX 28 COMP Lib Recall No XX Comp LibXXX RCL 77 MIDI Control Change No XX MIDI CC XXX 29 EQ Lib Recall 1 EQ Lib 1 Recall 78 Machine REC Machine REC 30 EQ Lib Recall 1 EQ Lib 1 Recall 79 Machine PLAY Machine PLAY 31 Lib Recall No XX EQ LibXXX Recall 80 Machine STOP Machine STOP 32 Input Patch Lib Recall 1 IN Patch Lib 1 81 Machine FF Machine FF 33 Input Patch Lib Recall 1 IN Patch Lib 1 82 Machine REW Machine REW 34 Input Patch Lib Recall No XX IN Patch LibXX 83 Machine SHUTTLE Machine SHUTTLE 35 Output Patch Lib Recall 1 Out Patch Lib 1 84 Machine SCRUB Machine SCRUB 36 Output Patch Lib Recall 1 Out Patch Lib 1 85 Machine LOCATE X Machine LOCATE X 37 Patch Lib Recall Out Patch LibXX 86 Machine Set LOCATE X Machine Capture X 87 Machine RTZ Machine RTZ 38 Input Fader Group Enable A IN Fader Group A 88 Machine Set RTZ Machine Set RTZ 39 Input Fader Group Enable B IN Fader Group B 89 Track Arming 1 Track Arming 1 40 Input Fader Group Enable C IN Fader Group C 90 Track Arming 2 Track Arming 2 41 Input Fader Group Enable D IN Fader Group D 91 Track Arming 3 Track Arming 3 42 Input Fader Group Enable E IN Fader Group E 92 Track Arming 4 Track Arming 4 43 Input Fader Group Enable F IN Fader Group F 93 Track Arming 5 Track Arming 5 44 Input Fader Group EnableG IN Fader Group G 94 Track Arming 6 Track Arming 6 45
232. N 116 55 52 NO ASSIGN 117 55 53 NO ASSIGN 118 NO ASSIGN 54 NO ASSIGN 119 NO ASSIGN 55 NO ASSIGN 56 NO ASSIGN 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Owner s Manual Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 307 CHANNEL15 High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 1 SURROUND LR INPUT1 2 SURROUND LR INPUT2 3 SURROUND LR INPUT3 4 SURROUND LR INPUT4 5 SURROUND LR INPUTS 6 SURROUND LR INPUT6 7 SURROUND LR 8 SURROUND LR INPUT8 9 SURROUND INPUT9 10 SURROUND LR INPUT10 11 SURROUND LR INPUT11 12 SURROUND LR INPUT12 13 SURROUND LR INPUT13 14 SURROUND LR INPUT14 15 SURROUND INPUT15 16 SURROUND LR INPUT16 17 SURROUND LR INPUT17 18 SURROUND LR INPUT18 19 SURROUND LR INPUT19 20 SURROUND LR INPUT20 21 SURROUND INPUT21 22 SURROUND LR INPUT22 23 SURROUND LR INPUT23 24 SURROUND LR INPUT24 25 ASSIGN 26 ASSIGN 27 5 28 5 29 ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 31 NO ASSIGN 32 NO ASSIGN 33 SURROUND FR INPUT1 34 SURROUND FR INPUT2 35 SURROUND FR INPUT3 36 SURROUND FR INPUT4 37 SURROUND FR INPUTS 38 SURROUND FR INPUT6 39 SURROUND FR 40 SURROUND INPUT8 41 SURROUND FR INPU
233. N CHANNEL INPUT15 47 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT15 110 PAN CHANNEL INPUT16 48 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT16 111 PAN CHANNEL INPUT17 49 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT17 112 PAN CHANNEL INPUT18 50 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT18 113 PAN CHANNEL INPUT19 51 FADER CHANNEL INPUT19 114 PAN CHANNEL INPUT20 52 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT20 115 PAN CHANNEL INPUT21 53 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT21 116 PAN CHANNEL INPUT22 54 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT22 117 PAN CHANNEL INPUT23 55 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT23 118 PAN CHANNEL INPUT24 56 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT24 119 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Owner s Manual 294 Appendix C MIDI High Mid Low 59 FADER L MASTER AUX7 60 FADER L MASTER AUX8 61 NO ASSIGN 62 BALANCE MASTER STEREO 63 NO ASSIGN 64 ON CHANNEL INPUT25 65 ON CHANNEL INPUT26 66 ON CHANNEL INPUT27 67 ON CHANNEL INPUT28 68 ON CHANNEL INPUT29 69 ON CHANNEL INPUT30 70 ON CHANNEL INPUT31 71 ON CHANNEL INPUT32 72 ON CHANNEL ST IN1 73 ON CHANNEL ST IN2 74 ON CHANNEL ST IN3 75 ON CHANNEL ST IN4 76 ON MASTER BUS1 77 ON MASTER BUS2 78 ON MASTER BUS3 79
234. NC DEC buttons to modify the patching Parameter wheel 01V96 Owner s Manual dnjas pue suondauu0D ES 44 Chapter 4 Connections and Setup 3 Press ENTER to confirm the change Tip To restore the default patching recall Input Patch memory 00 see page 174 Patching Omni Outs By default the output connectors are patched as follows OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 Aux Out 1 4 ADAT OUT channels 1 8 Bus Out 1 8 Slot channels 1 8 Bus Out 1 8 Slot channels 9 16 Bus Out 1 8 ZTR DIGITAL connectors Stereo Out L amp R Tip The STEREO OUT connectors always output the Stereo Bus signals The MONITOR OUT connectors output monitor signals or the 2TR IN signals depending on the Monitor Source selector setting Follow the steps below to view or change the patching 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the following page appears PRTCH Initial Data CH1 CH1 46k SLOT OUTPUT PATCH SLOT Signals that are currently assigned to the output connectors are shown in the parameter boxes 1 underneath the connector numbers The parameter indicators are explained below EAS No assignment BUSI BUSS Bus Out 1 8 signals AUX1 AUX8 Aux Out 1 8 Signals
235. NG 2 Move the cursor to the first DAW parameter box in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section then rotate the Parameter wheel to select USB as the port Press ENTER to confirm the setting 4 Move the cursor to the adjacent parameter box on the right then rotate the Parameter wheel to spec ify the port ID REMOTE Note If you select an incorrect port you will be unable to use the Remote function Be sure to match the port ID with that specified in the Peripherals window in Pro Tools 5 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Remote page appears DIO SETUP Initial Data TEE 5112 STI3 STI4 CH1 CH1 005 Protests 1 4 1 poem ELE CODE FEET mes OOO 1 1000 re INSERT BSSIGN EDIT ASSIGN COMPARE BYPASS INSERT Peers a channel sirik s it BUA MIDI HOST MONITOR MACHINE 6 Select ProTools as the target device for the Target parameter 1 located in the upper right corner of the page By default the Remote layer target is set to ProTools If another target has been selected rotate the Parameter wheel to select ProTools 01V96 Owner s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 189 7 Press the LAYER REMOTE button The Remote Layer is now available for control enabling you to remotely control Pro Tools DIO SETUP In itia Data BSL 5112 STI3 5114 STIL sr OO
236. NO ASSIGN 25 NO ASSIGN 84 NO ASSIGN 26 NO ASSIGN 85 NO ASSIGN 27 ASSIGN 86 NO ASSIGN 28 ASSIGN 87 NO ASSIGN 29 ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ LPF ON INPUT25 31 NO ASSIGN 90 EQ LPF ON INPUT26 32 NO ASSIGN 91 EQ LPF INPUT27 33 AIT L INPUT25 92 EQ LPF ON INPUT28 34 ATT L INPUT26 93 EQ LPF INPUT29 35 EQ AIT L INPUT27 94 EQ LPF INPUT30 36 EQ ATTL INPUT28 95 EQ LPF ON INPUT31 37 EQ INPUT29 102 EQ LPF ON INPUT32 38 EQ AIT L INPUT30 103 EQ LPF ON ST IN1 39 EQ ATTL INPUT31 104 LPF ST IN2 40 EQ AIT L INPUT32 105 EQ LPF ON ST IN3 41 EQ AIT L ST INTL 106 LPF ON 5 4 42 ATT L ST INTR 107 NO ASSIGN 43 EQ AIT L ST IN2L 108 NO ASSIGN 44 ATT L ST IN2R 109 NO ASSIGN 45 EQ AIT L ST IN3L 110 NO ASSIGN 46 EQ AIT L ST IN3R 111 NO ASSIGN 47 EQ AIT L ST INAL 112 NO ASSIGN 48 EQ AIT L ST INAR 113 NO ASSIGN 49 NO ASSIGN 114 NO ASSIGN 50 ASSIGN 115 NO ASSIGN 51 ASSIGN 116 NO ASSIGN 52 55 117 55 53 55 118 55 54 NO ASSIGN 119 55 55 55 56 55 57 55 58 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Owner s Manual Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 305
237. NPUT connectors 1 16 are routed to Input Channels 1 16 The signals input at the ADAT IN connector the Track 1 8 signals from the hard disk recorder in this example are routed to Input Channels 17 24 and the signals input from the slot the Track 9 16 signals from the hard disk recorder are routed to Input Channels 25 32 If the Input Patch settings have been changed from the default settings recall Input Patch memory 00 from the Input Patch library page 171 01V96 Owner s Manual Initial Track Recording 49 4 Press the PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Out Patch page appears On this page make sure that the Output Patch settings remain set to default values as shown below PRTCH Initial Data 8 5111 5112 STI3 5714 CH1 CHI 0 Qo SLOT rT qe 4 1 By default as shown in this example the signals output from Outs 1 8 are routed to the OUT connector Tracks 1 8 of the hard disk recorder in this example and to the slot output channels Tracks 9 16 of the hard disk recorder in this example If the Output Patch settings have been changed from the default settings recall Output Patch memory 00 from the Output Patch library page 171 Initial Track Recording This section explains how to make an initial recording to the hard disk recorder s tracks of a rhythm machine synthesizer bass guitar and microphone that are connected to INPUT connectors 1 12
238. NTER ENTER ENTER ENTER Tr THONNFI MFTFD 1 mem 5 Move the cursor to the ASSIGN button 2 then press ENTER to turn on the button You can now select plug ins If you press another channel s SEL button after you turn on the ASSIGN button the button turns off If you wish to assign plug ins to other channels turn on the ASSIGN button again 6 Move the cursor to one of the four parameter controls then rotate the Parameter wheel to select a plug in By default the parameter controls enable you to select plug ins to be assigned to channel inserts 1 4 To assign a plug in to insert 5 press the Tab Scroll button P gt to change the indication in the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section If you are using the TDM system you can also assign outboard effects processors DIU SETUPIDO Initial Data aight E STIL STIT EDIT REMOTE F po i TIME CODE FEET a eats OOO 1 1000 IHSERT CHANNEL METER 7 Press ENTER to confirm the assignment Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to assign more plug ins to other insert positions in the channel strip 01V96 Owner s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 199 8 In the same way assign plug ins to other channels 9 When you finish assigning plug ins press the AUX 8 button The button indicator turns off Editing Plug ins You can edit plug ins inserted in the channel strips as follows 1 Press the F2 button to select Insert Display mode 2 Pressthe corresponding
239. No 01000011 SUB STATUS 0011 GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID 00001101 ADDRESS 00000010 11110111 FO 43 1n 3E 0D 02 ee pp 7 FO 43 3n 3E 02 7 2 8 3 6 Parameter change STATUS 11110000 ID No 01000011 SUB STATUS 0001nnnn GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID 00001101 ADDRESS 00000011 FO 43 1n 3E 0 03 Edit buffer System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer Universal Edit Buffer Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no data End of exclusive Edit buffer System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer Universal Edit Buffer Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no End of exclusive Patch data System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer 01V96 Patch data Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no data End of exclusive Patch data System exclusive message Manufacture s I
240. O ASSIGN 21 NO ASSIGN 80 NO ASSIGN 22 NO ASSIGN 81 NO ASSIGN 23 ASSIGN 82 NO ASSIGN 24 ASSIGN 83 NO ASSIGN 25 55 84 NO ASSIGN 26 NO ASSIGN 85 NO ASSIGN 27 ASSIGN 86 NO ASSIGN 28 ASSIGN 87 ASSIGN 29 ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ Q HIGH INPUT25 31 NO ASSIGN 90 EQ Q HIGH INPUT26 32 NO ASSIGN 91 EQ Q HIGH INPUT27 33 G HIGH L INPUT25 92 EQ Q HIGH INPUT28 34 G HIGH L INPUT26 93 EQ Q HIGH INPUT29 35 EQ G HIGH L INPUT27 94 EQ Q HIGH INPUT30 36 EQ G HIGH L INPUT28 95 EQ Q HIGH INPUT31 37 EQ G HIGH L INPUT29 102 EQ Q HIGH INPUT32 38 EQ G HIGH L INPUT30 103 EQ Q HIGH ST IN1 39 EQ G HIGH L INPUT31 104 EQ Q HIGH ST IN2 40 EQ G HIGH L INPUT32 105 EQ Q HIGH ST IN3 41 EQ G HIGH L ST IN1 106 EQ Q HIGH ST IN4 42 EQ G HIGH L ST IN2 107 NO ASSIGN 43 EQ G HIGH L ST IN3 108 NO ASSIGN 44 EQ G HIGH L ST IN4 109 NO ASSIGN 45 NO ASSIGN 110 NO ASSIGN 46 NO ASSIGN 111 NO ASSIGN 47 NO ASSIGN 112 NO ASSIGN 48 NO ASSIGN 113 NO ASSIGN 49 NO ASSIGN 114 NO ASSIGN 50 NO ASSIGN 115 NO ASSIGN 51 NO ASSIGN 116 NO ASSIGN 52 NO ASSIGN 117 NO ASSIGN 53 NO ASSIGN 118 NO ASSIGN 54 NO ASSIGN 119 NO ASSIGN 55 NO ASSIGN 56 NO ASSIGN 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Owner s Manual Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 303
241. On off 100 mm motorized Delay 0 29100 samples Metering Displayed on LCD Peak hold on off Number of 4 44 1kHz 48kHz effects 2 88 2kHz 96kHz INTERNAL EFFECTS Bypass On off EFFECT 1 4 In out 2 in 2 out Effect in from AUX1 8 INSERT OUT Effect out to Input patch U S Canada 120 V 60 Hz 90 W Power Requirements Other 220 240 V 50 60 Hz 90 W Dimensions HxDxW 150x 548 x 436 mm Net weight 15 kg Operating free air temperature range 10 35 C Storage temperature range 20 60 C AC Cable Supplied Accessories CD ROM Studio Manager Owner s Manual Studio Manager Installation Guide Options Digital interface card MY16 MY8 MY4 series RACK MOUNT KIT RK1 attenuation See Gate Parameters on page 287 See Comp Parameters on page 287 5 See EQ Parameters on page 286 EQ Parameters Total harmonic distortion is measured with a 6 dB octave filter 80 kHz 2 Hum amp Noise are measured with a 6 dB octave filter 12 7 kHz equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with infinite dB octave LOW HPF L MID H MID HIGH LPF 0 1 10 0 0 1 10 0 Q 41 points 0 1 10 0 41 points low shelving 41 points high shelving HPF LPF F 21 2 Hz 20 0 kHz 1 12 oct step 18 dB 18 dB G 0 1 dB step F 2 0 1 dB step HPF on off p LPF on off 01V96 Owner s Manual 287 Gate Parameters
242. Original and Shadow memories then become identical When you recall Scenes via MIDI Program Change messages the contents of the Original memory are always recalled even if the Auto Update function is enabled SalJOUJ9 A 91925 01V96 Owner s Manual 166 Chapter 15 5 Memories Fading Scenes You can specify the time it takes the Input and Output Channel faders or level controls to move to their new positions when a Scene is recalled This is called Fade Time and it can be set for each channel in the range of 00 0 through 30 0 seconds in 0 1 second steps The Fade Time setting is stored in each Scene Fading Input Channels To set the Fade Time for Input Channels 1 32 and ST IN Channels 1 4 press the DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE button repeatedly until the Scene In Fade page appears Move the cur sor to the desired channel parameter box then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the Fade Time setting SCENE Initial Data 5711 5 2 5713 ST 4 CHI CHI 0 0 02 02 J INPUT FADE TIME 0 Global Fade Time por clea 2 4 fo amp 4 aa a 44 4 0 0 8i 88 8 80 80 10 1 i 12 14 15 16 INPUT 66 0 66 0 00 0 00 0 0 0 00 0 sec 7 18 19 i 22 23 24 88 8 00 0 80 0 88 8 00 0 00 9 3 25 i 26 i 27 29 30 31 32 88 8 00 0 00 0 8i 88 0 88 8 i T IN z 5 1 H
243. PC using a USB cable TO HOST USB port Y Computer 2 Install the necessary USB drivers included on the 01V96 CD ROM See the Studio Manager Installation Guide for more information on installing the drivers Configuring Macintosh Computers 1 Connect the 01V96 TO HOST USB port to a USB port on your Mac using USB cable 2 Install the required USB driver included on the 01V96 CD ROM See the Studio Manager Installation Guide for more information on installing the driver 3 Install OMS The 01V96 communicates with Pro Tools via OMS Open Music System software If you have not installed OMS on your Mac use the OMS installer included on the 01V96 CD ROM to install OMS 4 Launch Pro Tools 01V96 Owner s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 187 5 Choose OMS Studio Setup from the Setups menu and configure OMS as nec essary Refer to the documentation ae that came with OMS for more ID 0 Chs 1 16 information on configuring Studio Patches cha the OMS Studio Setup menu USB MIDI 1 OMS recognizes the 01V96 as 1 4 a USB MIDI interface that fea uas tures eight ports gs 01196 Port 2 01496 Port 3 01 96 Port 4 01 96 Port 5
244. PUT Sleeve GND In these specifications when dB represents a specific voltage 0 dB is referenced to 0 775 Vrms For 2TR IN levels 0 dBV is referenced to 1 00 Vrms All input AD converters CH INPUT 1 16 are 24 bit linear 128 times oversampling fs 44 1 48 kHz 48 V DC phantom power is supplied to CH INPUT 1 12 XLR type connectors Three PHANTOM 48V switches 1 4 5 8 9 12 turn on the phantom power for inputs 1 4 5 8 9 12 respectively Analog Output Specs Output level Actual For Use With E Output Source Nominal Connector Impedance Nomina before clip STEREO OUT L R i TENOR 1 L R 1500 600 Q Lines 1 23 V 12 28 V XLR 3 32 type Balanced 4 24 n OMNI OUT 1 4 150 Q 10k Q Lines 1 23 V 12 28 V Phone jack TRS Balanced 4 dB 24 dB MONITOR OUT L R 1509 10k Lines 23V 228v Phone jack TRS Balanced 2 18 Phone jack TRS Unbal CH INSERT OUT 1 12 600 Q 10k Q Lines 616 mV 6 16 V anced 10 10 dBV 2TR OUT L R i i L R 600 Q 10k Q Lines 316 mV 3 16 V RCA Pin Jack Unbalanced PHONES Tod 8 Q Phones 4 mW 25mW Stereo TRS 40 Q Phones 12 mW 75mW Unbalanced 1 XLR 3 32 type connectors are balanced 1 GND 2 3 COLD 2 Phone jacks are balanced Ring COLD Sleeve GND 3 CH INSERT IN OUT phone jacks are unbalanced Ring INPUT Sleeve
245. PUT31 66 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT27 8 SURROUND LR INPUT32 67 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT28 9 SURROUND LR ST INTL 68 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT29 10 SURROUND LR ST INTR 69 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT30 11 SURROUND LR ST IN2L 70 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT31 12 SURROUND LR ST IN2R 71 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT32 13 SURROUND LR ST IN3L 72 SURROUND WIDTH ST INTL 14 SURROUND LR ST IN3R 73 SURROUND WIDTH ST INTR 15 SURROUND LR ST INAL 74 SURROUND WIDTH ST IN2L 16 SURROUND LR ST INAR 75 SURROUND WIDTH ST IN2R 17 NO ASSIGN 76 SURROUND WIDTH ST IN3L 18 NO ASSIGN 77 SURROUND WIDTH ST IN3R 19 NO ASSIGN 78 SURROUND WIDTH ST INAL 20 NO ASSIGN 79 SURROUND WIDTH ST INAR 21 NO ASSIGN 80 NO ASSIGN 22 NO ASSIGN 81 NO ASSIGN 23 ASSIGN 82 NO ASSIGN 24 ASSIGN 83 NO ASSIGN 25 55 84 NO ASSIGN 26 NO ASSIGN 85 NO ASSIGN 27 ASSIGN 86 NO ASSIGN 28 ASSIGN 87 NO ASSIGN 29 ASSIGN 88 ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 89 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT25 31 NO ASSIGN 90 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT26 32 NO ASSIGN 91 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT27 33 SURROUND FR INPUT25 92 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT28 34 SURROUND FR INPUT26 93 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT29 35 SURROUND FR INPUT27 94 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT30 36 SURROUND FR INPUT28 95 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT31 37 SURROUND FR INPUT29 102 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT32 38 SURROUND FR 0 103 SURROUND DEPTH ST INTL 39 SURROUND FR INPUT31 104 SURROUND DEPTH
246. RDY 2 DAW REC RDY 3 DAW REC RDY 4 DAW REC RDY 5 DAW REC RDY 6 DAW REC RDY 7 DAW REC RDY 8 Pressing the buttons to which these functions are assigned places the corre sponding channel strips in Record Ready mode At this time the indicator of the button you pressed flashes It lights up when recording starts DAW REC RDY 9 DAW REC RDY 10 DAW REC RDY 11 DAW REC RDY 12 DAW REC RDY 13 DAW REC RDY 14 DAW REC RDY 15 DAW REC RDY 16 If no channel strips are in Record Enabled mode pressing the button to which this function is assigned places all channel strips in Record Enabled DAW REC RDY ALL mode The button indicator flashes if any channel strip in any bank is in Record Enabled mode Pressing the button while the button indicator is flash ing cancels Record Enabled mode for all channel strips Selecting Channels To select a single Pro Tools channel press the SEL button that corresponds to the desired channel To select multiple Pro Tools channels simultaneously while holding down one SEL but ton press the SEL buttons of the other channels you wish to add Press the SEL buttons again to cancel the selection Setting Channel Levels 1 Make sure that the FADER MODE HOME button indicator is lit steadily If the indicator is flashing press the HOME button to turn on the button indicator 0430u0 2 Operate the faders to set channel levels
247. SEL button for the other channel Note If you want to operate the faders of paired channels make sure you operate only one fader for the pair If you try to operate the faders for both channels in the pair an excessive load will be applied to the fader motor causing malfunction Routing Signals To record the 01V96 input signals to an external digital multitrack recorder you must spec ify the destination of the signals for each Input Channel This process is called routing There are two routing methods Using Bus Outs 1 8 Input Channel signals are first routed to Buses 1 8 then through Bus Outs 1 8 to the out put connectors or channels Use this method to mix multiple Input Channel signals and record them to the M TR s tracks If you desire you can process the signals using the Bus Out 1 8 compressors and EQs In the following example Input Channel signals are routed through Bus Outs 1 and 2 to ADAT OUT connectors 1 and 2 ADAT OUT connector CH 1 INPUT connector 1 gt Input Channels 1 gt Bus Out 1 TH LU gt 2 INPUT connector 2 gt Input Channels 2 gt BusOut2 m INPUT connector 3 m gt Input Channels 3 Bus Out 3 INPUT connector 4 gt Input Channels 4 Bus Out 4 INPUT connector 5 5 gt Input Channels 5 Bus Out 5 5 Input
248. SLOT1 15 BUS7 SLOT1 16 BUS8 ADAT OUT 1 BUS1 2 BUS2 3 BUS3 4 8054 5 8055 6 8056 7 8057 8 8058 OMNI OUT 1 AUX1 2 AUX2 3 AUX3 4 AUX4 DIRECT OUT 1 ADAT1 2 ADAT2 3 ADAT3 4 ADAT4 5 5 6 ADAT6 7 ADAT7 8 ADAT8 9 SLOT 1 10 SLOT 2 11 SLOT 3 12 SLOT 4 13 SLOT 5 14 SLOT 6 15 SLOT 7 16 SLOT 8 01V96 Owner s Manual 250 Appendix A Parameter Lists User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings Bank 1 GM Vol amp Pan Name Data Format Controller Short Long 112131415 16 7 9 10 11 END mE Rd fete RM01 01 GM CHO1 VOL amp PAN FADER lo lenp _ _ RM02 GM CH02 VOL amp PAN END RM03 GM CH03 VOL amp PAN __ __ __ _ ff END RM04 GM CH04 VOL amp PAN __ __ ff ff END RM05 GM CH05 VOL amp PAN ff RM06 GM CH06 VOL amp PAN END RM07 GM CH07 VOL amp PAN ff END RM08 GM CH08 VOL amp PAN END
249. ST IN Channel 2 The button indicator turns off This ON button should be turned on only when you monitor the playback signal of the master recorder Adjusting the Track Mix Balance Follow the steps below to adjust the mix balance among Tracks 1 16 and process the signals using the EQ compressor and gate Make sure that Tracks 1 16 on the digital MTR are all disarmed and the recorder is in a mode that enables you to monitor the track playback signals Press the LAYER 1 16 button then turn off the ON buttons for Input Channels 1 16 Press the LAYER 17 32 button and make sure that the ON buttons for Input Channels 17 32 are turned on Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Rout17 STI page appears On this page make sure that the S buttons for Input Channels 17 32 are turned on and the 1 8 buttons are turned off 01V96 Owner s Manual Mixing Recorded Tracks into Stereo Mixdown 65 PAN ROUTE CHi CHi ALL STEREO ALL BUS ALL CLEAR 0 80 EDI EC 80 80 80 ROUND MODE ids Input Channel 17 32 signals input from Tracks 1 16 of the digital MTR are now routed through the Stereo Bus to the STEREO OUT and 2TR OUT DIGITAL connectors 5 Usethe PAN parameter controls for Input Channels 17 32 on the page to adjust the panpot for each track Tip Alternatively you can adjust the pan settings by selecting the Input Channels via the correspondin
250. STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the Rx CH Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL D digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010100 14 Function call 0000 Of attribute Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 21 Parameter change Function call response attribute Transmission When an attribute is modified as a result of receiving a parameter change from Studio Manager the result of execution will be transmitted as the following pa rameter change STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODELID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 01010100 54 Function call 0000 Of attribute Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low DATA ee result HH ee result HL ee result LH ee result LL EOX 11110111 rF7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 22 Parameter change Function call link Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx C
251. Send pairs on or off FS This button determines whether Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Surround Pan when the 01V96 is in any Surround mode other than Stereo When this button is turned on Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Surround Pan This is useful for feeding Surround signals to external Surround effects processors Move the cursor to the 2 button for the desired Bus or Aux Send then press ENTER The buses or Aux Sends are paired 3 To cancel a pair move the cursor to the STEREO button for the desired Bus or Aux Send then press ENTER 01V96 Owner s Manual 106 Chapter 8 Bus Outs Attenuating Output Signals To attenuate the 01V96 s output signals display the EQ Out Att page and adjust the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 attenuators individually If necessary you can also select Output and I O card channels and specify the amount of attenuation This technique is convenient when you want to attenuate output signals quickly regardless of the source signal patching 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Output Att page appears DIOZSETUP Initial Data m STIT 51257135714 BUS1 HJ EW rE 0 amp OUTPUT PORT ATTENUATOR PORT LEVEL OMNI OUT 3 dB OMNI OUT 2 dB OMNI OUT 1 MONITOR OUT R 6dB MONITOR OUT L ESA SURR BUS CASCADE OUTPUT 2 Movethe cursor in the left column 1 then scroll the list up or dow
252. T9 42 SURROUND FR INPUT10 43 SURROUND FR INPUT11 44 SURROUND FR INPUT12 45 SURROUND FR INPUT13 46 SURROUND FR INPUT14 47 SURROUND FR INPUT15 48 SURROUND FR INPUT16 49 SURROUND FR INPUT17 50 SURROUND FR INPUT18 51 SURROUND INPUT19 52 SURROUND INPUT20 53 SURROUND FR INPUT21 54 SURROUND FR INPUT22 55 SURROUND FR INPUT23 56 SURROUND FR INPUT24 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN High Mid Low 59 NO ASSIGN 60 NO ASSIGN 61 NO ASSIGN 62 NO ASSIGN 63 NO ASSIGN 64 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT1 65 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT2 66 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT3 67 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT4 68 SURROUND WIDTH INPUTS 69 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT6 70 SURROUND WIDTH 71 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT8 72 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT9 73 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT10 74 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT11 75 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT12 76 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT13 77 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT14 78 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT15 79 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT16 80 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT17 81 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT18 82 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT19 83 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT20 84 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT21 85 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT22 86 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT23 87 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT24 88 NO ASSIGN 89 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT1 90 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT2 9
253. TER This is the end of the fader calibration process The 01V96 restarts in normal mode 01V96 Owner s Manual USER DEFINED KEYS Appendix A Parameter Lists 241 USER DEFINED KEYS Function Display 47 Input MUTE Group Enable J IN Mute Group J Function Display 48 Input MUTE Group Enable K IN Mute Group K 0 No Assign No Assign 49 Input MUTE Group Enable L IN Mute Group L 1 5 MEM Recall 1 Scene 1 Recall 50 Input MUTE Group Enable M IN Mute Group M 2 Scene MEM Recall 1 Scene 1 Recall 51 Input MUTE Group EnableN IN Mute Group 3 Scene MEM Recall No XX Scene XX Recall 52 Input MUTE Group Enable O IN Mute Group O 4 Effect 1 Lib Recall 1 Fx1 Lib 1 Recall 53 Input MUTE Group Enable P IN Mute Group P 5 Effect 1 Lib Recall 1 Lib 1 Recall 54 Output Fader Group Enable Q OutFader Group 6 _ Effect 1 Lib Recall No XX LibXXX RCL 55 Output Fader Group Enable R OutFader Group 7 Effect 2 Lib Recall 1 Fx2 Lib 1 Recall 56 Output Fader Group Enable 5 OutFader Group S 8 Effect 2 Lib Recall 1 Fx2 Lib 1 Recall 57 Output Fader Group Enable T OutFader Group 9 Effect 2 Lib Recall No XX Fx2 LibXXX RCL
254. TO SEND DAW AUTO PLUGIN DAW AUTO SENDMUTE DAW AUTO READ DAW AUTO TOUCH DAW AUTO LATCH DAW AUTO WRITE DAW AUTO TRIM DAW AUTO OFF Correspond to the Automation Overwrite Auto Enable functions Select Automation modes DAW AUTO SUSPEND Cancels Automation recording and playback for all channels When Automa tion is interrupted the LED flashes and channel strip controls maintain the current settings DAW AUTO STATUS Displays the channel Automation mode Read Tch Ltch Wrt or Off The mode setting appears at the bottom of each channel on a Channel or Meter Display page when you press and hold the button to which this function is assigned DAW GROUP STATUS Displays a Group ID to which each channel belongs below each channel number on a Channel or Meter Display page in all caps for a main group and in lowercase letters for a sub group DAW MONI STATUS DAW CREATE GROUP Pressing the key to which this function is assigned enables you to view the current monitoring mode and the channel strip type Pressing the key to which this function is assigned enables you to execute the function specified in the menu of the Pro Tools Group list DAW SUSPEND GROUP Suspends all mix groups temporarily Press the button again to undo suspen sion DAW WIN TRANSPORT Shows or hides the Transport window DAW WIN INSERT Shows or hides the Insert window DAW WIN MIX
255. Tab Scroll Right Tab Scroll and 1 4 buttons below the display In order to simplify explanations the pro cedures reference only the DISPLAY button method See Selecting Display Pages on page 28 for details on all the ways in which you can select pages Installing the 01V96 This unit should be placed on a strong and stable surface that complies with the warnings and cautions listed in the previous sections Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner s manual are for instructional purposes only and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument Copying of the commercially available music sequence data and or digital audio files is strictly prohibited except for your personal use 01V96 Owner s Manual 8 Contents Contents 2 2 552 EE RAE SER E S NI IR oe 11 2 Control Surface amp Rear Panel 13 Control Surface iss Uer QU HOS UU Aan wie de EU Me 13 Rear Panel hanay Cep uc C qoM Eod I ae ARTE RU 23 Installing an Optional Card 26 3 Operating 27 About the Display iss scsi Hed RC eR aide 27 Selecting Display Pages de sericea poru paha UR 28 Display Interface vec
256. These messages are used to adjust the Freeze effect Bulk Dump Messages These messages enable you to store the 01V96 s internal data to a sequencer or MIDI filer When the 01V96 receives these messages they overwrite the 01V96 data The 01V96 features the following interface for transmitting and receiving MIDI data MIDI IN THRU OUT ports These ports transmit and receive MIDI data to and from standard MIDI devices Each port is a single port interface that transmits and receives single port data 16 channels x 1 ports The MIDI THRU port outputs MIDI messages received at the MIDIIN port without mod ification as is USB port This port is used to connect a computer and transfer MIDI messages This is a multiport interface that transmits and receives up to eight port data 16 channels x 8 ports If you connect a computer to the USB port you must install the appropriate driver software on the computer See the Studio Manager Installation Guide for more information on install ing drivers lt 9 Note If the computer is turned on but the USB MIDI application has not been launched 01V96 performance may be slow In this case cancel the assignment of the USB port as the MIDI message transmission port 01V96 Owner s Manual 212 Chapter 18 MIDI SLOT If an optional MY8 mLAN I O card is installed in the slot MIDI data transfer to and from an external MIDI device is available via the MY8 mLAN card
257. UND LFE L INPUT21 54 SURROUND LFE L INPUT22 55 SURROUND LFE L INPUT23 56 SURROUND LFE L INPUT24 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN High Mid Low 59 NO ASSIGN 60 NO ASSIGN 61 NO ASSIGN 62 NO ASSIGN 63 NO ASSIGN 64 SURROUND DIV F INPUT1 65 SURROUND DIV F INPUT2 66 SURROUND DIV F INPUT3 67 SURROUND DIV F INPUT4 68 SURROUND DIV F INPUTS 69 SURROUND DIV F INPUT6 70 SURROUND DIV F 71 SURROUND DIV F INPUT8 72 SURROUND DIV F INPUT9 73 SURROUND DIV F INPUT10 74 SURROUND DIV F INPUT11 75 SURROUND DIV F INPUT12 76 SURROUND DIV F INPUT13 77 SURROUND DIV F INPUT14 78 SURROUND DIV F INPUT15 79 SURROUND DIV F INPUT16 80 SURROUND DIV F INPUT17 81 SURROUND DIV F INPUT18 82 SURROUND DIV F INPUT19 83 SURROUND DIV F INPUT20 84 SURROUND DIV F INPUT21 85 SURROUND DIV F INPUT22 86 SURROUND DIV F INPUT23 87 SURROUND DIV F INPUT24 88 NO ASSIGN 89 ON INPUT1 90 EQ ON INPUT2 91 EQ ON INPUT3 92 INPUT4 93 EQ ON INPUTS 94 INPUT6 95 102 INPUT8 103 EQ ON INPUT9 104 EQ ON INPUT10 105 EQ ON INPUT11 106 EQ ON INPUT12 107 EQ ON INPUT13 108 EQ ON INPUT14 109 EQ ON INPUT15 110 EQ ON INPUT16
258. UXS AUXS AD IN 13 Slot CH5 IN AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 AUX6 AUX6 AD IN 14 Slot CH6 IN AUX6 AUX7 AUX7 AD IN 15 Slot CH7 IN AUX7 AUX8 AUX8 AD IN 16 Slot CH8 IN AUX8 STL STEREO L ADAT1 IN Slot CH9 IN STEREO L STR STEREO R ADAT2 IN Slot CH10 IN STEREO R NS CH1 InsertOut CH1 ADAT3 IN Slot CH11 IN InsertOut CH1 NS CH2 InsertOut CH2 ADAT4 IN Slot CH12 IN InsertOut CH2 NS CH3 InsertOut CH3 ADATS IN Slot CH13 IN InsertOut CH3 NS CH4 InsertOut CH4 ADAT6 IN Slot CH14 IN InsertOut CH4 NS CH5 InsertOut CH5 7 IN Slot CH15 IN InsertOut CH5 NS CH6 InsertOut CH6 ADATS8 Slot CH16 IN InsertOut CH6 NS CH7 InsertOut CH7 Slot CH1 IN OMNI OUT 1 InsertOut CH7 NS CH8 InsertOut CH8 Slot CH2 IN OMNI OUT 2 InsertOut CH8 NS CH9 InsertOut CH9 Slot CH3 IN OMNI OUT 3 InsertOut CH9 INS CH10 InsertOut CH10 Slot CH4 IN OMNI OUT 4 InsertOut CH10 INS CH11 InsertOut CH11 Slot CH5 IN 2TR OUT Dig L InsertOut CH11 INS CH12 InsertOut CH12 Slot CH6 IN 2TR OUT Dig R InsertOut CH12 INS CH13 InsertOut CH13 Slot CH7 IN InsertOut CH13 INS CH14 InsertOut CH14 Slot CH8 IN InsertOut CH14 INS CH15 InsertOut CH15 Slot CH9 IN InsertOut CH15 INS CH16 InsertOut CH16 Slot CH10 IN InsertOut CH16 INS CH17 InsertOut CH17 Slot CH11 IN InsertOut CH1 7 INS CH18 InsertOut CH18 Slot CH12 IN InsertOut CH18
259. W END 2 RM01 CH1 VST MIXER CH1 FADER BO 07 FAD END ON Bl 40 SW END ES RM02 2 5 MIXER 2 FADER B1 07 END ES e ON B2 40 SW END RMO3 CH3 5 MIXER CH3 FADER B2 07 FAD END ET ON 40 SW _ 25 RM04 CH4 5 MIXER FADER B3 07 FAD END ON B4 40 SW END E m RMO5 5 5 MIXER 5 FADER B4 07 FAD END 25 gt ON B5 40 SW JEND E I RMO6 6 5 MIXER CH6 FADER B5 07 FAD END E B6 40 SW END M RMO7 CH7 5 MIXER CH7 FADER B6 07 FAD END M ON B7 40 SW END be RMO8 8 5 MIXER CH8 FADER B7 07 FAD END 25 ON B8 40 SW JEND 25 RMO9 9 5 MIXER CH9 FADER B8 07 FAD END ES ON B9 40 SW END g RM10 CH10 VST MIXER CH10 FADER B9 07 FAD END ON BA 40 SW END E RM11 CH11 VST MIXER 11 FADER 07 FAD END BB 40 SW END E RM12 CH12 VST MIXER CH12 FADER BB 07 FAD END 25 E E ON BC 40 SW END RM13 CH13 VST MIXER CH13 FADER BC 07 FAD END ON BD 40 SW END RM14 CH14 5 MIXER CH14 FADER BD 07 FAD END ON BE 40 SW END 25 E RM15 CH15 VST M
260. YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010000 10 Function call 0110 6f clearfunction Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive function number SCENE LIB CLEAR 0x60 1 99 EQ LIB CLEAR 0x61 41 128 GATE LIB CLEAR 0x62 5 128 COMP LIB CLEAR 0x63 37 128 EFF LIB CLEAR 0x64 53 128 CHANNEL LIB CLEAR 0x66 1 128 INPATCH LIB CLEAR 0x67 1 32 OUTPATCH LIB CLEAR 0x68 1 32 2 8 3 18 Parameter change Function call response Scene Library Clear Transmission When a scene or library is cleared as a result of receiving a parameter change from Studio Manager the result of execution will be transmitted as the follow ing parameter change STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 01010000 50 Function call 0110ffff 6f clear function Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low DATA ee result HH ee result HL result LH ee result LL EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 19 Parameter change Function call attribute Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the
261. aana i 80 RROUND MODE F ROUTI 16 fAROUTIT STIFA BUS TO ST E i 3 i 4 sure that the S buttons for Input Channels 17 24 turned and the 1 8 buttons are turned off then use the PAN control to pan the moni toring signal Tip Controlling Input Channel 17 32 Pan settings faders and the ON buttons will affect the monitoring signal but will not affect the signal recorded to the digital MTR 5 Pressthe DISPLAY ACCESS HOME button then press the F1 button to dis play the Meter CH1 32 page 6 Make sure that ON button indicators 1 8 are steadily lit then raise the STE REO fader to 0 dB METER 0 Initial Data CH7 CH OO OO OO OO OO OO OO 00 c gt co co co 12 354 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 7 While the musicians play the musical instruments adjust faders 1 8 MON ITOR OUT control and PHONES control to set the appropriate monitoring level Now you can monitor via the monitoring system and headphones the signals sent from Input Channels 17 24 to the Stereo Bus Note If the L amp R level meters reach the OVER position lower the STEREO fader 01V96 Owner s Manual 56 Chapter 5 Tutorial METER Initial Data 5 12 8 STI 4 mG O W PEAK HOLD OO 04 00 00 09 09 co co co
262. able mode The FIX indication appears for Aux Sends that are set to Fixed mode and you cannot switch Pre Post 4 If you selected the LEVEL button in Step 2 move the cursor to the desired Input Channel and Aux intersection then edit the Send level or turn the cur rently selected AUX Send on or off Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to set the Send level then press the ENTER button to turn the currently selected Aux Send on or off One of the following indicators appears depending on the current Aux mode Aux Sends in Fixed mode A FIX indicator appears for On Aux Sends and dot appears for Off Aux Sends om INPUT 5 181112 Aux Sends in Variable mode The current Send levels are displayed by the bar graphs If the level is set to nominal 0 0 dB N appears in the bar The bars for Aux Sends that are turned off are highlighted INPUT 3 RARI 01V96 Owner s Manual Panning Aux Sends 119 Panning Aux Sends You can pair adjacent odd even in this order Aux Sends for stereo operation This enables you to pan signals from Input Channels to paired Aux Sends 1 Pairthe desired two Aux Sends See page 105 for more information on pair ing channels 2 Usethe FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 8 buttons to select one of the paired Aux Sends 3 Repeatedly press the button you pressed in Step 2 to dis
263. ages assigned in the DATA parameter boxes will be ignored E This message indicates that no messages are assigned to the DATA parameter boxes Tip When you click the LEARN button to assign MIDI messages the 01V96 automatically recognizes the end of the messages and assigns END and 7 While continuing to hold down the foot switch turn off the LEARN button 8 Move the cursor to the third parameter box 7F in this example then rotate the Parameter wheel to change the value to SW SW is a variable that changes depending on the ON button s on off status You can use the following variables in MIDI messages This variable is selectable only in DATA parameter boxes of the ON section When the ON buttons are turned on 7F 127 in decimal is output When the ON buttons are turned off 00 0 in decimal is output This variable is selectable only in the DATA parameter boxes of the FADER section When you operate the faders continuously 01V96 Owner s Manual MIDI Remote Layer 207 changing values in the range of 00 to 7F 0 127 in decimal are output Tip If SW is not assigned in the DATA parameter boxes of the ON section the current MIDI messages are output is assigned fader operation is ignored Note Be sure to set one of the DATA parameter boxes of the FADER section to FAD If no 9 Move the cu
264. al partner in another Layer the fader position will be copied to the partner s Aux Send 01V96 Owner s Manual Input amp Output Patching 121 10 Input amp Output Patching This chapter describes how to patch assign signal paths within the 01V96 to its inputs outputs and slot channels Input Patching Signals input at INPUT connectors 1 16 IN connector 2TR IN DIGITAL connec tors and Slot I O card are patched to Input Channels for use Patch example Input Patching INPUT connector 1 Input Channel 1 INPUT connector 2 Input Channel 2 INPUT connector 3 Input Channel 3 INPUT connector 4 Input Channel 4 INPUT connector 5 Input Channel 5 INPUT connector 6 Input Channel 6 INPUT connector 7 Input Channel 7 INPUT connector 8 Input Channel 8 By default the Input Channels are patched as follows 1ndul Input Channels Input connectors and Slot channels 1 16 INPUT connectors 1 16 17 24 ADAT IN Input Channels 1 8 25 32 Slot Channels 1 8 ST IN Channels 1 4 Internal Effects Processor 1 4 Outputs 1 2 You can change these patches if you desire 01V96 Owner s Manual 122 Chapter 10 1 amp Output Patching Input Patching Follow the steps below to change the Input Patch 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch In Patch page appears
265. am Change transmission is not valid this message will be transmit ted with the Device Number set to the Tx CH STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010000 10 Function call OO0ffffff ff function Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low DATA ch channel High cl channel Low EOX 11110111 7 End ofexclusive function number channel 1 tx rx SCENE RECALL 0x00 0 99 8192 256 tx rx EQ LIB RECALL 0x01 1 128 8192 0 513 tx rx GATE LIB RECALL 0x02 1 128 8192 0 95 tx rx COMP LIB RECALL 0x03 1 128 8192 0 513 tx rx EFF LIB RECALL 0x04 1 128 8192 0 3 tx rx CHANNEL LIB RECALL 0x06 0 128 8192 0 513 tx rx INPATCH LIB RECALL 0x07 0 32 8192 256 tx rx OUTPATCH LIB RECALL 0x08 0 32 8192 256 tx rx SCENE STORE 0x20 1 99 256 16383 tx rx EQ LIB STORE 0x21 41 128 0 513 16383 tx rx GATE LIB STORE 0x22 5 128 0 31 16383 tx rx COMP LIB STORE 0x23 37 128 0 513 16383 tx rx EFF LIB STORE 0x24 53 128 0 3 16383 tx rx CHANNEL LIB STORE 0x26 1 128 0 513 16383 tx rx INPATCH LIB STORE 0x27 1 32 256 16383 tx rx OUTPATCH LIB STORE 0x28 1 32 256 16383 tx rx 1 0 CH1 31 CH32 32 ST IN1L 39 ST IN4R 128 BUS1 135 8058 256 AUX1 263 AUX8 512 STEREO Use 256 if the recall destination or
266. ameter sync on off DLY NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY MOD NOTE 2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 H3 FO R ddd h J J d da Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 2 HP k HJ k h JJ hb l J d 3 lt ss MULTI FILTER Iwo input two output 3 band multi filter 24 dB octave Parameter Range Description 1 HPF LPF BPF Filter 1 type high pass low pass band pass TYPE 2 HPF LPF BPF Filter 2 type high pass low pass band pass 3 HPF LPF BPF Filter 3 type high pass low pass band pass FREQ 1 28 0 2 16 0 kHz Filter 1 frequency FREQ 2 28 0 2 16 0 kHz Filter 2 frequency FREQ 3 28 0 2 16 0 kHz Filter 3 frequency LEVEL 1 0 100 Filter 1 level LEVEL 2 0 100 Filter 2 level LEVEL 3 0 100 Filter 3 level RESO 1 0 20 Filter 1 resonance RESO 2 0 20 Filter 2 resonance RESO 3 0 20 Filter 3 resonance 01V96 Owner s Manual 272 Appendix A Parameter Lists FREEZE One input one output basic sampler Parameter Range Description In MANUAL mode recording is started by pressing the REC and PLAY buttons In INPUT mode Record Ready mode is REC MODE MANUAL INPUT engaged by pressing the REC button and actual recording is triggered by the input signal Recording delay For plus values recording starts after the REC DLY 1000 to 1000 ms
267. ance 096 all delayed reverb 10096 all delay REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel 1 NOTEL DELAY L Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel NOTER 1 DELAY R NOTE FB Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB DLY 1 01V96 Owner s Manual setting ffi HE B h d J d d Maximum value depends on the tempo Effects Parameters 271 DIST gt DELAY One input two output distortion and delay effects in series Parameter Range Description DST1 DST2 OVD1 DST TYPE OVD2 CRUNCH Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive MASTER 0 100 Master volume TONE 10 to 10 Tone control N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction DELAY 0 0 2725 0 ms Delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth DLY BAL 0 100 Distortion and delay balance 0 all distortion 100 all delayed distortion SYNC OFF ON Tempo par
268. and 10 on the digital MTR Adjusting the Monitoring Level Follow the steps below to place the digital MTR in record ready mode and monitor the sig nals that are sent from Tracks 9 and 10 of the digital MTR back to the 01V96 s Input Chan nels 25 and 26 through the MONITOR OUT connectors and the PHONES jack 1 Arm the connected digital MTR s Tracks 9 and 10 At this time set the monitor mode on the digital MTR accordingly so that you can monitor the input signals on the armed tracks and monitor playback signals from the other tracks Refer to the owner s manual for the digital MTR for more information 2 Press the LAYER 17 32 button Input Channel Layer 17 32 is now available for control from the channel strip section 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Rout17 STI page appears 4 Make sure that the S buttons for Input Channels 25 and 26 are turned on and the 1 8 buttons are turned off 01V96 Owner s Manual 62 Chapter 5 Tutorial 5 Pressthe F1 button to display the Pan Route Pan page then use the PAN parameter controls on the page to pan channel signals ROUTE Initial Data Np 5112 5 ST 4 agi L ST i Uo ur THE INPUT S 1L 1R 566456686 ES CENTER CENTER 113 CENTER 131 R10 R1 Res LB3 9 18 11 12 13 14 15 16 2L 2R C D O GO to CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER L53 R53
269. and EQ of the Input Channels patched to the effect outputs Tip mix the effects sound returned via the Aux sends with the original dry sound set the effects MIX BALANCE parameter to 100 only the effects sound will be output 01V96 Owner s Manual 156 Chapter 14 Internal Effects Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels You can insert the internal effects into certain Input Channels or Output Channels Bus 1 8 Aux Bus 1 8 or the Stereo Bus Note You cannot use Insert In and Out for ST IN Channels If effects are inserted in channels you cannot use those effects via Aux Sends or insert them into other channels Select an internal Effects processor 1 4 then recall the desired effect pro grams Press the SEL button of the Input Channel or Output Channel into which you want to insert the selected effects Tip Repeatedly pressing the STEREO SEL button toggles between the left and right Stereo Bus channels Press the DISPLAY ACCESS INSERT DELAY button repeatedly until the Ins Dly Insert page appears INS DLY Initial Data 571257135714 cue 0 oO me Rin 4 POST ON FRDER FRDER o ON OFF Select the effect insertion position using the INSERT button in the POSITION section Move the cursor to the OUT parameter box in the INSERT section then select the inputs of the effects processor selected in Step 1
270. and MD recorders are unable to synchronize to external wordclock during playback that is they cannot be wordclock slaves If this type of master recorder is connected to the 01V96 s 2TR IN DIGITAL connector access the DIO Setup Word Clock page and select 2TRD 2TR IN DIGITAL as the wordclock source When the master recorder finishes playing back turn off the ON button for ST IN Chan nel 2 Tip If you desire you can store the current mix settings to memory as a Scene see page 161 01V96 Owner s Manual Analog I O amp Digital I O 69 6 Analog I O amp Digital I O This chapter describes the 01V96 s analog and digital input output connectors as well as the basic operations involving the digital I Os Analog Inputs amp Outputs Input Section The 01V96 s top panel features input connectors which enable you to connect microphone and line level sources INPUT connectors A 1 12 These balanced TRS type phone connectors accept line level and 1 2 microphone signals The nominal input range is 60 dB through 4 dB The phantom 48V switches on the rear panel turn on off the 48V phantom power feed to these inputs NPUT connectors B 1 12 BAL emm 5 These balanced TRS type connectors accept line level and micro phone signals The nominal input range is 60 dB through 4 dB You cannot usesame numbered INPUT A and INPUT B connectors simultaneously For exam
271. and recall compressor programs from the library This example uses one of the compressor programs 1 36 from the Compressor library DYNAMICS 0 Initial Data m CH8 CH8 COMP LIBRARY CURRENT CURUE CURRENT COMP LIBRARY TITLE Dr BO Compander 5 CompPandert H Rotate the Parameter wheel to scroll the library title list and select a pro gram that you want to recall The selected program appears inside the dotted box LIBRARY TITLE B Finser Dr verTop Move the cursor to the RECALL button located to the left of the library title list then press ENTER The selected program is recalled Press the F3 button The 01V96 displays the Dynamics Comp Edit page which enables you to adjust compres sor parameters 01V96 Owner s Manual Initial Track Recording 59 DYNAMICS Initial Data BIST STI2 STIS 57114 CH8 CH8 EDIT 9 THRESHOLD 9 RATIO B RTTRCK 17 8dB 2 511 i Sms RELEASE OUT GAIN 11 i 3 598 2 comp LIE Z ids The 01V96 features four types of dynamics processors COMP Compressor EXPAND Expander S Compander Soft and Compander Hard These processors feature different parameters See page 278 for the parameters for each compres sor type You cannot change the compressor type on the Comp Edit page To change the compress
272. ange table data of block bb ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F End of exclusive 2 8 2 12 Control change table bulk dump request format STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01000011 00000010 00000000 11110111 FO 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 33 43 02 00 F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump 4 n No 256 Current End of exclusive 01V96 Owner s Manual MIDI Data Format 313 2 8 2 13 Program change table bulk dump format Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message DATA Oddddddd ds EQ Library data of block bb ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Oddddddd de FORMAT No 01111110 7 Universal bulk dump CHECK SUM ee ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive COUNT LOW cl 01001100 4c l 01001101 4D M 2 8 2 16 Equalizer library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes ofthe DATA NAME indicate the bank number See above 00100000 20 00100000 20 STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive me
273. annel MODEL ID digital mixer 01096 Setup data Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no End of exclusive Backup memory System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer 01 96 Backup data Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no data End of exclusive Backup memory System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer 01 96 Backup data Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no End of exclusive Cascade data This message is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON Data received from a port that is assigned to Cascade Link and whose Device Number included in the SUB STATUS matches the Rx CH will be received for processing When this is received the specified parameter will be controlled STATUS 11110000 ID No 01000011 SUB STATUS 0001nnnn GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID 01111111 ADDRESS 00001111 0sssssss 0eeeeeee 11110111 FO 43 1n 3E 7F OF ss ee 7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer Universal Cascade data S
274. annel 1 gt Track 2 Channel 2 gt Track 3 1 3 gt Track 4 mmm 1 Channel 4 Ti k 5 gt au 8 TRACK DIGITAL rac 5 gt Digital Track 6 Channel 6 gt MY8 TD etc ued punong 01V96 Owner s Manual 140 Chapter 12 Surround Surround Pan Monitoring monitor surround pan movement patch the Bus Outs to the analog outputs to which a monitoring system is connected The following diagram illustrates an example in which Bus Out 1 amp 2 left and right front channel signals are output from the STEREO OUT L amp R connectors and Bus Out 3 6 sig nals are output from the OMNI OUT 1 4 connectors in 5 1 Surround mode 01V96 Input Channel 1 SURROUND PAN y Ls Rs C BUS6 LFE LFE LEVEL Input Channel 2 SURROUND PAN A LFE LEVEL Input Channel 3 SURROUND PAN Nu LFE LEVEL STEREO OUT L Subwoofer STEREO OUT R Multi channel amplifier Tip To output left and right front signals of the surround channels from the STEREO OUT L amp R connectors turn on the Surround LR to Stereo checkbox on the Surr Bus page 01V96 Owner s Manual Surround Panning 141 Surround Panning You can set the surrou
275. annot change the gate type on this page To change the gate type recall a program that uses the desired gate type from the Gate library 01V96 Owner s Manual Sjouueu 1ndul N 82 Chapter 7 Input Channels 5 Meters These meters indicate the levels of the post gate signals and the amount of gain reduc tion 6 ON OFF The ON OFF button turns the currently selected Input Channel s gate on or off 7 PARAMETER These controls enable you to set the gate parameters See page 278 for more informa tion on the parameters Tip This function is unavailable for the ST IN Channels Youcan store the gate settings in the Gate library which features preset programs that can be used for various applications see page 179 Compressing Input Channels To set the Input Channel compressors use the SEL buttons to select the desired Input Channel then press the DISPLAY ACCESS DYNAMICS button then press the F3 but ton to display the Dynamics Comp Edit page DYNAMICS Initial Data 8 5111 51125113 5114 CH1 CH1 lOO zi QOO COMP EDIT penne 3 THRESHOLD RATIO i 8 898 2 5 1 i RELEASE OUT GAIN i KNEE 229 5 D 1 POSITION Use the Parameter wheel the INC DEC buttons to select the position of the com pressor within the channel from the following options Immediatel
276. are copied to the Aux pan setting and the pan controls on both pages are linked Tip If paired Aux Sends are in Variable mode the Aux Send levels Aux On Off and Pre Post parameters for paired Input Channels are linked to each other f paired Aux Sends are in Fixed mode the Aux On Off parameters for paired Input Chan nels are not linked to each other 01V96 Owner s Manual i ui g 120 Chapter 9 Aux Outs Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux Sends While Aux Sends are in Variable mode you can copy all Input Channel fader positions on one layer to the corresponding Aux Sends This is convenient when you wish to send to the musicians monitor signals that have the same balance setting as the Stereo Out signals 1 Press and hold down the copy source layer LAYER 1 16 or 17 32 button Note If you release the button in the LAYER section before you proceed to Step 2 you will be unable to complete the Copy operation 2 Pressone of the FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 8 buttons to select the desired Aux Send copy destination The confirmation window for the Copy operation appears CONF I RMRT I ON 1 16 Level Cors to AUX 1 SEND 3 execute the Copy operation move the cursor to the YES button then press ENTER To cancel the Copy operation move the cursor to the NO button then press ENTER Tip If the copy destination Input Channel has been paired with a vertic
277. arkings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol L or coloured GREEN and YELLOW The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA KEMBLE MUSIC U K LTD NEDERLAND Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back up Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service Afdeiing Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing Kanaalweg 18 G 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel 030 2828425 de batterij niet weg maar lever hem in als KCA rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren Kassera anv nt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion VAROITUS Paristo voi rajahtaa jos se on virheellisesti asennettu Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin H vit k ytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti THE NETHERLANDS This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back up For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end of the service
278. ased on specified numbers for example a function that recalls a specific Scene or library memory or transmits MIDI messages an extra parameter box appears on the right in which you must specify the number suonounj Jou1O 01V96 Owner s Manual 232 Chapter 19 Other Functions 3 Move the cursor to one of the 1 8 parameter boxes then press ENTER The 01V96 displays the User Define Select window which enables you to assign functions to the selected buttons USER DEFINE SELECT USER DEFINED 1 ASSIGN SCENE Recall Channel Lib Effect Byrass 5 Rssisn 1 Recall 1 Recall 4 Movethe cursor to the left column then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select a function you wish to assign A function is selected when it appears inside the dotted box See page 241 for a complete list of assignable functions 5 n the same way set the center and right column The items that appear in the center and right columns vary depending on the function selected in Step 4 6 Toclose the window move the cursor to the YES button then press ENTER When the window closes the specified function is assigned to the selected User Defined button To cancel the assignment move the cursor to the CANCEL button then press ENTER 7 If you assigned functions that require numbers such as recalling a Scene or library memory move the cursor to the extra parameter box shown o
279. ation port This parameter determines whether MIDI messages are trans mitted between two cascaded 01V96s If you select MIDI MIDI messages will be transferred between two cascaded units If you select no MIDI messages are transferred When you select MIDI clicking the TRANSMIT button during cascade connection enables you to copy the internal settings of the 01V96 you are operating to another 01V96 This enables both 01V96s to share identical parameter settings Clicking the REQUEST button during cascade connection enables you to copy the internal settings of the other 01V96 to the 01V96 you are operating 01V96 Owner s Manual lt 9 214 Chapter 18 MIDI Selecting MIDI Messages for Transmission and Reception You can select MIDI messages to be transmitted or received at a specified port do so press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F1 button to display the MIDI Setup page STL 5112 STIS 5114 pet Q Q Q MIDI SETUP Tx Rx OMNI ECHO Op ewe D O Se or CONTROL OFF PARANE TER OFF OFF 8 F D Fader Resolution Select MIDI channels for transmission and reception in the CHANNEL row and turn the transmission and reception of each MIDI message on or off using the buttons in the param eter rows from PROGRAM CHANGE to OTHER COMMANDS D CHANNEL This parameter
280. ay the View Parameter page use the corresponding SEL button to select the desired bus then press the DISPLAY ACCESS VIEW button then press the F1 button VIEH Initial Data 2111 5112 5713 5714 BUS1 BUST meen INSERT LOW L MID H MID HIGH 40 THRES RATIO L SHELF 0 70 0 70 H SHELF 4 T 125 1 10 0k a as c T 228m G G OUTGAIN KNEE EZB EH G 9 9 PARAMETER FADER M LIBRARY 1 16 AUX E l3 parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels except for the following items The Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 Parameter pages do not contain the Gate and Phase parameters The Stereo Out Parameter page does not contain the Pair parameter Viewing Faders and Other Parameters To display the View Fader page use the corresponding SEL button to select the desired bus then press the DISPLAY ACCESS VIEW button then press the F2 button The Fader page layouts for Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 are slightly different Stereo Out Fader page VIEH Initial Data 5711 5112 5113 5114 ST R ST 400 BAL CENTER 8 m FRDER FADER LIBRARY 1 16 AUX D BAL This control adjusts the level balance between the L and R channels of the Stereo Out 2 ON OFF This button
281. ays control the Stereo Out signal regardless of the Layer settings The ST IN SEL buttons SOLO buttons ON buttons and level control knobs always adjust the ST IN channels selected via the ST IN button regardless of the Layer settings 01V96 Owner s Manual 32 Chapter 3 Operating Basics Selecting Channels To select a channel on the 01V96 press the corresponding SEL button To adjust the Pan and EQ settings use the rotary controls SELECTED CHANNEL inthe SELECTED CHANNEL section To select a channel on pages that cover multiple channels press the corresponding SEL but ton N EQUALIZER 1 Press the corresponding LAYER button to select a layer that includes the desired channel see page 31 To select ST IN channels press the ST IN ST IN button 2 Usethe corresponding SEL button to select the desired FREQUENCY LO The channel is selected and the SEL button indicator lights up The Channel s ID and Short name appear in the upper left corner e of the display If the currently displayed page contains relevant BAN channel parameter the cursor moves to that parameter automati cally If the currently displayed page contains no such parameter a page that does contain such a parameter is selected automatically Tip For paired Input or Output Channels the channel for which you pressed the SEL button is selected and its indicat
282. ble and 00111000 38 8 Program change table 01000011 43 STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message 00111001 39 9 ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA 00110011 33 3 SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel DATA 01001100 4c FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 00000000 00 COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 cl Obbbbbbb bb b 0 3 bank no 1 4 COUNT LOW cl BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 01001100 4c 1 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number 01001101 4D M DATA Oddddddd 45 User define layer data of block bb 00100000 20 00100000 20 Oddddddd de 00111000 38 8 CHECK SUM Oeeeeeee ee ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F 01000011 43 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 2 8 2 6 User Defined MIDI Remote bulk dump request DATA NAME 01010011 53 format 00000010 02 The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number 00000000 00 No 256 Current STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel DATA Oddddddd ds Setup data of block bb FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01001100 4C l 0ddddddd de 01001101 4D CHECK SUM 0e
283. brary enables you to store and recall Input Channel gate settings The library contains four preset memories and 124 user readable amp writable memories Follow the steps below to use the Gate library 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DYNAMICS button then press the F2 button The Dynamics Gate Lib page appears DYNAMICS Initial Data peni 5112 STI3 5114 mmi OO nit ameh 02 Q2 CH LIBRARY CURRENT CURVE CURRENT TYPE 1 CURRENT This parameter displays the currently selected channel gate type Gate or Ducking 2 CURRENT CURVE This graph displays the current channel gate curve 3 GR meters These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the gate and the post gate levels of the currently selected channel and its available pair partner 4 Type amp Curve section The type Gate or Ducking and curve of the currently selected memory is displayed here Tip If you selected an ST IN Channel 1 4 Aux Out 1 8 Bus Out 1 8 or Stereo Out that does not feature gate the 01V96 indicates XXX has no Gate in which XXX represents a channel name 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers then press the SEL buttons to select channels You can now store the selected channel gate settings or recall the gate library memories to S channels For details on storing and recalling memories see General Library Operation 3 on page 171
284. c tion 1 then rotate the Parameter wheel to select the MMC destination The following ports and slot are available as the MMC destination MIDI oricui MIDI port USB icem USB port S SPOT canh Slot with an MY8 mLAN mLAN card installed If USB or SLOT is selected move the cursor to the adjacent parameter box on the right and select one of eight ports Move the cursor to the DEVICE ID parameter box then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the 01V96 MMC Device ID to the same ID number as the exter nal device MMC commands are effective on devices that use the same Device ID Therefore the 01V96 s MMC Device ID needs to match the ID of the devices you wish to control To start remote control press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Machine page appears iti STI1 STI2 Suis 5114 STI SUL OO Ga i G3 G3 61 G1 2 0 a a n ga 211 5 TIME CODE 00 00 00 00 This page contains the following parameters 0 LOCATE TIME section This section enables you to set the locate points LOCATE 1 8 These buttons locate the positions specified by the TIME val ues on external machines t REZ ZW This Return To Zero button locates the zero timecode position on external machines TIME sse Locate points are specified in hour minute second frame for mat CAPTURE
285. channels appears DIY 1 16 page This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input Channels 1 16 DIY 17 32 page This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input Channels 17 32 The parameters on these two pages and the procedure for setting them are the same INS DLY Initial Data 5112 5113 STI4 OO um INPUT 1 16 DELAY DELAY SCALE Q gt nese rom EET 430 amp 3 34005 CE msec 0 0 9 MIX 100 1 100 100 1 1 100 100 FE GRIN i ex 9 10 11 12 15 14 i me Ger Gen en msecl G G samriel MIX 100 100 1 100 100 100 100 100 FB GAIN k AS E INSERT DLvI 16 Q DELAY SCALE The following buttons determine the units of the delay value shown below the msec value meter osse see Units are set to meters feet usce Units are set to feet sample Units are set to samples beat Units are set to beats frame Units set to timecode frames 2 GANG button When this button is turned on highlighted the delay time for each channel in a chan nel pair can be set simultaneously W
286. ct a Layer that contains the desired channels then press the channel SOLO buttons The channel SOLO button indicators and the SOLO SOLO indicator light up Only the soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Monitor outputs Tip If the SEL MODE parameter is set to Mix Solo on the DIO Setup Monitor page you can solo multiple Channels simultaneously 4 To solo and monitor Output Channels press the LAYER MASTER button then press the channel SOLO buttons Input and Output Channels Aux Out 1 8 Bus Out 1 8 cannot be solo monitored simul taneously For example if you solo an Input Channel then solo an Output Channel the first solo channel is cancelled If you solo an Output Channel first then solo an Input Channel canceling the Input Chan nel s solo will activate the Output Channel s solo 5 You can unsolo all soloed channels by pressing all illuminated channel SOLO buttons The button indicators turn off You can also unsolo all soloed channels by pressing the SOLO CLEAR button 01V96 Owner s Manual Surround 135 12 Surround This chapter describes surround panning which determines how Input Channel signals are panned within and across the stereo field Using Surround Pan About Surround Pan The Surround Pan function places a sound image within a two dimensional field using a multi channel playback system and pans the image to the front rear left and r
287. ction enables you to set the tempo and interval of the selected effects and displays certain parameters only when certain effect types are selected Use the parameter control on the left side of this section to adjust the value between 25BPM and 300BPM When the MIDI CLK button is on the 01V96 updates the TEMPO data BPM based on the MIDI Clock information received at the MIDI IN port You can also specify the tempo by moving the cursor to the TAP TEMPO button and double clicking the ENTER button The 01V96 calculates the tempo based on the time interval between your two taps clicks on the ENTER button Tip If the Freeze effect is selected the TEMPO section displays the record and playback but tons for using the effect the recording data condition and a progress bar that indicates the current status 7 Meters These meters indicate the input or output levels of the currently selected effects proces sor Select the IN button or OUT button to display the input levels or output levels respectively Tip You also view the input and output levels of the effects processors on the Meter Effect 1 4 pages see page 34 Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to adjust the setting You can store the edited settings as a new program in the Effects library see page 175 Note You cannot change the effects type on this page To c
288. ction on the top panel to directly control certain parameters for the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 Setting the Levels Move the STEREO fader to adjust the Stereo Out levels Press the ON button in the STE REO section to turn the Stereo Out on or off To set Bus Out 1 8 levels press the MASTER button in the LAYER section to select the Master layer then move faders 9 16 At this time you can turn Bus Out 1 8 on or off using the ON 9 16 buttons EQ ing and Balancing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs 1 Press the SEL button of the bus to which you want to apply EQ or set the level balance 2 To adjust the EQ of the currently selected bus select the desired band by pressing one of the following buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL section HIGH button HIGH band H MID button HIGH MID band L MID button LOW MID band LOW button LOW band 3 Usethe Q FREQUENCY and GAIN controls to adjust the Q frequency and gain of the band selected in Step 2 See page 84 for more information on EQ 4 To adjust the Stereo Out Balance parameter use the PAN control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section Note If you select Aux Out 1 8 or Bus Out 1 8 the PAN control is disabled 01V96 Owner s Manual 105 Pairing Buses or Aux Sends Pairing Buses or Aux Sends You can pair adjacent odd even this order buses or Aux Sends for stereo operation Paired b
289. ctor outputs consumer format IEC 60958 digital audio You can patch any Bus outs or Input channel Direct Outs to this output page 125 COAXIAL ADAT IN connector This TOSLINK connector accepts 8 channel ADAT optical format signals which can be patched to any Input Channel page 121 OUT connector This TOSLINK connector outputs an 8 channel ADAT optical format signal You can patch any Bus Outs or Input Channel Direct outs to this output page 123 SLOT This slot allows you to install an optional mini YGDAI Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface I O card This card offers AD DA conversion and various analog I O options and digital I O interfaces in all the popular digital audio interconnect formats including AES EBU ADAT and Tascam You can patch signals input at these card connectors to any Input Channels or Insert Ins see page 122 You can patch the card outputs to Bus Outs or Input Channel Direct Outs see page 125 The following mini YGDAI I O cards are currently available Card Format In Out Resolution Sampling Rate Connectors MY8 AD 20 bit 44 1 48 kHz 8 Phone jack balanced x8 MY8 AD24 Analog in 24 bit 44 1 48 kHz MY4 AD 4 XLR 3 31 type balanced x4 MY8 AD96 8 24 bit 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz 25 pin D sub 01V96 Owner s Manual O I evbid 8 B 72 Chapter 6 Analog I O amp Digital I O
290. d Intended to prevent diffusion of the sound 24 SamplingPerc COMPAND S Compressor for making sampled percussion sound like real acoustic percussion 25 Sampling BD COMP A variation on preset 24 intended for sampled bass drum sounds 26 Sampling SN COMP A variation on preset 25 intended for sampled snare drum sounds 27 Hip Comp COMPAND S A variation on preset 26 intended for sampled loops and phrases 28 Solo Vocal1 COMP Compressor for use with main vocals 29 Solo Vocal2 COMP A variation on preset 28 30 Chorus COMP A variation on preset 28 intended for choruses 01V96 Owner s Manual S v a 182 Chapter 16 Libraries No Preset Name Type Description 31 Click Erase EXPAND Expander for removing a click track that may bleed through from a musician s headphones 32 Announcer COMPAND H Hard kneed compander for reducing the level of the music when an announcer speaks 33 Limiter1 COMPAND S A soft kneed compander with a slow release 34 Limiter2 COMP A peak stop compressor Compressor for reducing the overall volume level Use 35 Total Comp1 COMP it on the stereo output during mixdown or with paired Input or Output Channels 36 Total Comp2 COMP A variation on preset 35 but with more compression EQ Library This library enables you to store and recall EQ settings for Input Channels Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 and Stereo Out
291. d R controls are set to the same value and linked together 8 ST LINK Turning on this button links the surround pan parameters of two Input Channels that are currently displayed on the page Stereo Link function You can link the surround pan parameters of two channels regardless of whether they are paired 9 PATTERN When Input Channels are linked by the Stereo Link function the seven patterns select able here determine how the linked surround pan moves via the Parameter wheel and the INC DEC buttons 3 Select one of seven trajectory patterns by turning on the corresponding tra jectory pattern button The following patterns are available sound image moves between left and right E 36 F40 5640 F56 01V96 Owner s Manual Surround Panning 143 The sound image moves between front and rear E Ed Ed 36 40 R40 856 The sound image moves from front left to rear right With this pattern you can also fine tune the trajectory by using the WIDTH DEPTH OFFSET and OFFSET parameters R36 F36 2 12 8 844 F16 4120 tF16 amp ut The sound image moves from front right to rear left With this pattern you can also fine tune the trajectory using the WIDTH DEPTH OFFSET and OFFSET parameters ued
292. d Returns or by inserting them into specific channels This section describes how to use internal Effects processor 1 via Aux Send 1 and apply reverb to the track signals 1 Pressthe DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Effect page appears PRTCH Initial Data 571257135714 ci eur 0 oO EFFECT4 BD REUERB PLRTE R This page enables you to patch the inputs and outputs of Effects processors 1 4 By default Aux Send 1 is patched to the input of Effects processor 1 and the output of Effects processor 1 is patched to ST IN Channel 1 L and as shown in the diagram above Tip If the patch for internal Effects processor 1 is different from the above use the Parameter wheel or INC DEC buttons and the ENTER button to change the patch 2 Make sure that the ON button for ST IN Channel 1 in the ST IN section is turned on 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS EFFECT button repeatedly until the Effect 1 Lib page appears EFFECT 0 Initial Data CH1 CH1 EFFECT Reverb Hall REVERB HALL IN ZOUT EDIT PATCH No LIBRARYTITLE 6 Gate Reverb 5 Early Ref J 4 Reverb Plate EFFECT 3 Reverb Stage 1IN ZOLIT The Effect FX1 Lib page enables you to recall effect programs to be used by Effects proces sor 1 from the Effects library and store the current effects settings of Effects processor 1 to the Effects
293. d dd Minute Measure L DATA Oddddddd dd Second Beat Oddddddd dd Frame Clock EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 33 Parameter request Remote Time Counter Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received the Time Counter information is transmitted on the Rx CH channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds When the second byte of Address is received on 0x7F data transmission will be halted immediately disable Transmission If Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message is retransmitted without change STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00001101 OD 01996 ADDRESS 00100010 22 Remote Time counter Oddddddd dd O Transmission request Ox7F Transmission stop request EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 01V96 Owner s Manual 323 Appendix D Options Rack Mounting the 01V96 Using RK1 Rack Mount Kit You can rack mount the 01V96 using an optional RK1 Rack Mount Kit 1 Hold one of the brackets against one side of the 01V96 so that the bracket ear projects to the side and align three holes on the bracket with the holes on the side of the 01V96 as shown in the illustration below 2 Affix the
294. d pan either independently of normal panpots or in unison with them Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes To configure the surround environment select 3 1 5 1 or 6 1 Surround mode on the 01V96 and connect a digital MTR or multi channel monitoring system to the 01V96 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Surr Mode page appears PRN ROUTE Initial CHi CHi 00 SURROUND MODE 117 Data 5 SURR BUS SETUP D SURROUND MODE This parameter enables you to select a Surround mode by using the following buttons The button that is turned on highlighted indicates the currently selected Surround mode STEREO The 01V96 uses normal stereo mode default E DM Selects 3 1 Surround mode Selects 5 1 Surround mode mL Selects 6 1 Surround mode 2 PAN SURR LINK When this button is turned on Input Channel panpots and stereo surround panning are linked 3 SURRA BUS SETUP Press this button to display the Surr Bus Setup page which enables you to change the Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment 01V96 Owner s Manual Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes 137 Move the cursor to the Surround mode button you want to use When you move the cursor to one of these buttons speaker icons appear indicating a typ ical listening position and the Surround Channel to Bus O
295. d right 3 t parameter box This parameter box enables you to move the surround pan setting of the selected chan nel front and rear 8 To move the sound image of each channel on these pages move the cursor to the desired channel then rotate the Parameter wheel The pan setting of the channel changes along the trajectory pattern Press ENTER to dis play the currently selected channel s CH Edit page 01V96 Owner s Manual Grouping Channels amp Linking Parameters 147 13 Grouping Channels amp Linking Parameters This chapter describes how to group faders or ON buttons for multiple channels and link the EQ or compressor parameters for simultaneous operation Grouping amp Linking On the 01V96 you can group faders or ON buttons for multiple Input Channels Input Channels 1 32 ST IN Channels 1 4 or multiple Output Channels Bus 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 Stereo Out and link the EQ or compressor parameters The following elements can be grouped or linked within Input Channels or Output Chan nels Fader group Input Channel or Output Channel faders or level controls can be grouped There are eight Input Channel Fader groups and four Output Channel Fader groups When channel faders or level controls are grouped operating any one of them enables you to control the level of the other grouped faders or level controls while maintaining the relative level differences Mute group Input Channel or Output Channel ON
296. delay time LEVEL L 100 to 100 Left channel delay level LEVEL C 100 to 100 Center channel delay level LEVEL R 100 to 100 Right channel delay level S D HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 2 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 2 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L NOTE C 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY C NOTE R 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R NOTE FB 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB DLY 1 01V96 Owner s Manual ffi F h ddd tempo setting h J J d d Maximum value depends on the 257 Effects Parameters ECHO Two input two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel feedback delay time FB DLY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel feedback delay time Left to right channel feedback gain plus values for nor L gt R FBG 99 to 49996 mal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed back Right to left channel feedback gain plus values for n
297. der group C FADER GROUP CH1 32 psrins 1224 55678 1011142 12141516 12 EHRELE F Tip f you add one channel from a pair to a group the pair partner is automatically added to the group You can also select a channel on another layer by switching layers 4 In the same way press the SEL button for other channels you wish to add to the group The relative level of the faders for the grouped channels is determined by the position of the faders when the channels were added to the group The On Off status of the grouped channels is determined by the ON button status when the channels were added to the group 5 To turn a group on off move the corresponding button in the ENABLE column then press ENTER When the group Enable button is turned off the corresponding group is temporarily can celled 6 To use a fader group operate one of the faders or level controls for the grouped channels Note Ifyou wish to change the relative level balance between the grouped channels while this page is displayed first turn off the Enable button or remove the channels for which you want to change the level from the group If other pages are displayed press and hold down the SEL button for the desired channels to temporarily remove them from the group then change the level balance 7 Touse a mute group press one of the ON buttons for the grouped chan n
298. ders PAN The rotary controls and faders enable you to adjust the contin kal uously variable parameter values including Input Channel lev Rei els and effects parameters Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a rotary control or fader you want to adjust then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the value 8 85 Buttons The buttons enable you to turn certain functions on nes enabled or off disabled Move the cursor to the appropri ate button then press the ENTER button to turn the func ma tion on highlighted or off The buttons also enable you to select one of two options or to execute certain functions Parameter Boxes The parameter boxes enable you to select one of multiple options Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a parameter box then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the setting You may need to press the ENTER button to confirm a change in certain parameter boxes If you edit a value in this type of parameter box the value flashes Press the ENTER button to confirm the change and the flashing stops If you move the cursor to other parameters while the edited value is flashing the edit is cancelled 01V96 Owner s Manual 521524 w 30 Chapter 3 Operating Basics Confirmation Messages For certain functions the 01V96 prompts you for confirmation be
299. device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received the attribute of the specified memory library will be changed Transmission Inresponse to a request a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the Rx CH If Parameter change ECHO is ON this message will be retransmitted without change STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010100 14 Function call 0000 Of attribute Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low DATA Ottttttt tt attribute protect 0x2000 normal 0x0000 Ottttttt tt EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive function number SCENE LIB ATTRIBUTE 0x00 0 99 0 response only EQ LIB ATTRIBUTE 0x01 1 128 1 40 response only GATE LIB ATTRIBUTE 0x02 1 128 1 4 response only COMP LIB ATTRIBUTE 0x03 1 128 1 36 response only EFF LIB ATTRIBUTE 0x04 1 128 1 52 response only CHANNEL LIB ATTRIBUTE 0x06 0 128 0 response only INPATCH LIB ATTRIBUTE 0x07 0 32 0 response only OUTPATCH LIB ATTRIBUTE 0x08 0 32 0 response only 01V96 Owner s Manual 320 Appendix C MIDI 2 8 3 20 Parameter request Function call attribute Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB
300. dicators Function Mode DAW AUTO WRITE Auto write DAW AUTO TOUTCH ato touch Flashing red Record Ready Red Recording DAW AUTO LATCH Auto latch DAW AUTO READ Auto read Illuminated steadily DAW AUTO OFF Auto off Off 01V96 Owner s Manual 0430u0 202 Chapter 17 Remote Control Nuendo Remote Layer You can remotely control Nuendo using the Remote Layer Configuring Computers 1 Connect the 01V96 to your computer using a USB cable and install the required USB driver included on the 01V96 CD ROM Refer to the Studio Manager installation guide for more information on installing the driver 2 Launch Nuendo select the Device Setup menu and set up Nuendo so that the 01V96 can communicate with the software Refer to the Nuendo User s Manual for more information on setting up the software Configuring the 01V96 1 Refer to page 188 to configure the DIO Setup MIDI HOST page 2 Press the LAYER REMOTE button to set the TARGET parameter to Nuendo You can now remotely control Nuendo using the Remote Layer Other DAW Remote Layer You can remotely control DAW software that supports the Pro Tools protocol Configuring Computers 1 Connect the 01V96 to your computer using a USB cable and install the required USB driver included on the 01V96 CD ROM Refer to the Studio Manager installation guide for more information on installing the driver 2 Launch and set up the
301. dit page Effects Processor 4 FX4 Edit page These Edit pages contain the following effect parameters EFFECT Initial Data 8 5112 STI3 5114 CH5 rm ax EFFECT o gps DELAY a UND 2 TEMPO Toog 40822 120 spm TEMPO DE FB GAIN HI RATIO 5o ens Io HPF NOTE Thru OS Ta O 2 EDIT fi EDIT xd EDIT fis D EFFECT NAME This parameter displays the name of the effect program currently used by the effects processor 2 TYPE This parameter displays the type of effect program currently used by the effects proces sor The configuration of the effect program is displayed below this parameter button Move the cursor to this parameter then press ENTER to display the Library page for the selected effects processor button Move the cursor to this button then press ENTER to display the Patch Effect page which enables you to assign signals to the inputs and outputs of Effects processors 1 4 5 MIX BALANCE This parameter knob enables you to set the balance between wet and dry signals When the parameter is set to 096 only the dry signal is heard When set to 10096 only the wet signal is heard Turn on the BYPASS button to bypass the currently selected effects pro cessor 01V96 Owner s Manual 53299 1 H 158 Chapter 14 Internal Effects 6 TEMPO This se
302. dly until the DIO Setup Cascade page appears then adjust the Attenua tors using the parameter controls The DIO Setup Cascade page enables you to adjust the level of signals input to the Cascade Bus using the dedicated attenuators You can also turn the Cascade Buses on or off using the buttons below the parameter controls 01V96 Owner s Manual Cascading Consoles 237 DIO SETUP Initial Data 51125113 5714 0 5 602 G BUSi BUSZ BUSS BUSS BUS6 BUS BUSS 12 3 5 OFF OFF FF GFF RLIX1 RUXZ RUXS RUX4 RUXS RUXe AUX AUXS 4 4 BB BB GdB GdB BB Ooh 5 5010 OFF supe cascan Stugorangager i DAH REMOTE u R CASCADE LINK 01101 Eme 8 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly to display the DIO Setup MIDI Host page then set the Cascade Link J parameter to MIDI 9 Repeat Step 8 for the master unit After Steps 8 and 9 the slave unit will be able to transmit and receive MIDI messages 10 To match the parameters of both 01V96s locate the DIO Setup MIDI Host page DRH B E the copy source unit U A LAYER Move the cursor to the TRANSMIT button CASCADE LINK for the SYNC parameter then press L syn ENTER Data suc
303. e FREQ R h h J J d lt s REV gt CHORUS One input two output reverb and chorus effects in series Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 2 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 2 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and chorused reverb balance 0 all chorused REV BAL reverb 100 all reverb 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0 100 Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0 100 Pitch modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 FAP UU F h h J J J d os 01V96 Owner s Manual 266 Appendix A Parameter Lists REV FLANGE One input two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency
304. e or library memory Patch Confirmation If this check box is on a confirmation message appears when you edit the Input and Output Patches Pair Confirmation If this check box is on a confirmation message appears when you create or cancel a pair L R Nominal Pan If this check box is on left odd and right even signals will be at nominal level 0 dB when Input Channels and ST IN Channels are panned hard left or hard right If this check box is off the signal level rises by 3 dB Fast Meter Fall Time If this check box is on the level meters fall more quickly DIO Warning If this check box is on a warning message appears when any errors are detected in digital audio signals received at the Slot or 2TR Digital Inputs MIDI Warning If this check box is on a warning message appears when any errors are detected in the incoming MIDI messages 01V96 Owner s Manual suonounj 228 Chapter 19 Other Functions Initial Data Nominal If this check box is on Input Channel faders and ST IN Channel level controls are set to nominal 0 dB when you recall Scene 0 If this check box is off they are set to o Scene MEM Auto Update If this check box is on you can use the Scene Memory Auto Update function see page 165 Cascade COMM Link If this check box is on various functions and parameters are linked between cascaded 01V96s See page 234 for more information on cascade connection When the c
305. e that the P WHEEL MODE param eter indicates SCRUB or SHUTTLE You can check the Scrub Shuttle function status by viewing the corresponding User Defined button indicator Automation If you assign a parameter that controls Pro Tools Automation mode such as DAW Auto Read DAW Auto Touch etc to one of the User Defined buttons you can control the Auto mation settings for each channel by using that User Defined button See page 231 for more information on assigning parameters to User Defined buttons Press the STEREO OUT channel SEL button The button indicator lights up and the Channel 1 16 SEL buttons become available for the Automation mode setting Press the desired channel SEL buttons while pressing the programmed User Defined but ton to switch the corresponding channels Automation settings While the channel SEL buttons are available for the Automation mode setting pressing the SEL buttons will cause the Fader Touch or Untouch command to be transmitted to Pro Tools This is useful for Automation punch in and out recording transmitted Note Operating a fader also causes the Fader Touch command to be transmitted Also when ever the transport mode changes such as Play and Stop the Fader Untouch command is Depending on the currently selected Automation mode the channel SEL button indica tors operate as follows User Defined Keys Pro Tools Automation SEL Button In
306. e the page is located to display the page tab then press the corresponding F1 F4 but ton If display page groups contain more than four pages either the left or right arrow appears To display the currently hidden tabs press the Right or Left 4 Tab Scroll button You can also select a page from a page group as follows Selecting the next page in a page group Press the button you selected in Step 1 repeatedly This enables you to select a page that has a hidden tab To select the previous page in a page group Press and hold down the button you selected in Step 1 The screen steps back through the pages one by one Release the button when the desired page is displayed This enables you to select a page that has a hidden tab To select the first page in the group Double click the button you selected in Step 1 01V96 Owner s Manual Display Interface 29 4 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor a bold frame to a button parameter box rotary control or fader so that you can change the value Tip The01V96 remembers the current page and parameter when you selecta new page group If you return to the previous page group the 01V96 displays the correct page with the same parameter selected You can also select a page by using the controls or buttons on the top panel see page 226 Display Interface This section describes how to use the display interface Rotary Controls amp Fa
307. ed channel input levels or the Bus Out or Aux Out levels STEREO Section 1 SEL button SEL Selects the Stereo Out ON button Turns the Stereo Out on or off 3 STEREO fader This 100mm motorized fader adjusts the final output level of the Stereo Out STEREO 01V96 Owner s Manual Control Surface 17 ST IN Section O aes s SEL SEL 3 c 5010 5010 0 12 12 ON ST IN 1 8 STIN 2 1 CD ST IN button This button selects an ST IN channel pair ST IN Channels 1 amp 2 or 3 amp 4 which you can control using the buttons and controls in the ST IN section The indicators to the right of the button indicate the available ST IN channels 2 SEL buttons These buttons select the ST IN channel you want to control 8 SOLO buttons These buttons solo the selected ST IN channels 4 ON buttons These buttons turn the ST IN channels on or off 5 Level controls These controls adjust the ST IN channel levels FADER MODE Section N FADER MODE e e e AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 c e e e AUX5 AUXG AUX7 AUXB e HOME METER CD AUX 1 AUX 8 buttons These buttons enable you to select the Aux Send you wish to control Pressing one of these buttons switches the Fader mode s
308. ed for vocals with gate Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Plate reverb simulation with gate Early Ref EARLY REF Early reflections without the subsequent reverb Gate Reverb GATE REVERB Gated early reflections Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE Gated reverse early reflections No Preset Name Type Description 8 Mono Delay MONO DELAY Simple mono delay 9 Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Simple stereo delay 10 Mod delay MOD DELAY Simple repeat delay with modulation 11 Delay LCR DELAY LCR 3 tap left center right delay 12 Echo ECHO Stereo delay with crossed left right feedback Preset Name Type Description Chorus CHORUS Chorus Flange FLANGE Flanger Symphonie svMPHoNIe complex modulation han chon Phaser PHASER 16 stage stereo phase shifter Auto Pan AUTO PAN Auto panner TREMOLO TREMOLO Tremolo HQ Pitch HQ PITCH Mono pitch shifter producing stable results Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shifter Rotary ROTARY Rotary speaker simulation Ring Mod RING MOD Ring modulator Mod Filter MOD FILTER Modulated filter Guitar Effects No Preset Name Type Description 26 Dyna Filter 24 Distortion DISTORTION Distortion 25 Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation Dynamic Effects No Preset Name Type Description DYNA FILTER Dynamically controlled filter
309. ee Hard 1 2 3 4 5 6 points Expander Attack 0 ms 120 ms 1 ms step 5 ms 42 3 s 160 points 48 kHz pelea 6 5 46 0 s 160 points 44 1 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s 160 points 96 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s 160 points 88 2 kHz 01V96 Owner s Manual 288 Appendix B Specifications Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB 0 1 dB step Ratio x 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 5 6 8 10 20 15 points Out gain 18 dB to 0 dB 0 1 dB step Width 1 dB 90 dB 1 dB step Sompander H Attack 0 ms 120 ms 1 ms step 5 ms 42 3 s 160 points 48 kHz Release 6 5 46 0 s 160 points 44 1 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s 160 points 96 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s 160 points 88 2 kHz Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB 0 1 dB step Ratio x 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 5 6 8 10 20 15 points Out gain 18 dB to 0 dB 0 1 dB step Width 1 dB 90 dB 1 dB step Sompander s Attack 0 ms 120 ms 1 ms step 5 ms 42 3 s 160 points 48 kHz 6 ms 46 0 s 160 points 44 1 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s 160 points 96 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s 160 points 88 2 kHz Libraries Effect library EFFECT 1 4 Presets 44 User memories 84 Compressor library Presets 36 User memories 92 Gate library Presets 4 User memories 124 EQ library Presets 40 User memories 160 Channel library Presets 2 User memories 127 i Presets 1 Input patch library
310. ee page 33 and displays the corresponding Aux page The selected button s indicator lights up You can now adjust the send level of signals routed from Input Channels to the correspond ing Aux buses by using the faders 2 HOME button This button recalls Meter pages that display Input Channel levels or Output Channel Bus Out Aux Out Stereo Out levels see page 34 01V96 Owner s Manual S DLNS IN 18 Chapter 2 Control Surface amp Rear Panel DISPLAY ACCESS Section m 55 6 SCENE DIO SETUP MIDI 7 5 S INSERT _ PAN PAIR 8 DELAY ROUTING GROUP DYNAMICS EQ EFFECT VIEW SCENE button This button displays a Scene page enabling you to store and recall Scenes see page 161 2 DIO SETUP button This button displays a DIO Setup page enabling you to set up the 01V96 including digital input and output setup and remote control setup see pgaes 72 188 3 MIDI button This button displays a MIDI page enabling you to make MIDI settings see page 215 4 UTILITY button This button displays a Utility page enabling you to use the internal oscillators and view information about installed optional cards INSERT DELAY button This button displays INS DLY page enabling you to switch the signal phase set the signal to be inserted or set the delay parameters
311. eeeeee ee ee Invert L 4 de 41 amp Ox7F 00100000 20 EOX 11110111 7 End of exclusive 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA 01001100 4C l 00000000 00 Obbbbbbb bb b 0 3 bank no 1 4 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 01V96 Owner s Manual 312 Appendix C MIDI 2 8 2 7 User Defined Keys bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will in some cases change if the same bank is being used STATUS 1 ID No 0 SUB STATUS FORMAT No O0 COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 110000 FO 000011 43 0000nnnn 0 111110 7 ch System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump data count ch 128 cl cl 01001100 4c l 01001101 4D 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01010110 56 V 00000000 00 Obbbbbbb bb b 0 7 bank no A H BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number DATA Oddddddd ds User define key data of block bb Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee Invert L 4 de 1 amp Ox7F EOX 11110111 7 End ofexclusive 2 8 2 8 User Defined Keys bulk dump request format The second a
312. een and adjust them individually 1 Press the FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 8 buttons to select the Aux 2 Make sure that the 01V96 displays the Aux Send page This page enables you to adjust the level of the signals routed from each Input Channel to the Aux selected in Step 1 If the Send page is not displayed repeatedly press the button that you pressed in Step 1 until the Send page appears POST SEND __2 ___ __ VIEW I 16 ZAUIEWT PST e Aux Send rotary controls These controls adjust the Aux Send level of the Input Channels The current numeric levels appear below the rotary controls e PRE POST These buttons enable you to specify the Aux signal source points The PRE buttons send pre fader signals and the POST buttons send post fader signals 01V96 Owner s Manual i ui g 114 Chapter 9 Aux Outs Aux Sends have two operating modes that determine how signals are sent Fixed Aux Send levels are fixed and Variable Aux Send levels are variable GLOBAL The GLOBAL PRE and POST buttons enable you to set all Input Channels for the selected Aux to pre fader or post fader simultaneously Note In Fixed mode Aux Send ON OFF buttons appear instead of the Aux Send rotary con trols PRE POST buttons and GLOBAL PRE POST buttons These ON OFF buttons turn on or off each Input Channel for the currently selected Aux Send Move the cursor to the FIXED or VARIABLE button in the
313. el Library Channel library enables you to store and recall Input Channel and Output Channel param eter settings The library contains two preset memories and 127 user readable amp writable memories You can recall only the settings for the currently selected channels from the Channel library For example you cannot recall Input Channel 1 32 settings to ST IN Channels 1 4 Bus 1 8 Aux 1 8 or Stereo Out with the exception that memories 0 and 1 can be recalled to any channels Follow the steps below to use the Channel library 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS VIEW button repeatedly until the View Library page appears VIEH Initial Data ey EY m aao 0 O CHANNEL LIBRARY SURROUND MODE AUX CONFIG 1 2 2 STEREO 1 3 4 MONOxZ 5 6 MONOxZ 7 8 MONOxZ E 1 16 AUX fld D SEL CH This parameter indicates the currently selected channel 2 CURRENT CONFIGURATION section If the currently selected channel is an Input Channel 1 32 or ST IN Channels 1 4 its Surround mode and Aux configuration information is displayed here 3 Level meters These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected channel and the available part ner 4 STORED FROM This parameter indicates the channel for which the settings were originally stored in the selected library memory If the currently selected library memory contains Input Chan nel 1 32 and ST IN Channels
314. els channels in the group switch their on off status Note While a mute group is enabled you cannot turn a subset of the grouped channels on or off Ifyou wish to turn a subset of the grouped channels on or off first turn off the Enable button or remove the channels you wish to turn on or off from the group 01V96 Owner s Manual x sjauueyD BuidnoiS 150 Chapter 13 Grouping Channels amp Linking Parameters Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters Follow the steps below to link EQ or compressor parameters for Input Channels or Output Channels This function enables you to set EQ or compressor parameters for multiple chan nels to the same values simultaneously 1 Pressthe DISPLAY ACCESS PAIR GROUP button repeatedly until one of the following pages appears In EQ page This page enables you to set EQ links for Input Channels 1 32 and ST IN Chan nels 1 4 e da Out EQ page This page enables you to set EQ links e h for Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 and Ste reo Out PRIR GRUP 00 Initial Data m HI cen OUTPUT EQUALIZER LINK p r S STEREO 1 49 7 1 OUT FADER OUT MUTE ZX IN EG 01V96 Owner s Manual Linking and Compressor Parameters 151 In Comp page This page enables you to set Compressor links i l for Inpu
315. eneral DAW You can remotely control DAW software that supports the pro tocol used by Pro Tools User Defined You can also assign MIDI messages to the faders or ON but tons to remotely control a connected MIDI device such as a synthesizer User Assignable Layer can combine the 01V96 channels to create a custom layer See page 229 for more information on this function Machine Control By using MIDI Machine Control commands and the DIO Setup Machine page you can control an external recording machine that is connected to the 01V96 MIDI port USB port or optional MY8 mLAN card installed in the slot Tip To control external devices from the 01V96 you can also use the User Defined buttons Refer to 19 Other Functions for more information 0430u0 01V96 Owner s Manual 186 Chapter 17 Remote Control Pro Tools Remote Layer The 01V96 features Remote Layer target especially designed for controlling Pro Tools Connections and Configuring Pro Tools Follow the steps below to connect the 01V96 to your computer via the USB port so that you can control Pro Tools from the 01V96 Note You cannot control Pro Tools via MIDI connections Be sure to connect your computer via the USB or an optional MY8 mLAN card installed in the 01V96 slot Configuring Windows Computers 1 Connect the 01V96 TO HOST USB port to a USB port on your
316. eption in the first parameter box and select a port for transmission in the next parameter box located to the right of the arrow If you select USB or SLOT specify the port number in the small parameter box adjacent to the port parameter box 8 MACHINE CONTROL section This section enables you to select a remote control method and a remote control port to control external devices that support MMC such as a hard disk recorder Select MIDI USB or SLOT available only when an optional mLAN card is installed for MMC command transfer If you select USB or SLOT specify the port number in the right parameter box 01V96 Owner s Manual DEVICE ID MIDI Port Setup 213 Specify the 01V96 s MMC Device ID MMC Device IDs iden tify connected devices enabling recognition during MMC transmission and reception 4 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section This section enables you to specify ports for various special functions Studio Manager In the left parameter box select MIDI or USB as the port used by the included Studio Manager software In the two small parameter boxes on the right specify a port number if you selected USB and an ID number Select USB or SLOT asa port for use with a DAW Specify in the right parameter box a port number pair 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 This parameter indicates the target currently selected for Remote Layer If the target is set to USER DEFINED you can select a MIDI message destin
317. er Solo Pre fader after pan Pan L R 127 positions Left 1 63 Center Right 1 63 Surround pan L R 127 x 127 positions 1 63 Center Right 1 63 x Front 1 63 Center Rear 1 63 LFE level L R 96 dB to 10 dB 256 step Routing STEREO 051 8 DIRECT OUT Metering Displayed on LCD Peak hold on off Level 0 to 96 dB 1 dB step On off OSCILLATOR Waveform Sine 100 Hz sine 1 kHz sine 10 kHz pink noise burst noise Routing BUS1 8 AUX1 8 STEREO L R STEREO OUT DA converter 24 bit linear 128 times oversampling fs 44 1 48 kHz 64 times over sampling fs 88 2 96 kHz 01V96 Owner s Manual 285 24 bit linear 128 times oversampling fs 44 1 48 kHz 64 times over MONITOR OUT DA converter sampling fs 88 2 96 kHz STEREO BUS1 8 AUX1 8 DIRECT OUT 1 32 INSERT OUT CH1 32 Output patch BUS1 8 AUX1 8 STEREO CASCADE OUT 051 8 AUX 1 8 STEREO OMNI OUT 1 4 SOLO DA converter 24 bit linear 128 times oversampling fs 44 1 48 kHz 64 times over sampling fs 88 2 96 kHz 2TR OUT DIGITAL Dither On off Word length 16 20 24 bit Output patch STEREO BUS1 8 AUX 1 8 DIRECT OUT 1 32 INSERT OUT CH 1 32 BUS 1 8 AUX 1 8 STEREO CASCADE OUT BUS 1 8 AUX 1 8 STEREO SOLO ADAT Output Dither On off Word length 16 20 24 bit Ou
318. erb time REV TYPE Hall Room Stage Plate Reverb type INI DLY 0 0 100 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio LO RATIO 0 1 2 4 Low frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spread DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density Balance of early reflections and reverb 0 E R BAL 70696 0 all reverb 100 all early reflections HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency 01V96 Owner s Manual M BAND Two input two output 3 band dynamics processor with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band 273 Effects Parameters Parameter Range Description LOW GAIN 96 0 to 412 0 dB Low band level MID GAIN 96 0 to 412 0 dB Mid band level HI GAIN 96 0 to 12 0 dB High band level For positive values the threshold of the high band is lowered PRESENCE values Vie apposite wl Wherisel 90 allies bar are affected the same CMP THRE 24 0 to 0 0 dB Compressor threshold CMP RAT 1 1 to 20 1 Compressor ratio CMP ATK 0 120 ms Compressor attack CMP REL 1 Compressor release time CMP KNEE 0 5 Compressor knee LOOKUP 0 0 100 0 ms Lookup delay CMP BYP OFF ON Compressor bypass L M XOVR 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low mid crossover frequency XOVR
319. es over sampling fs 88 2 96 kHz Input selector CH15 16 2TR IN for CH15 16 01V96 Owner s Manual 284 Appendix B Specifications Digital Input 2TR IN DIGITAL ADAT input Option Input SLOT Available cards Optional digital interface cards MY16 MY8 4 series Input Channel CH1 32 Stereo Input Channel CH1 4 Input patch Phase Normal reverse 3 On off Gate type Key in 12 ch Group 1 12 13 24 25 32 AUX1 8 On off Comp type Key in self Stereo Link Pre EQ pre fader post fader Attenuator 96 0 to 12 0 dB 0 1 dB step EQ 4 band 1 5 On off Delay 0 43400 samples On off Fader 100 mm motorized INPUT AUX1 8 Aux send On off AUX1 8 pre fader post fader Solo On off Pre fader after pan Pan 127 positions Left 1 63 Center Right 1 63 Surround pan 127 x 127 positions Left 1 63 Center Right 1 63 x Front 1 63 Center Rear 1 63 LFE level 96 dB to 10 dB 256 step Routing STEREO BUS1 8 DIRECT OUT Direct out Pre fader post fader Metering Displayed on LCD Input patch L R Peak hold on off Phase L R Normal reverse Attenuator L R 96 0 to 412 0 dB 0 1 dB step Equalizer PEQ TYPE1 On off zm 100 mm motorized Fader INPUT AUX1 8 send Aux send On off AUX1 8 pre fader post fad
320. es you to reset the parameter settings in the currently selected bank You can also assign MIDI messages to the parameter boxes manually without using the LEARN button Machine Control Function The 01V96 can control the transport functions and select tracks on external recording machines that support MMC by transmitting commands via the MIDI OUT port or USB port Note Controllable parameters vary depending on the connected devices Refer to the User s Manual for the external device for more information on controllable parameters 1 Refer to the diagram below for information on connecting the 01V96 to an external device MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN 2529 MMC supported machine 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears DIO SETUP Initial Data 5111 STI2 STI3 5114 STIL uno ec ec e SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Rx PORT Studio Manager Tx PORT DAW REMOTE CASCADE LINK MACHINE CONTROL TRRNSMIT REQUEST PORT DEVICE ID ET MIDI HOST MONITOR REMOTE ZX MACHINE 2 01V96 Owner s Manual Machine Control Function 209 3 Move the cursor to the PORT parameter box the MACHINE CONTROL se
321. et 0 Response 1 Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no data End of exclusive 01V96 Owner s Manual 318 Appendix C MIDI 2 8 3 11 Parameter request Cascade data Reception This message is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON Data received from a port that is assigned to Cascade Link and whose Device Number included in the SUB STATUS matches the Rx CH will be received for processing When this is received the value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a Parameter response STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS O0011nnnn 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL D digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00001111 OF Cascade data ee Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Oppppppp pp Parameter no cc Channelno EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 12 Parameter change Function call Library store recall Reception When this is received the specified memory library will be stored recalled If this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link the operation will be ex ecuted and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a Parameter Re sponse Transmission If Parameter change Tx is ON and you store or recall a memory library for which Progr
322. etering posi tion ST IN Channels 1 4 INPUT PATCH These stereo channels enable you to process stereo signals using the phase effect attenuator and EQ The following diagram illustrates the ST IN Channel 1 4 signal flow ST IN 1 4 8 dog 592224592 mmama HH 2 2 SOLO METER Tees ON LEVEL 7 4BAND o ATT Stereo Configuration PAN w 1 x xc x LFE PRE POST AUX J ____ o o 1 1 l ST IN Channels 1 4 feature the following parameters Phase ATT Attenuator 4 BAND EQ 4 band equalizer ON On Off LEVEL PAN AUX Aux Send level METER 01V96 Owner s Manual Setting the Input Channels from the Display 79 Refer to the description of Input Channels for more information on these parameters page 77 Tip You can store these channel parameter settings in the Channel library You can also store the Gate Compressor and EQ parameter settings to the corresponding libraries Setting the Input Channels from the Display To set the Input Channel parameters you can either move the cursor to the desired param eter on the display and change the value or operate the desired button or control on the top panel to directly cha
323. eters of paired channels excluding the Input Patch phase routing and pan parameters are linked Pairing Input Channels is useful when you are connecting ste reo sources such as a rhythm machine or synthesizer To pair adjacent odd even Input Channels press and hold the SEL button for one of the channels you wish to pair and press the SEL button for the adjacent channel The corresponding two channels are paired and the settings such as faders channel on off etc of the first channel are copied to the second channel Subsequently adjusting the linked parameters of one of the paired channels will adjust the parameters of its partner in the same way 01V96 Owner s Manual Initial Track Recording 51 Parameters copied ze 8 SEL O Tip You can still select one of the paired channels for control by pressing the corresponding SEL button When you select the channel the SEL button indicator lights up and the SEL button for the paired partner flashes You can also determine how to copy the parameter settings to the paired partner by using a special window see page 226 You can create or cancel pairs on the Pair Grup pages see page 93 You also group the faders ON buttons EQs or compressors of multiple channels see page 147 mE 2 cancel a pair press and hold the SEL button for one of the paired chan nels and press the
324. eters on the 01V96 to the conditions you wish to store as a Scene 2 Pressthe DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE button repeatedly until the Scene Scene page appears SCENE Initial Data 571257135714 CH1 CHi 0 OUO oO SCENE MEMORY Free 99 PATCH LINK TITLE INPUT U No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data Extra Mix Endins Mix 2nd Mix Vocal off Mix nO CO ONO CO 3 Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select a Scene memory move the cursor to one of the following buttons then press ENTER D TITLE EDIT Select this button to display the Title Edit window which enables you to edit a selected Scene title 2 RECALL This button recalls the contents of the selected Scene memory 8 STORE This button stores the current Scene to the selected Scene memory By default a confir mation window appears before you store the Scene 4 CLEAR This button deletes the contents of the selected Scene memory 5 PROTECT ON OFF This button switches on and off the write protection of the contents of the selected Scene memory A padlock icon amp appears next to the title of 5 memory that is write protected 6 Library list Scene memories 01 99 are listed in the library memory title list The titles of stored Scenes are indicated in the title column The message No Data appears in the title col umn o
325. f empty library memories The selected memory appears inside the dotted box between the and 4 marks 01V96 Owner s Manual Auto Scene Memory Update 165 7 PATCH LINK INPUT PATCH LINK OUTPUT These parameters indicate the Input and Output Patch library numbers selected at the time the Scenes were stored When you recall a Scene the linked Input or Output patch is recalled as well You can also move the cursor to the parameter boxes and change the library numbers Auto Scene Memory Update If the Scene MEM Auto Update check box on the Setup Preferl page see page 226 is turned on parameter edits are stored automatically in a Shadow memory which is avail able for each Scene This is called the Auto Update function If the Auto Update function is enabled parameter edits made after the Scene was recalled are stored in the Scene s Shadow memory When you again recall the Scene the contents of the Original and Shadow memories are recalled alternately Therefore even after you recall the Original Scene memory you can recall the edited version from Shadow memory to restore the most recent edits If the EDIT indicator appears at the top of the display the edited version from Shadow memory has been recalled i02 scene Display i02 scene 02 mmi Edit indicator Original Scene Shadow memory If a Shadow memory is recalled the edited version is stored when you store the Scene The contents of the
326. fad ers and connectors deteriorates over time The rate of deterioration depends on the oper ating environment and is unavoidable Consult your dealer about replacing defective components Using a mobile telephone near this unit may induce noise If noise occurs use the telephone away from the unit If the message WARNING Low Battery appears when you turn on this unit contact your dealer as soon as possible about replacing the internal data backup battery The unit will still operate correctly but data other than the presets will be lost Before replacing the batteries back up your data to a memory card or another unit by using MIDI Bulk Dump The digital circuits of this unit may induce a slight noise into nearby radios and TVs If noise occurs relocate the affected equipment When you change the wordclock settings on any device in your digital audio system some devices may output noise so turn down your power amps beforehand otherwise your speakers may be damaged Interference This unit uses high frequency digital circuits that may cause interference on radio and tele vision equipment located nearby If interference is a problem relocate the affected equip ment Using a mobile telephone near the unit may induce noise In this case use the telephone away from the unit Exclusion of Certain Responsibility Manufacturer importer or dealer shall not be liable for any incidental damages including personal injury or any ot
327. fects processor s return signal to Solo Safe you can monitor the soloed processed or wet signals 7 MONITOR TRIM This parameter enables you to trim the level of the monitoring signal in the range of 96 dB to 12 dB MONO This button switches the Monitor signal into mono Using the Monitor 1 Connect a monitoring system to the MONITOR OUT connectors monitor the signal via headphones connect headphones to the PHONES jack 2 Press the Monitor Source selector the MONITOR section to select the mon itoring signal source To monitor the 01V96 s internal signals turn off the selector the button should be raised To monitor the signals at the 2TR IN connectors turn on the selector the button should be pushed in E MONITOR 2TR IN 3 Adjustthe monitoring level using the MONITOR MONITOR LEVEL control while playing the sound sources To adjust the level of the monitoring signal via headphones turn the PHONES LEVEL control 01V96 Owner s Manual 134 Chapter 11 Monitoring Using the Solo Function You can solo and monitor Input Channels Aux Out 1 8 and Bus Out 1 8 using the SOLO buttons on the top panel 1 Pressthe DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Monitor page appears 2 Setthe SOLO parameter to On Set other parameters on the page if necessary 3 To solo and monitor Input Channels press the corresponding LAYER button to sele
328. filter gain SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 AP RU h h 4 h d 01V96 Owner s Manual 4 J 259 Effects Parameters PHASER Two input two output 16 stage phaser Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth u a OFFSET 0 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency offset PHASE 0 00 354 38 degrees Left and right modulation phase balance STAGE 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Number of phase shift stages LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 412 0 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH 50 0 2 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 FAP F ddd h J J d d AUTO PAN Two input two output autopanner Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth DIR 1 Panning direction WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 412 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQG 12 0 to 412 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQQ 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandw
329. fore executing the func tions as shown here CONF I RMAT ON Recall Scene 17 Move the cursor to YES and press ENTER to execute the function or move the cursor to NO and press ENTER to cancel If you take no action for awhile the confirmation window closes automatically and the function is not executed Title Edit Window The Title Edit window enables you to enter titles for Scene and library memories You can enter 4 12 or 16 characters depending on the item The figure on the left shows uppercase characters and various punctuation marks The fig ure on the right shows lowercase characters and numbers TITLE EDIT TITLE EDIT Data 1 Data PRESS OK TO STORE Lok PRESS STORE Use the cursor buttons to select characters and press the ENTER button to enter them into the title The cursor moves to the right automatically as each character is entered Use the Parameter wheel to move the cursor within the title Use the SHIFT LOCK button to select uppercase or lowercase characters and use the SPC button to enter a space To insert a space at the cursor position and move subsequent characters to the right move the cursor to the INS button and press ENTER To delete the character at the cursor position and move subsequent characters to the left move the cursor to the DEL button and press ENTER When you have finished move the cursor to the OK button then
330. g 01V96 Owner s Manual Monitoring 131 11 Monitoring This chapter explains how to set up monitoring and use the Solo function on the 01V96 Monitor The 01V96 features the stereo signal path to feed the monitors The monitoring signal source is patched to MONITOR OUT connectors L amp R and the PHONES connector The following diagram illustrates the monitoring signal flow STEREOL STEREOR SOLOL SOLOR SOLO TRIM SOLOL 5010 8 2 2TR IN 2 P RCA R 50 01080 MONTOR MONITOR OUT OUTPUT SOLO i LEVEL ua TE AUX1 8 amp i ny i o P MONITOR OUT P gt 949 z R PHONES i LEVEL 4 PS o PHONES SOLO bus This special bus routes soloed Input Channels to the Monitor outputs bypassing Bus 1 8 and the Stereo Bus OUTPUT SOLO This section routes soloed Output Channels Aux Out 1 8 Bus Out 1 8 to the Monitor outputs E Note Input and Output Channels cannot be solo monitored simultaneously The solo func tion for the most recently soloed channels is enabled MONITOR TRIM This section adjusts the monitoring signal level in the digital domain MONITOR OUT LEVEL Use the MONITOR MONITOR OUT control on the top panel to adjust the monitoring signal level in the analog domain e MONITOR 2TR IN Asa monitoring signal you can select either the
331. g SEL button then rotating the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN control 6 Raise the STEREO fader to O dB 7 While playing back the recording on the digital MTR from the beginning operate faders 1 16 to adjust the mix balance among the tracks EQ ing the track signals Select the desired channel by pressing the corresponding SEL button press the EQ but ton then press the F1 button to display the EQ Edit page see page 84 Alternatively adjust the EQ parameters using the buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL sec tion Compressing the track signals Select the desired channel by pressing the corresponding SEL button press the DYNAM ICS button then press the F4 button to display the Dynamics Comp Lib page and recall the desired compressor program see page 82 Press the DYNAMICS button then press the F3 button to display the Comp Edit page then edit the compressor parameters Gating the track signals Select the desired channel by pressing the corresponding SEL button press the DYNAM ICS button then press the F2 button to display the Dynamics Gate Lib page Then recall the desired gate program Press the DYNAMICS button then press the F1 button to dis play the Gate Edit page then edit the gate parameters 01V96 Owner s Manual 66 Chapter 5 Tutorial Using the Internal Effects The 01V96 features four internal multi effects processors that can be used via Aux Sends an
332. gh Mid Low 59 NO ASSIGN 60 NO ASSIGN 61 NO ASSIGN 62 NO ASSIGN 63 NO ASSIGN 64 F LO MID INPUT25 65 F LO MID INPUT26 66 EQ F LO MID INPUT27 67 F LO MID INPUT28 68 EQ F LO MID INPUT29 69 EQ F LO MID INPUT30 70 EQ F LO MID INPUT31 71 EQ F LO MID INPUT32 72 EQ F LO MID ST IN1 73 EQ F LO MID ST IN2 74 EQ F LO MID ST IN3 75 EQ F LO MID 5 4 76 NO ASSIGN 77 NO ASSIGN 78 NO ASSIGN 79 NO ASSIGN 80 NO ASSIGN 81 NO ASSIGN 82 NO ASSIGN 83 NO ASSIGN 84 NO ASSIGN 85 NO ASSIGN 86 NO ASSIGN 87 NO ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ Q LO MID INPUT25 90 EQ Q LO MID INPUT26 91 EQ Q LO MID INPUT27 92 EQ Q LO MID INPUT28 93 EQ Q LO MID INPUT29 94 EQ Q LO MID INPUT30 95 EQ Q LO MID INPUT31 102 EQ Q LO MID INPUT32 103 EQ Q LO MID ST IN1 104 EQ Q LO MID ST IN2 105 EQ Q LO MID ST IN3 106 EQ Q LO MID ST IN4 107 NO ASSIGN 108 NO ASSIGN 109 NO ASSIGN 110 NO ASSIGN 111 NO ASSIGN 112 NO ASSIGN 113 NO ASSIGN 114 NO ASSIGN 115 NO ASSIGN 116 NO ASSIGN 117 NO ASSIGN 118 NO ASSIGN 119 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL6 High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 1 EQ G LO MID H INPUT25 2 EQ G LO MID H INPUT26 3 EQ G LO MID H INPUT27 4 G LO MID H INPUT28 5 EQ G LO MID H INPUT29 6 EQ G LO MID H 0 7 G LO MID H INPUT31 8 EQ G LO MID H INPUT32 9 EQ G LO MID H ST IN1 10 EQ GLO MID
333. gnal or MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY 1 Filter frequency change decay speed TYPE LPF HPF BPF Filter type OFFSET 0 100 Filter frequency offset RESO 0 20 Filter resonance LEVEL 0 100 Output Level 1 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 5 fs 48 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s fs 88 2 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s fs 96 kHz 01V96 Owner s Manual 264 Appendix A Parameter Lists DYNA FLANGE Two input two output dynamically controlled flanger Parameter Range Description SOURCE INPUT MIDI Control source input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY 1 Decay speed OFFSET 0 100 Delay time offset LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 412 0 dB Low shelving filter gain F 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQG 12 0 to 412 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQ Q 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH 50 0 2 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH 12 0 to 412 0 dB High shelving filter gain 1 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 5 fs 48 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s fs 88 2 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s 45 96 kHz DYNA PHASER Two input two output dynamically controlled phaser Parameter Range Description SOURCE INPUT MIDI Control source input signal or MID
334. h an acoustic electric nylon string guitar A G Arpeg 1 Ideal for arpeggio playing on acoustic guitars A G 2 A variation on preset 22 Use with trumpets trombones or saxes When used with a single instru Brass Sec Ae ment try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH MID frequency Male Vocal 1 An EQ template for male vocals Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH MID parameters according to the voice quality Male Vocal 2 A variation on preset 25 An EQ template for female vocals Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH MID parameters according to the voice quality 28 Female Vo 2 A variation on preset 27 27 Female Vo 1 29 Chorus amp Harmo An EQ template for brightening choruses 30 Total EQ 1 ur mix during mixdown Sounds even better when used with a j 31 Total EQ2 A variation on preset 30 2 32 Total EQ 3 on preset 30 also be used with paired Input or Output 33 Bass Drum 3 A variation on preset 1 with low and mid range reduced 34 Snare Drum 3 A variation on preset 3 creating a thicker sound 35 Tom tom 2 A variation on preset 5 emphasizing the mid and high ranges 36 Piano 3 A variation on preset 13 37 Piano Low Emphasizes the low range of pianos recorded in stereo 38 Piano High Emphasizes the high range of pianos recorded in stereo 39 Fine EQ Cass Add clarity when recording to or from cassette tape 40 Narrator Ideal for
335. h as libraries and Scene memories the copy source unit is copied onto the other 01V96 via the MIDI ports If you select the REQUEST button instead of the TRANSMIT button for the SYNC parameter you can reverse the copy direction At this point Bus 1 8 Aux 1 4 and the Stereo Bus on both 01V96s are integrated and the data is output via Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 4 and the Stereo Out on the master unit If you solo channels on one of the 01V96s you can monitor the soloed signals via the Monitor outputs suonounj 01V96 Owner s Manual 238 Chapter 19 Other Functions Checking the Battery and the System Version The Utility Battery page enables you to check the condition of the internal mem ory backup battery and the system version number To locate this page press the DISPLAY ACCESS UTILITY button repeatedly UTILITY Initial Data giri 1 STI2 STI3 STI4 00 BATTERY CHECK D gt o a a Status Okay Yes l m Fine Uer 1 00 2 SCILLHTORZA CH STATUS USER DEF E F 3 D Status If the Status is Okay the battery has sufficient voltage for operation If the Status is Voltage Low ask your Yamaha dealer or authorized Yamaha service center to replace the battery as soon as possible Failure to replace a low battery may result in data loss Note Do not attempt to replace the battery yourself as a malfunction may occur
336. hange the effects type recall a pro gram that uses the desired effects type from the Effects library 01V96 Owner s Manual About Plug Ins 159 About Plug Ins If you installed a mini YGDAI card that supports the Effects function into Slot you can use plug in effects in addition to the internal effects processors You can patch Bus signals or channel insert outs to the plug in input The plug in output can be patched to Input Channels or channel insert ins To use the plug in effects press the EFFECT button repeatedly until the Effect P In Edit page appears For details on using plug ins refer to the owner s manual that came with the plug in card Softuare Version Hardware Revision 3 WWW waves As of February 2003 the 01V96 supports the following plug in cards Visit the Yamaha web site http www yamahaproaudio com for the latest information on compatible plug in cards j29Jj3 H 01V96 Owner s Manual 160 Chapter 14 Internal Effects 01V96 Owner s Manual Scene Memories 161 15 Scene Memories This chapter describes Scene memories which store 01V96 mix and effects settings About Scene Memories Scene memories enable you to store a snapshot of 01V96 channel mix settings and internal effects processor settings as a Scene in a special memory area There are 99 Scene memories and you can recall any Scene using the display pages or
337. he Stereo bus and Bus 1 8 signals are unaffected Mixdown Solo mode is useful when you wish to mute unsoloed Input Channels and feed soloed Input Channel signals to the Stereo bus during mixdown 8 SEL MODE This parameter determines how the Input Channels will be soloed when you press the SOLO button of each Channel There are two options MIX SOLO In Mix Solo mode any number of channels can be soloed simultaneously LAST SOLO In Last Solo mode only one channel can be soloed at a time by pressing the SOLO button The Solo function that was previ ously enabled for channels is automatically cancelled 4 LISTEN This parameter determines the source of the Input Channel Solo signal Pre Fader or Post Pan This parameter is effective only in Recording Solo mode 01V96 Owner s Manual Using the Monitor 133 5 SOLO TRIM This parameter enables you to trim the level of the Solo signal in the range of 96 dB to 12 dB 6 SOLO SAFE CHANNEL For Mixdown Solo mode Input Channels can be configured individually so that they are not muted when other Input Channels are soloed Solo Safe function Signals from Input Channels with the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL button turned on are always fed to the Stereo bus regardless of the channels Solo function status You can clear all Solo Safe settings by turning on the ALL CLEAR button Tip For example if you set the internal ef
338. he front to rear width of the selected tra jectory pattern OFFSET This parameter offsets the left to right direction of the selected trajectory pattern OFFSET 1 This parameter offsets the front to rear direction of the selected traJectory pattern 01V96 Owner s Manual 142 Chapter 12 Surround LFE This parameter control sets the level of the LFE Low Frequency Effects Channel signal routed to the subwoofer and appears only in 5 1 and 6 1 Surround modes 6 F R In 6 1 Surround mode F and R parameter controls appear The F parameter control determines how the Front Center signal is fed to the Left and Right channels and the R parameter control determines how the rear surround signal is fed to the Left and Right surround channels 6 DIV This parameter control instead of the F R parameter control appears in 3 1 or 5 1 Sur round mode and determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left Right and Center channels It is expressed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 10096 When you set the parameter to 100 the Center signal is fed to only the Center channel When you set the parameter to 0 the Center signal is fed to only the Left and Right channels When you set the parameter to 50 the Center signal is fed equally to the Left Right and Center channels 7 LINK This button is available only in 6 1 Surround mode When you turn on this button the F an
339. heck box is off only the Solo function is linked Auto Direct Out On If this check box is on and you change the channel Direct Out destination from to any other output the channel Direct Out is automatically enabled If you change the channel Direct Out destination from an output to the channel Direct Out is automatically dis abled Prefer2 page The Prefer2 page enables you to name the channel indicated on the display and adjust the display brightness DIO SETUP Initial Data 8712 SIS 5714 100 um 00 LPREFERENCES2 Short Name Channel ID Channel E Channel 10 B Channel Short Name 25 channei Cors Parameter ALL FADER SURR AUX 9 isetas Brishtness 3i LORD CLOCK FORMAT MA PREFER 2 This page contains the following parameters D Channel ID Channel This parameter selects a style for the displayed channel If the Channel ID check box is selected the Channel ID appears e g CH16 1 If the Channel Short Name check box is on the Channel Short name appears see page 225 2 Channel Copy Parameter This parameter selects the channel parameters to be copied when you assign the Chan nel Copy function to one of the User Defined buttons see page 231 You can select multiple options ALE Sawin acne This button selects all parameters that can be copied When you turn on this button all other options are cancelled
340. hen this option is turned off the delay time can be set for each channel in a channel pair individually 3 Channel section 01V96 Owner s Manual You can set individual delay parameters here The delay parameters include the follow ing items This button switches the corresponding channel delay or off MISCO This parameter sets the delay time in milliseconds meter feet sample beat frame The delay time can be set using units of meters feet samples beats or frames which you select by using the DELAY SCALE buttons MEX aym ata dei This parameter sets the mix balance of dry Input Channel and wet delayed signals FB GAIN This parameter sets the amount of delay feedback 81 Setting the Input Channels from the Display Tip This function is unavailable for the ST IN Channels The delay time range depends on the sampling rate at which the 01V96 is operating For example at 44 1 kHz the range is 0 through 984 1 msec If you select the DELAY SCALE meter or feet button the distance value can be converted to the delay time based on sonic speeds about 340 at 15 degrees Celsius This option is useful if you wish to correct the timing difference between two sound sources that are far apart If you select the DELAY SCALE beat button a parameter box for setting a note that repre sents the beat and a parame
341. her damages caused by improper use or operation of this unit 01V96 Owner s Manual Important Information Trademarks ADAT MultiChannel Optical Digital Interface is a trademark and ADAT and Alesis are reg istered trademarks of Alesis Corporation Apogee is a trademark of Apogee Electronics Inc Apple Mac and Power Macintosh are registered trademarks and Mac OS is a trademark of Apple Corporation Inc HUI is a trademark of Mackie Designs Inc Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation Nuendo is a registered trademark of Steinberg Media Technologies AG Pro Tools is a trademark or registered trademark of Digidesign and or Avid Technology Inc Tascam Digital Interface is a trademark and Tascam and Teac are registered trademarks of Teac Corporation Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Inc Waves is a trademark of Waves Inc Yamaha is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged Copyright No part of this unit its software or this Owner s Manual may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means without the prior written authorization of Yamaha Corpora tion 2003 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved Yamaha Web Site Further information about the 01V96 related products and other Yamaha professional audio equipment is available on the Yamaha Professional Audio
342. i4 415 Adi Parameter controls 1 16 Channel parameter controls such as channel 1 16 panpots Send A E send levels etc are dis played Meter Display mode F4 button Press the F4 button to select this display mode in which the level meters for tracks 1 16 are displayed DIO SETUP Initial Data peL 8112 5113 5114 STIL STI1 00 EDIT e WII z B TIME CODE FEET a ers OOO 1000 Rudi Aud2 Rud3 4 AudS Aud Rud Auds Channels 1 16 The channel 1 16 levels or Send levels are displayed 01V96 Owner s Manual l 192 Chapter 17 Remote Control Control Surface Operation When the Pro Tools Remote layer is selected the 01V96 controls on the top panel engage the following functions Channel Strip section SEL buttons These buttons select Pro Tools channels inserts and Automation mode SOLO buttons These buttons solo Pro Tools channels The button indicators for the soloed channels light up ON buttons These buttons mute Pro Tools channels Faders The faders set Pro Tools channel levels including the audio tracks MIDI tracks master fader Aux Ins etc If 16 or fewer channels are displayed in Pro Tools faders are assigned starting from the left most channel FADER MODE Section AUX 1 AUX 5 buttons These buttons select Sends so that you can adjust the corresponding Pr
343. ibrary no 0 32 Library no 32 256 current output patch data 8192 UNDO 00100000 20 For reception by the 01V96 only the user area is valid 1 32 256 00111000 38 8 STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message 01000011 43 ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA 00111001 39 9 SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel 00110011 33 3 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump DATA 01001000 48 H COUNT HIGH 0 ch data count ch 128 cl Ommmmmmm mh 0 128 Channel Library no 0 128 COUNT LOW cl Ommmmmmm ml 256 Current data 01001100 4c 1 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 2 8 2 25 Input patch library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number O Library no 0 32 Library no 32 256 current input patch data 8192 UNDO For reception by the 01V96 only the user area is valid 1 32 256 8192 STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message 00110011 33 3 ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA DATA NAME 01001111 4F O SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel Ommmmmmm mh O 32 Output patch Library no 0 32 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump Ommmmmmm ml 256 Current data COUNT HIGH ch datacount ch 128 cl BLOCK INFO 0ttttttt tt total block number minim
344. icrophone to the 01V96 In this example a 16 track hard disk recorder is connected to the ADAT IN and OUT con nectors on the rear panel and the ADAT IN and OUT connectors on an installed MY8 AT card See page 38 for connection details Hard disk recorder Headphone amplifier Guitar or bass ADAT IN connector ADAT OUT connector Y rererereroer 59 9699999 1 CODO E Synthesizer or rhythm machine 2 S BL J Q BS af Ec Bb ae ees gee 595 5 comes INPUT connector mm a goga Monitoring system I INPUT connector 3252 PHONES jack Microphone 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Word Clock page appears On this page specify the wordclock source best wordclock source depends on the system and environment In the following example a hard disk recorder operating at a sampling frequency of 44 1kHz is used as the wordclock master The wordclock source is derived from the s
345. idth HSH F 50 0 2 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH 12 0 to 412 0 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 L lt gt R L 5R L lt R Turn L Turn R 2 Hi BI h h HP h J J J d 01V96 Owner s Manual 260 Appendix A Parameter Lists TREMOLO Two input two output tremolo effect Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 412 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQG 12 0 to 412 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQQ 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH 12 0 to 412 0 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ l Ha RH B h 44 h 4 J 3 lt s ss HQ PITCH One input two output high quality pitch shifter Parameter Range Description PITCH 12 to 12 semitones Pitch shift FINE 50 to 50 cents Pitch shift fine DELAY 0 0 1000 0 ms Delay time FB GAIN _99 to 49996 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback MODE 1
346. ight in rela tion to the listening position To pan the stereo image you can use the Parameter wheel or INC DEC buttons You can also store the surround pan settings in a Scene In addition to a normal Stereo mode the 01V96 features the following three Surround modes 3 41 This mode uses four channels that include front left front right front center and rear 5 1 This mode uses six channels that include front left front right rear left rear right front center and subwoofer 6 1 This mode uses seven channels that include six channels of 5 1 mode plus rear center Front L Front R Qo O 5 Subwoofer ued punong S Subwoofer Front R Rear center 01V96 Owner s Manual 136 Chapter 12 Surround When you select one of these Surround modes each surround channel signal is output as the Bus Out signal specified on the DIO Setup Surr Bus page see page 138 The following table shows the factory default Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment in each Surround mode i ida BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 BUS5 BUS6 BUS7 3 1 L R 5 _ Front left Front right Center Surround 51 L R Ls Rs C LFE Front left Front right Rearleft Rear right Center Subwoofer 61 L R Ls Rs C Bs LFE Front left Front right Rearleft Rear right Center Rear center Subwoofer Tip You can set the surroun
347. ignal input at the ADAT IN Channels 1 and 2 01V96 Owner s Manual Jeon 48 Chapter 5 Tutorial DI0 SETUP Initial Data BEL 5112 5113 5114 CHI CHI IO oO Qo CLOCK SELECT SEE w our ove s eren e ES ES S _____ WORD CLOCKAR FORMAT 4 PREFERI JA PREFERZ 2 l3 Tip See page 40 for more information on wordclock See page 75 for more information 01V96s running at higher sampling frequencies 88 2 kHz or 96 kHz Note You can select the 01V96 internal clock as the wordclock source In this case you must set the hard disk recorder so that it will synchronize to an external clock Ifthe 01V96 and a connected device are not synching to each other the 01 96 displays the message Sync Error If this happens check the ADAT IN and OUT connections digital I O card connection and the sampling frequency setting on each device 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch In Patch page appears On this page make sure that the Input Patch settings remain set to default values as shown below PATCH 0 Initial Data m CHi CHi INPUT 5 INPUT TO 1L 1R 21 28 SL SR 4L 4R _ IN PATCH f INPUT THS EFFECT fRcascanE By default as shown in this example the signals input at I
348. ignored and the current settings are retained 2 SAFE This parameter enables or disables the Recall Safe function 3 MODE The following MODE buttons determine which Safe channel parameters will remain unaffected by Scene recalls The MODE buttons correspond to the following parame ters cueste parameters FADER Channel faders level controls ION Goss Channel On Off parameters PAN ose Channel Pan parameters D JO Channel EQ parameters 2 OMEP edis Channel Comp parameters GATE Channel Gate parameters eae Channel Aux Send levels AUX ON Aux Send On Off parameters Tip The ALL button is mutually exclusive of the other buttons 4 RECALL SAFE CHANNEL section This section enables you to select which channels will remain unaffected by Scene recalls including Input Channels 1 32 ST IN Channels 1 4 Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 Stereo Out internal effects processors The Recall Safe function is effective on chan nels and effects for which the buttons are turned on 01V96 Owner s Manual Sorting Scenes Sorting Scenes You can sort Scenes in Scene memories 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE button repeatedly until the Scene Sort page appears SCENE Initial Data 5211 5112 STIS STI4 0 SCENE MEMORY RT DESTINATION 6 1 No Data 5 Extra Mix 4 Ending Mix 3 2nd Mix
349. in use at the time the Scene is stored but exclude current edited Input and Output patching f you do not store the edited Input and Output patching to the libraries recalling a Scene may change the current patching 01V96 Owner s Manual SalJOUJ9 A 91925 162 Chapter 15 5 Memories About Scene Numbers Scene memories are numbered with U or from 00 through 99 You can store Scenes in Scene memories 01 99 When you recall a Scene the Scene memory number appears at the top of the display page Scene memory 00 is a special read only memory that contains the default settings of all mix parameters To reset all mix parameters on the 01V96 to their initial or default values recall Scene memory 0 Also the Initial Data Nominal check box on the Setup Prefer1 page see page 226 enables you to specify whether Input Channel faders are set to either 0 dB or dB when Scene memory 0 is recalled Scene memory Ud is a special read only memory that contains the mix settings in effect immediately before the most recently recalled or stored Scene To undo or redo Scene memory recall and store operations recall Scene memory 0 When you adjust parameters after recalling a Scene the Edit indicators appear EDIT at the top of the display indicating that the mix settings no longer match those of the Scene that was most recently recalled The contents of the Edit Buffer where the current mix
350. indicate the bank number See above STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n20 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01001100 4C 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 01000101 45 Ommmmmmm mh 0 127 Library 1 128 Ommmmmmm ml 256 259 Effect1 4 current EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive DATA NAME 2 8 2 23 Channel library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number O Library no 0 128 Library no 128 256 287 CH32 288 STEREO 1L 295 STEREO 4R 384 BUS1 391 058 512 519 0 8 768 5 8192 UNDO 256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer For reception by the 01V96 only the user area is valid 2 128 256 STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch d atacount ch 128 cl COUNT LOW cl 01001100 4C 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 01V96 Owner s Manual MIDI Data Format 315 00111001 39 9 2 8 2 26 Input patch
351. inputs and outputs or the OMNIIN and OMNI OUT connectors In this way two consoles work just like one big console integrating each unit s Buses 1 8 Aux Sends 1 8 Stereo Bus and Solo Bus The following functions are linked between two cascaded 01V96s via the MIDI IN and OUT ports Display page selection Aux selection Solo function Fader Mode Metering Position Peak Hold On Off Meter Fast Fall on off Scene Store Recall and Title Edit Tip To link functions and parameters excluding the Solo function turn on the Cascade COMM Link check box on the Setup Prefer1 page see page 226 TheSolo function is always linked regardless of the status of the Cascade COMM Link check box 01V96 Owner s Manual Cascading Consoles 235 The following paragraphs explain how to make a cascade connection using two 01V96s and the inputs and outputs of the digital I O card installed in the slot of each 01V96 1 Install digital 1 cards into the slot on each of two 01V96s 2 Connect two 01V965 as follows Connect the digital I O card output on the transmitting 01V96 slave to the digital I O card input on the receiving 01V96 master Connect the ADAT IN connector on the master unit to the ADAT OUT connector on the slave unit Connect the MIDI IN port on the master unit to the MIDI OUT port on the slave unit using a MIDI cable Connect the MIDI OUT port on the master unit to the MIDI IN port on the slave un
352. ion Digital broadcast reception Instruments Musical instrument microphone and sources that generate string signals A D Conv A D Conv with C A D converter without copyright information A D converter with copyright information Solid Memory Solid memory device Experimental Experimental device Unknown Unknown Note AES EBU appears in the Category row when you are monitoring IEC958 Part 3 AES EBU Professional format signals that do not include Category Code Bit 6 COPY Indicates the status of copy protection information included in the IEC958 Part2 S PDIF Consumer format signals OK appears if copying is allowed Prohibit appears if copy protected Dithering Digital Outputs When digital audio is transferred to lower resolution systems truncated bits may generate unpleasant noise To cancel the audible effect of this noise a small complement of noise is intentionally added to the digital outputs This process is called dithering On the 01V96 you can dither the 2TR Digital Outputs and Slot Outputs For example you can apply dithering to the 01V96 stereo mix data and record to a 16 bit DAT recorder 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Format page appears The dithering settings are displayed at the bottom of the page DIO SETUP Initial Data 571257135714 CH1 CH1 0
353. isabled if the power is turned off and on again or if the PORT setting is changed If Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message is retransmitted without change STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00001101 0 01996 ADDRESS 00100001 21 Remote meter Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL DATA Oddddddd dd DatalH Oddddddd dd Datal L EOX 11110111 7 End of exclusive Meter data uses the unmodified DECAY value of the DSP The inter pretation of the data will depend on the parameter 01V96 Owner s Manual 322 Appendix C MIDI 2 8 3 31 Parameter request Remote Meter Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received data of the specified address is transmitted on the Rx CH at intervals of 50 msec as a rule although this may not be the case if the port is being used by other communication for a period of 10 seconds If Address UL Ox7F is received transmission of all meter data will be halted immediately disable Transmission If Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message is retransmitted without change STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID
354. it using a MIDI cable MIDI IN OUT connector ADAT IN connector MIDI IN OUT connector ADAT OUT connector O les Ai ths 22 2 ie X f aon 200 cjl n cac TET Ce 16 aa Poo EGG 01V96 Slave 01V96 Master 3 Onthe slave unit press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Out Patch page appears 4 Assign the Bus signals to the channels that are used for the cascade connec tion The following signals are available Options Description CAS BUS1 BUS8 CAS AUX1 AUX8 CAS ST L CAS ST R Bus 1 8 Cascade Outs Aux Bus 1 8 Cascade Outs Stereo Bus L amp R Cascade Outs CASSOLOL CASSOLOR Solo Bus L amp R Cascade Outs 01V96 Owner s Manual suono unj Jou1O 236 Chapter 19 Other Functions The following display page is an example of integ
355. k level is held on the meters on the page To cancel the Peak Hold function turn the PEAK HOLD button off 01V96 Owner s Manual Connections and Setup 37 4 Connections and Setup This chapter explains how to connect and set up your 01V96 Connections The following section explains three typical ways to connect the 01V96 to external equip ment although there are numerous others Configuring an analog 24 channel mixing system Synthesizer Synthesizer dnjas pue suondauu0D ES Master recorder Effects processor 2TR OUT connector MONITOR OUT connectors 1 0 0 0 0 4 ail Lao ie Fpi Monitoring system Guitar PHONES jack In this system the 01V96 with an optional AD card MY8 AD MY8 AD96 etc installed in the slot is used as a keyboard mixer or sound re enforcement mixer Up to 24 analog channels including Inputs 1 16 and s
356. l Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall 215 Tx ON OFF Transmission of Parameter Change messages is enabled or dis abled Rx Reception of Parameter Change messages is enabled or disabled ECHO This button determines whether Parameter Change messages received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port 5 BULK This parameter row enables or disables reception of Bulk Dump data RxON OEF Reception of Bulk Dump data is enabled or disabled 6 OTHER COMMANDS ECHO ON OFF This button determines whether other MIDI messages received at the MIDIIN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port 7 Fader Resolution This parameter specifies the resolution of the value output when you operate the 01V96 s faders To transfer fader value data between two cascaded 01V96s or to record the 01V96 operation to or play it back from a sequencer select the HIGH button When the LOW button is selected the fader resolution switches to 256 steps Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall You can assign 01V96 Scenes to MIDI Program Changes for remote recall When you recall a Scene on the 01V96 the unit transmits the assigned Program Change to the connected MIDI device When the 01V96 receives a Program Change the assigned Scene is recalled Initially Scenes 1 through 99 are assigned sequentially to
357. l 2 delay 1 RH JH2 R 4407 h d J d d Maximum value depends on the tempo setting ROTARY One input two output rotary speaker simulator Parameter Range Description ROTATE STOP START Rotation stop start SPEED SLOW FAST Rotation speed see SLOW and FAST parameters SLOW 0 05 10 00 Hz SLOW rotation speed FAST 0 05 10 00 Hz FAST rotation speed DRIVE 0 100 Overdrive level ACCEL 0 10 Acceleration at speed changes LOW 0 100 Low frequency filter HIGH 0 100 High frequency filter 01V96 Owner s Manual 262 Appendix A Parameter Lists RING MOD Two input two output ring modulator Parameter Range Description SOURCE OSC SELF Modulation source oscillator or input signal OSC FREQ 0 0 5000 0 Hz Oscillator frequency FM FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed FM DEPTH 0 100 Oscillator frequency modulation depth SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE FM 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ h ddd h J J d d s MOD FILTER input two output modulation filter Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth 0 00 354 38 degrees Left channel modulation and right channel modulation phase difference TYPE LPF HPF BPF Filter type low pass high pass band pass OFFSET 0 100 Filter frequency offset RESO 0 20
358. library Select from the list in the center column a program memory to which you wish to store the effects settings or a program memory that you wish to recall The selected program appears inside the dotted box 01V96 Owner s Manual Mixing Recorded Tracks into Stereo Mixdown 67 Rotate the Parameter wheel and select 2 Reverb Room For purposes of this tutorial select this room reverb program Ln LIBRARY TITLE 6 Gate Reverb 5 Early Ref 4 Reuerb Plate EFFECT TYPE REVERE ROOM i Reverb Hall Ho Data 18 FX1 IIR FX IF FX3 I IR IF P Move the cursor to the RECALL button located to the left of the list then 5 press ENTER Effect program Reverb Room is loaded into Effects processor 1 5 6 edit the effect parameters press the EFFECT button 5 repeatedly until the Effect FX1 Edit page appears see page 157 3 store ri Press the LAYER 17 32 button P Input Channel Layer 17 32 is selected for control from the channel strip section Press the FADER MODE AUX1 button The button indicator lights up While the AUX 1 AUX 8 button indicators are lit faders 1 16 control the Aux 1 8 send levels In this example the faders control the send level of the signals routed from Input Channels 17 32 to Aux 1 Effects processor 1 input To reset the fader 1 16 function to normal mode press the FADER MODE HOME
359. library bulk dump request format 00110011 33 3 The second and third bytes ofthe DATA NAME indicate the bank number See DATA NAME 01001000 48 H above Ommmmmmm mh 0 128 Library 0 128 STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message Ommmmmmm ml 256 Current data ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 SUB STATUS 0010 2n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump DATA Oddddddd ds Channel Library data of block bb 01001100 4C l 2 01001101 4D M de 00100000 20 CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee Invert L 4 de 1 amp Ox7F 00100000 20 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 00111000 38 8 2 8 2 24 Channel library bulk dump request format 47 E E 22 and third bytes ofthe DATA NAME indicate the bank number See 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01010010 52 R STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message Ommmmmmm mh 0 32 Input patch Library no 0 32 ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA Ommmmmmm ml 256 data SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01001100 4C l 2 8 2 27 Output patch library bulk dump format 01001101 4D M The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number 00100000 20 O L
360. lly or has been dropped Important Information Important Information Warnings Connect this unit s power cord only to an AC outlet of the type stated in this Owner s Man ual or as marked on the unit Failure to do so is a fire and electrical shock hazard Do notallow water to enter this unit or allow the unit to become wet Fire or electrical shock may result Do not place heavy objects including this unit on top of the power cord A damaged power cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard In particular be careful not to place heavy objects on a power cord covered by a carpet Do not place a container with liquid or small metal objects on top of this unit Liquid or metal objects inside this unit are a fire and electrical shock hazard Do not scratch bend twist pull or heat the power cord A damaged power cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard Do not remove the unit s cover You could receive an electrical shock If you think internal inspection maintenance or repair is necessary contact your dealer Do not modify the unit Doing so is a fire and electrical shock hazard If lightning begins to occur turn off the power switch of the unit as soon as possible and unplug the power cable plug from the electrical outlet If there is a possibility of lightning do not touch the power cable plug if it is still connected Doing so may be an electrical shock hazard Use only the included power cord for this unit Using
361. lot channels are available for mixing Tip You can adjust the gain of the AD card channels by setting the DIP switches on the card For more information see your AD card documentation 01V96 Owner s Manual 38 Chapter 4 Connections and Setup Configuring a recording system with a hard disk recorder Computer HDR Hard Disk Recorder MIDI OUT TO HOST USB port MIDI IN Effects processor 2TR IN connector OMNI OUT connector 2TR OUT connector Synthesizer poo ood ooo 10 ELE i ao MONITOR OUT connectors j INPUT connector E Monitoring system INPUT connector PHONES jack In this system the 01V96 is one component in a system that includes a digital MTR such as a hard disk recorder that is connected to the 01V96 via the ADAT IN and OUT connec tors on the rear panel and via an optional I O ca
362. ls are swapped between the selected Bus and the Bus to which the channel assigned to the selected Bus was assigned previously Tip Pressing the DISPLAY ACCESS SETUP button repeatedly also displays the Surr Bus page Available Bus Outs vary depending on the Surround mode For example in 3 1 Surround mode Bus Outs 1 4 are available In 5 1 Surround mode Bus Outs 1 6 are available and in 6 1 Surround mode Outs 1 7 are available 8 Depending on the selected Surround mode or applications patch the Bus Out signals to the outputs ADAT OUT channels or slot output channels Connect a playback device or MTR to the output connectors 01V96 Owner s Manual Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes 139 Surround Pan Recording To record surround pan movement to a digital MTR route the Bus Outs to the ADAT OUT channels or slot output channels that are connected to the digital MTR The following diagram illustrates an example of recording 5 1 Surround mode signals to a digital MTR 01 96 SURROUND aaaaaa Input Channel 1 V to LFE LEVEL C V SURROUND Input Channel 2 V LFE LEVEL C 2 SURROUND Input Channel 3 LFE LEVEL eit 4 i Track 1 Ch
363. ls or Output Channels 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAIR GROUP button repeatedly until one of the pages that contains the desired group and channels appears InFader page This page enables you to set Fader groups for Input Channels 1 32 and ST IN Channels 1 4 Out Fader page This page enables you to set Fader groups Q T for Bus 1 8 Aux 1 8 and Stereo Out In Fader page PRIR GRUP Initial Data CH1 CH1 FADER GROUP CH1 32 m rommo omg In Mute page This page enables you to set Mute groups I P for Input Channels 1 32 and ST IN Channels 1 4 respectively Out Mute page This page enables you to set Mute groups U X for Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 and Stereo Out n Mute page PRIR GRUP Initial Data a CHi CHi MUTE GROUP 1 32 17121929 21222324 2622725 23592152 ozzxrxc VOZITA INPUT Fi OUTPUT IN FADER f 01V96 Owner s Manual Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups 149 2 Press the up or down Y button to select a group FADER GROUP CH1 32 p5T h4 12534 5678 10 11 12 12141516 12 ENABLE i a XE cec 3 Press the SEL button for channel you wish to add to the group The selected channel is marked with and the channel is added to the group Example Input Channels 1 4 7 8 and 15 16 have been added to Fa
364. messages move the cursor to the REQUEST button then press ENTER If you set up the 01V96 so that it will transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from another 01V96 the other 01V96 will respond to the bulk dump request and transmit the bulk dump data to the 01V96 you are operating 7 Toreceive bulk data press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button again to dis play the MIDI Setup page then turn on the Rx ON OFF button in the BULK row lt 9 Now when the 01V96 receives bulk data the corresponding internal data is updated 01V96 Owner s Manual 224 Chapter 18 MIDI 01V96 Owner s Manual Other Functions 225 19 Other Functions This chapter describes the 01V96 s miscellaneous functions Changing the Input and Output Channel Names You can change the default name of the input channels Input Channels 1 32 ST IN Chan nels 1 4 and output channels Aux Outs 1 8 Bus Outs 1 8 Stereo Out if you desire Changing the Input Channel Names 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch In Name page appears PRTCH Initial Data 571257135714 Bim o 0 O 0 J Name Input Auto Cory 10 SHT LONG CH CCH gt CH gt CH gt CHE CH6 gt CH6 gt lt CH6 gt CHS CCHS gt lt 5 gt lt CHS gt CH4 CCH4 gt lt CH4 gt lt CH4 gt CH3 CH3 gt lt CH3 gt lt CH3 CH2 gt lt CH2 gt lt 2 gt CHI
365. meters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels see page 84 01V96 Owner s Manual 112 Chapter 9 Aux Outs Viewing Aux Out Settings You can view and adjust the parameter settings for the currently selected Aux Out on the View Parameter and Fader pages Viewing the Compressor and EQ Settings To display the View Parameter page use the corresponding SEL button to select the desired Aux Out 1 8 then press the DISPLAY ACCESS VIEW button then press the F1 button VIEH Initial Data 5 11 5112 5713 5714 RUX1 RUXI Oo INSERT LOW L MID H MID HIGH 40 OMP THRES RATIO L HELF 0 78 7 H SHELF 8 GdB 2 5 1 1 OOk 4 00k 16 0k zi ATTACK RELEASE 125 190k 4 00k 10 0 D FO O O O 229 OFF OUTGAIN KNEE G COMP Z TYPED ARAMETER KK F DER Lenan 1 16 Aux The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels except that this page does not include the Gate and Phase parameters see page 87 Viewing Faders and On Off Parameters To display the View Fader page use the corresponding SEL button to select the desired Aux Out 1 8 then press the DISPLAY ACCESS VIEW button then press the F2 but ton 1 pm OO it
366. more information on these pages 5 Move the cursor to the D button for the channel you want to patch to the Direct Out then press ENTER The Direct Out patching is now effective and the signals are routed to the assigned outputs ADAT OUT channels or slot output channels 01V96 Owner s Manual Insert Patching Insert Patching 127 The 01V96 s Input Channels and Output Channels Stereo Out Bus Out 1 8 Aux Out 1 8 feature independent Insert Ins and Outs Inputs outputs ADAT connector channels slot channels and internal effects processor inputs and outputs can be patched to the Output Channel Insert Ins and Outs In this way you can send the signals to external effects proces sors for processing or insert internal effects Individual Insert Patching You can patch the 01V96 s inputs outputs ADAT connector channels slot channels and effects processor inputs and outputs to the Insert Ins and Outs The same procedure applies to both Input Channels and Output Channels Effects Output Output connector 6 Input connector Q Q ome Channel 1 Press the SEL button of an Input Channel or Output Channel for Insert patching 2 Pressthe INSERT DELAY button repeatedly until the INS DLY Insert page appears INS DLY Initial Data KIA 5112 5113 5714 en ur im Ei mG G OG Uo HI pe 5 ON FADER FADER Ccompg
367. n chan nels in this order FO Initial Data 5 172 576 OFF 96 kHz ZTR OUT DIGITAL 96kHz 96 kHz 96 kHz 778 OFF Tip The FS box on the Word Clock page displays the sampling frequency at which the 01V96 is currently operating Note The sampling rate converter is available only on the Yamaha 8 965 Digital I O card If you have installed another type of I O card in the slot or if no card is installed in the 01V 96 the buttons in the SRC sections are disabled 01V96 Owner s Manual Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status 73 2 Usethe cursor buttons to move the cursor to any two channel button in the SRC sections then press ENTER The sampling rate converter for the selected 2 channel input turns on or off When on the sampling rate of the received digital audio is converted to the 01V96 s current sampling rate Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status You can view and monitor the Channel Status sampling rate emphasis etc of digital audio signals connected to the 2TR Digital Inputs and Slot Inputs as follows 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS UTILITY button then press the F2 button The Utility CH Status page appears UTILITY Initial Data cin cci IO mamo 00 0 1 ton ZTR IN D mE Unlock 221 EMPHAS s 2s s 5 zu M zx 5 4
368. n the right and specify the number Tip You can store User Defined Keys banks to a computer hard disk using the included Studio Manager software Be sure to back up important data Youcan also store the assignment data to an external device such as a MIDI data filer by using MIDI Bulk Dump see page 222 01V96 Owner s Manual Using Operation Lock 233 Using Operation Lock The 01V96 features an Operation Lock function that prevents unintentional edits and restricts access to panel operation with a password To use the Operation Lock function press the UTILITY button repeatedly to display the Utility Lock page UTILITY Initial Data 571257135714 100 9 oO EDIT OPERATION LOCK UPERRTION LOCK OPERATION LOCK SAFE Coma PRSSHORD 3 This page contains the following parameters D OPERATION LOCK This button enables or cancels Operation Lock When you turn on this button the Pass word window appears PASSWORD USE SEL1 SEL14 Enter a four letter password using the Channel 1 10 SEL buttons Channel 10 SEL button enters 0 password characters are represented by asterisks Move the cursor to the OK button then press ENTER to enable Operation Lock The factory default password is 1234 To cancel Operation Lock press ENTER The Password window appears again
369. n using the Parameter wheel to select the desired output or slot channel for which you want to adjust attenuation The following outputs and slot channels can be selected STEREO STEREO OUT L amp R channels MONITOR OUTLUI R MONITOR OUT L amp R channels OMNI OUT 1 4 OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 SLOT OUT 1 1 through 1 16 Slot channels 1 16 ADAT OUT 1 8 ADAT OUT channels 1 8 2TROUTDIGITALL R 2TR OUT DIGITAL L amp R channels 3 Movethe cursor to the parameter value in the right column 2 then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to set the amount of attenuation The amount of attenuation can be set from 0 dB to 9 dB Tip To reset the attenuation amount of all Output Channels to 0 dB move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button then press ENTER 01V96 Owner s Manual Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs 107 Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs You can change the default Bus names 8051 AUX4 STEREO etc It may be convenient to name the buses Monitor Out or Effect Send for example so that you can easily iden tify the signal type 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Out Name page appears PRTCH Initial lata 8 5111 5112 SIS 5714 Busi BUs OO
370. nd external devices you can distribute wordclock signals independently via dedicated cables or you can use clock infor mation derived from digital audio connections The WORD CLOCK IN and OUT connectors transmit and receive wordclock signals inde pendently on the 01V96 The following examples show two ways in which wordclock sig nals can be distributed and received via the WORD CLOCK IN and OUT connectors Daisy Chain Distribution In this example the wordclock signal is distributed in a daisy chain fashion with each device feeding the wordclock signal from the wordclock out connector on to the wordclock in connector of the next device This method of distribution is not recommended for larger systems Wordclock master WC OUT Device A Device B Device C Wordclock slave Wordclock slave Wordclock slave e Star Distribution In this example a dedicated wordclock distribution box such as a Yamaha IFUA is used to supply wordclock signals from the wordclock master to each wordclock slave individually Wordclock Wordclock master distribution box WC IN WC IN WC IN BNO WC IN BNC Device A Device B Device C Device D Wordclock slave Wordclock slave Wordclock slave Wordclock slave 01V96 Owner s Manual Wordclock Connections and Settings 41 If the external devices do not have wordclock in and out connectors you can use the clock information included in the digital audi
371. nd pan parameters for each Input Channel 1 Make sure that the 01V96 is in any Surround mode except Stereo then press the SEL button of the channel for which you want to set surround pan 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Ch Edit page appears The Ch Edit page displays the selected Input Channel and its surround pan setting and available pair partner The following display page is an example in 6 1 Surround mode PAN ROUTE CHi CHi 00 The following parameters are available on this page 1 Surround pan graph This graph indicates the pan positions in a two dimensional field with the listening position in the center A small diamond 4 indicates the current surround pan posi tion You can move the current surround pan position 022 directly to one of the speaker icons by selecting its icon then pressing ENTER ued punong Fy 2 Trajectory patterns These buttons represent seven trajectory patterns that determine how the surround pan moves when you operate the Parameter wheel or the INC DEC buttons 3 FAST Turning on this button increases the speed of sound images panned via the Parameter wheel 4 Trajectory pattern parameters These parameters fine tune the surround pan trajectory pattern WIDTH This parameter sets the left to right width of the selected tra jectory pattern DEPTH t This parameter sets t
372. nd third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No 11110000 01000011 43 0010nnnn 2n 01111110 7E 01001100 4C 71 01001101 4D 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 01010110 56 V 00000000 00 Obbbbbbb bb 11110111 F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel Universal bulk dump DATA NAME bz0 7 bank no A H End of exclusive EOX 2 8 2 9 User Assignable Layer bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will in some cases change if the same bank is being used STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 COUNT LOW cl 01001100 4c 7 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 C 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01010101 55 U 00000000 00 Obbbbbbb bb b 0 3 bank no 1 4 BLOCK INFO DATA CHECK SUM EOX Ottttttt Obbbbbbb Oddddddd 0ddddddd 11110111 tt bb ds de ee F7 total block number minimum number is 0 current block number 0 total block number User a
373. nectors OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 These balanced TRS type phone connectors output any Bus Outs or Input Channel Direct Outs The nominal out U 9 put level is 4 dB 4 3 2 1 OMNI OUT 4dB BAL Tip Any signal path can be patched to the OMNI OUT connectors See page 124 for more information on patching signals to the OMNI OUT connectors e STEREO OUT connectors L R STEREQSUT These balanced XLR 3 32 type connectors output the Stereo Out signals The nominal output level is 4 dB O O R L 2TR OUT connectors These unbalanced RCA phono connectors output line level signals to a connected master recorder or other external device These connectors always output the Stereo Out signals L 10dBV UNBAL 01V96 Owner s Manual Digital Inputs amp Outputs 71 Digital Inputs amp Outputs The 01V96 rear panel features digital input and output connectors that enable you to con nect external digital devices Any signal path can be patched to these digital inputs and out puts You can also add analog and digital I Os by installing an optional I O card in the slot Digital Connectors 2TRIN DIGITAL connector FW 2TRINDIGITALisan RCA phono connector and accepts consumer format IEC 60958 digital audio You can patch digital signals input at this connector to any Input Channel page 121 COAXIAL e 2TR OUT DIGITAL connector This RCA phono conne
374. nels Youcanstorethe Input Patch settings to the Input Patch library Refer to Chapter 16 for more information 01V96 Owner s Manual Output Patching 123 Output Patching The 01V96 s Stereo Out Bus Out 1 8 Aux Out 1 8 signals can be patched to any outputs ADAT OUT output channels and slot output channels Patch example Output Patching Aux Send 1 OMNI Out connector 1 Aux Send 2 OMNI Out connector 2 Aux Send 3 OMNI Out connector 3 Aux Send 4 OMNI Out connector 4 Aux Send 5 OMNI Out connector 1 Aux Send 6 OMNI Out connector 2 Aux Send 7 OMNI Out connector 3 Aux Send 8 OMNI Out connector 4 By default the following signal paths are patched to outputs ADAT OUT output channels and slot output channels Output connectors and slot channels Signal flow OUT output channels 1 8 Bus Outs 1 8 Slot Channels 1 8 Bus Outs 1 8 S Slot Channels 9 16 Bus Outs 1 8 8 OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 Aux Outs 1 4 2 OUT DIGITAL L Stereo Out L 24 2 OUT DIGITAL R Stereo Out R a Tip You can patch a signal to multiple outputs Youcan store the Output Patch settings to the Output Patch library Refer to Chapter 16 for more information You can change these patches if you desire The procedure for patching signals to output varies depending on the output connectors and slots 01V96 Owner s Manual Chapter 10 1 amp Output Patching
375. nels to which the instru ments or microphone are connected are lit then raise the corresponding faders to OdB Turn off the ON buttons for the channels not in use While the musicians play the musical instruments check the input channel levels using the level meters on the display 01V96 Owner s Manual Overdubbing to Other Tracks 61 Routing Signals Follow the steps below to route the Input Channel 1 and 2 signals to Slot Channels 1 and 2 directly so that the signals will be recorded to Tracks 9 and 10 on the digital MTR 1 Pressthe DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Direct Out page appears 2 Move the cursor to the parameter box for the Input Channels you want to route to Direct Outs then specify the output connectors or channels In this example Input Channel 1 and 2 signals are patched to Slot output channels 1 and 2 PRTCH Initial Data 571257135714 CH2 CH2 0 UO oO DIRECT OUT DESTINATION Slot CH2 OUT 4 DIRECT OUT PRE EG PRE FADER 432 E _ ZTE OUT OUT NAME OUT LIB 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Rout1 16 page appears 4 Move the cursor to the D buttons for Input Channels 1 and 2 then press ENTER Turn off the S buttons and 1 8 buttons The Input Channel 1 and 2 signals are now routed to Slot output channels 1 and 2 then output to Tracks 9
376. ng GM sound levels Volume 2 Setting GM sound effect send levels Effect Send 3 Setting XG sound levels Volume 4 Adjusting mute and levels for Cubase series mixer Mute Volume 1 Connect the 01V96 s MIDI OUT port to the MIDI IN port of the MIDI device MIDI OUT MIDI IN e 0000 0 6 6 299 99 aia aapon ool Synthesizer a aaoo agang le owap paaga Fogg 0430u0 01V96 Owner s Manual 204 Chapter 17 Remote Control 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears DIO SETUP Initial Data STI2 STI3 STI4 STIL HH ce Rx PORT StudioManager Tx PORT DAW REMOTE CASCADE LINK MACHINE CONTROL mem PORT DEUICE ID MMC REGUEST ESI MIDI HOST MONITOR A REMOTE MACHINE 2913 3 Move the cursor to the REMOTE parameter box 1 in the SPECIAL FUNC TIONS section rotate the Parameter wheel to select MIDI then press ENTER If the MIDI port is already in use a window confirming the assignmen
377. ng MIDI Control Changes See MIDI Data Format at the end of this Manual for detailed information on available Parameter Changes 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI messages see page 212 2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the 01V96 can transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from the external device 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F1 button to dis play the MIDI Setup page then turn off the Tx and Rx ON OFF buttons in the PARAMETER CHANGE row The 01V96 will now set certain parameter values when it receives corresponding Parameter Changes Also when you adjust certain parameters on the 01V96 it transmits correspond ing Parameter Changes Note You do not have to specify MIDI Channels to control parameters using Parameter Changes Make sure that both Tx and Rx ON OFF buttons in the CONTROL CHANGE row are turned off lt 9 01V96 Owner s Manual 222 Chapter 18 MIDI Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI Bulk Dump You can back up data stored in the 01V96 such as libraries and Scenes to an external MIDI device by using MIDI Bulk Dump In this way you can later restore previous 01V96 settings by transmitting this MIDI data back to the 01V96 Note Some of data transmitted from the 01V 96 to the se
378. ng amplifiers that produce heat 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polar ized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the pro vided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet N O Q Q N WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE 10 11 12 13 14 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket or table spec ified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus e When a cart is used use cau tion when moving the cart w apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time Refer all servicing to qualified service person nel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or mois ture does not operate norma
379. ng source 41 SOLO Sehon sette 22 ORE PAE en i T Star distribution 40 t Tascam I O 72 Specifications 2 283 NA WO IN zuerst 42 Title edit window 30 SRC sections 72 TO HOST USB 25 STIN butto nespresso 17 Traject i M2 ST IN section 17 emer TREMOLO 260 Star distribution 40 Tutorial STEREO 255 u NM eene e STEREO fader e 16 56 Stereo meters 19 up Initial Track Recording 49 Stereo out i297 Internal Effects 66 Attenuating 2 99 Master Recorder 68 Compressing 100 Mixdown 63 Delaying 2 99 s Monitoring Level 54 61 EQ ing 100 Overdubbi 60 EQ ing and Balancing 104 verdubbing Pairing uen ER xs 50 Naming eee tr 107 di 59 62 105 ROM MIB PPAR qua es es Setting from the control surface Outing Lr 104 Setting the Input Levels 49 Setting from the display 99 U Setting the levels 104 Viewing the settings 102 UNEAT CO 55
380. ng the Monitor Source selector in the MONITOR OUT section Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch In Patch page appears 2 H E a PRTCH Initial Data CH1 CHI rm CINPUT PATCH RD IN 1 INPUT er STEREO INPUT e IN PATCH INPUT INS EFFECT JACASCADE 01V96 Owner s Manual mE 64 Chapter 5 Tutorial 3 Move the cursor to the 2L parameter box in the STEREO INPUT section rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select 2TD L then press ENTER In the same way move the cursor to the 2R parameter box in the STEREO INPUT section then select 2TD R The signals input at the 2TR IN DIGITAL connector are now routed to ST IN Channel 2L and R PRTCH 0 Initial Data CHi CHi 48k INPUT PATCH INPUT 5 INPUT 1L 1R zL ZR SL 4L UBgro REEXS IN PATCH fA INPUT INSA EFFECT JACASCADE PJJ Use the ST IN ST IN button to select ST IN Channels 1 and 2 The ST IN ST IN button selects an ST IN channel pair ST Lights up IN Channels 1 and 2 or 3 and 4 which you can control using the buttons and controls in the ST IN section The indicators to the right of the button indicate which ST IN channels are currently selected 6 Turn off the ON button for
381. nge the setting This section explains how to set the parameters via the display Switching the Signal Phase To switch the phase of each Input Channel press the INSERT DELAY button repeat edly until the following INS DLY Phase page appears Move the cursor to the NOR REV button of the channel for which you want to change the phase then press the ENTER or INC DEC buttons to change the setting INS DLY Initial Data CH1 CH1 Sjouueu 1ndul N 16 16 26 _ 2L 2R SL 4L 4R 9 17 25 1L CD NOR REV These buttons switch the corresponding Input Channel phase NOR buttons indicate normal phase and REV buttons indicate reversed phase 2 GLOBAL The GLOBAL NOR REV buttons allow you to set the phase for all Input Channels simultaneously Tip The name of the currently selected channel is indicated in the upper right corner of the screen You set the phase separately for each of the ST IN Channels or for each channel in a channel pair If you selected the desired ST IN Channel using the corresponding SEL but ton pressing the same SEL button repeatedly will toggle between channels L and R 01V96 Owner s Manual 80 Chapter 7 Input Channels Delaying Input Channels To set the delay for each channel press the INSERT DELAY button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired
382. nges in the parameter boxes in the second middle PARAMETER column DIE m UMS i eon US 2 idee 2 IR HIGHICINPUT 59 lt 2 IN DELAY TIME MID INPUT 1 58 lt 2 DELAY TIME LOW INPUT 1 57 7 ASSIGN Note Parameters that feature a setting range in excess of 128 steps require an appropriate combination of range parameters for successful MIDI Control Change Tip You can initialize the Parameter to Control Change assignment table by moving the cur sor to the INITIALIZE button then pressing ENTER 7 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F1 button to dis play the MIDI Setup page then specify MIDI Transmit and Receive Chan nels 8 Turn on the CONTROL CHANGE Tx ON OFF and Rx ON OFF buttons 01V96 parameters will now be set accordingly when the 01V96 receives corresponding Control Changes Also when you adjust parameters on the 01V96 the 01V96 will transmit corresponding Control Changes Note Before controlling parameters using Control Changes make sure that both Tx and Rx ON OFF buttons in the PARAMETER CHANGE row on the MIDI Setup page are turned off 01V96 Owner s Manual Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes 221 Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes You can control 01V96 parameters in real time by using Parameter Change messages that are System Exclusive messages instead of usi
383. nnectors that accept line level and microphone signals The nom signal level of both types of connectors ranges from 60 dB to 4 dB Phantom power is not supplied to these connectors If you connect cables to INPUT A and INPUT B connectors of the same number only the signal from INPUT B is effective Tip hot VENTES 1 ground ale plug 3 cold 1 4 TRS phone plug Ring cold 2 hot Sleeve ground INPUT connectors 13 16 These balanced TRS phone type connectors accept line level signals The nominal signal level ranges from 26 dB to 4 dB INPUT 15 amp 16 connectors are available only when the AD 15 16 button is turned off page 15 8 INSERT I O connectors These unbalanced TRS phone type connectors are used for channel insert ins and outs Use a split cable to insert an external effects processor to AD input channels Tip send 1 4 phone plug i Tip send Ring return 1 4 phone plug Sleeve To processor s input ground Tip return Sleeve ground 1 4 phone plug Connect to INSERT jack Sleeve ground From processor s output 01V96 Owner s Manual Control Surface 15 2 PAD switches These switches turn on or off the 20 dB pad attenuator for each AD Input 5 GAIN controls These controls adjust input sensitivity for each AD Input Input sensitivity is 16 dB to 60 dB when the Pad is off and 4 dB to 40 dB when the Pad is on 6 PEAK indicato
384. ntrolled in the Channel Strip sec tion When the 1 16 button is turned on you can control Channels 1 16 When the 17 32 button is turned on you can control Channels 17 32 See page 31 for more infor mation on the Input Channel layers 2 MASTER button This button selects the Master Layer as the layer controlled in the Channel Strip section You can use this layer to control Bus Outs and AUX Sends See page 31 for more information on the Master layer 8 REMOTE button This button selects the Remote Layer as the layer controlled in the Channel Strip section You can use this layer to control external MIDI devices or computer based DAWs See page 185 for more information on the Remote layer Tip The ST IN section is not affected by the layer settings Display Section YAMAHA boog 5 amp amp aaa m m G CD Display This is a 320 x 240 dot LCD display with a backlight 2 Stereo meters These 12 segment level meters display the final output level of the Stereo Bus 3 Contrast control This control adjusts the display contrast 2 F1 F4 buttons These buttons select a page from a multi page screen Selecting a tab at the bottom of the screen using one of these buttons displays the corresponding
385. number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH 0 ch data count ch 128 cl COUNT LOW cl 01001100 4C l 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01010001 51 Q Ommmmmmm mh 0 127 Library no 1 128 Ommmmmmm ml 256 Channel current data BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee Invert U de 1 amp 0x7F EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 01V96 Owner s Manual 314 Appendix C MIDI 2 8 2 18 Compressor library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes ofthe DATA NAME indicate the bank number See above STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01001100 4c LU 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01011001 59 Y Ommmmmmm mh 0 127 Library no 1 128 Ommmmmmm ml 256 Channel current data EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 19 Gate library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number O Library no 1 127 Library no 128 256 2
386. o Tools channel send level AUX 6 button Press and hold down this button and press the desired SEL button to reset the correspond ing channel fader level Move the cursor to the parameter control on the display then press and hold down this but ton and press ENTER to reset the corresponding channel panpot to center While you are holding down the AUX 6 button the SELECT ASSIGN parameter indicates DFLT AUX 7 button When this button is turned on you can adjust the selected channel panpot using the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN control If you turn on this button while a Channel Display mode page is selected you can adjust each channel panpot using parameter controls 1 16 To adjust the stereo channel panpots press this button repeatedly to toggle between L and R channels AUX 8 button Use this button along with the desired SEL button to assign a plug in to the corresponding Pro Tools channel see page 198 HOME button This button turns Flip mode see page 197 on or off Flip mode enables you to adjust the Aux Send parameters using the faders ON buttons and the PAN control 01V96 Owner s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 193 DISPLAY ACCESS section PAIR GROUP button Press this button while a Channel Display mode or Meter Display mode page is selected to display a Group ID to which each channel belongs EFFECT button Press this button to display or hide the Insert window in Pro Tools
387. o select a signal to be input to the effects processor move the cursor to the desired In parameter box select a signal from the following options then press ENTER No assignment AUXI Bnei Aux Sends 1 8 INS CH1 32 Input Channel 1 32 Insert Out INS BUS1 8 Bus 1 8 Insert Out INSAUXI 8 Aux Send 1 8 Insert Out INSST U R Stereo Out Insert Out To use the internal effects processors via Aux Sends select Aux 1 8 in most cases You can patch a different signal to the other input of 2 in 2 out effect programs 01V96 Owner s Manual Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends 155 Tip You can patch a signal to multiple effect inputs Move the cursor to an IN parameter box and press the ENTER button The Patch Select window appears This window enables you to select the input source quickly 4 To patch a signal output from the effects processor move the cursor to the desired OUT parameter box select the signal destination from the following options then press ENTER ui RAE qh ese No assignment s CHIS 2 Input Channels 1 32 STIN IL ST IN 4R ST IN Channels IL 4R INS 1 32 Input Channel Insert In INS BUSI 8 Bus 1 8 Insert In INS AUXI S Aux 1 8 Insert In INSST L amp INS ST R Stereo Bus Insert In To use the internal effects p
388. o signals In this case digital audio signals and wordclock signals are transferred via the 2 OUT DIGITAL and 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks or via the digital I O card installed in the rear panel slot Digital audio signal T Digital 1 card Wordclock signal External device dnjas pue suondauu0D ES i 1 OOO oy In nj oot Specifying the Wordclock Source To digitally connect the 01V96 to external devices you must specify the wordclock source for the system Follow the steps below Note When you change the wordclock settings on any device in your digital audio system some devices may output noise due to being out of synchronization Be sure to turn down your monitoring device before changing wordclock settings 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Word Clock page appears On this page you can view the current synchronization status of input signals at each slot and connector DIO SETUP Initial Data GeL STI2 5113 5714 cien IOO 0 oO CLOCK SELECT ORD CLOCK FORMAT PREFER JA PREFER E l3 01V96 Owner s Manual 42
389. of the buttons or keys a function that is usually executed on the dis play pages you can use the assigned button as a shortcut 3 4 The Function to User Defined Keys assignments are stored banks Each bank accommo dates an assignment of all eight buttons See page 243 for more information on the initial nim a bank settings The 01V96 provides eight banks Banks A H Switching banks enables you to change the assignment quickly Follow the steps below to assign functions to the USER DEFINED KEYS 1 Pressthe USER ACCESS UTILITY button to locate the Utility User Def page UTILITY iti CH1 CH1 00 dai u Esa te wz 3 J 1i TLE 5 8 This page contains the following parameters CD INITIALIZE This button resets the contents of all banks to their initial settings 2 BANK These buttons select the desired banks 3 TITILE This parameter displays the name of the bank selected by the BANK parameter button Move the cursor to the TITLE parameter box then press ENTER The Title Edit win dow appears enabling you to enter a name 4 1 8 These parameter boxes enable you to assign functions to USER DEFINED KEYS 2 Movethe cursor to the desired BANK parameter button then press ENTER The corresponding bank is selected and the functions assigned to the User Defined buttons in that bank are displayed in the 1 12 parameter boxes Tip When you select a function that is executed b
390. of the counter is specified in Pro Tools The following three check boxes in the COUNTER section indicate the cur rently selected format TIME CODE Pro Tools timecode format is set to Time Code usaq saa Pro Tools timecode format is set to Feet Frames BEATS Pro Tools timecode format is set to Bars Beats 01V96 Owner s Manual E o 3u05 l 190 Chapter 17 Remote Control If no check boxes are selected Pro Tools timecode format is set to Min utes Seconds or Samples 8 SELECT ASSIGN This parameter indicates the current parameter which can be adjusted via the parame ter controls on the page For example Pan PanR SndA SndB SndC SndD or SndE see page 192 4 WHEEL MODE This parameter indicates the function currently assigned to the Parameter wheel see page 193 5 INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section This section enables you to insert plug ins into Pro Tools channels and adjust plug in settings Use the left and right Tab Scroll buttons to change the parameters displayed in this section INSERT ASSIGN EDIT ASSIGN COMPARE BYPASS INSERT iPress a channel strip s INSERT switch ito assign edit an insert eie O O O O Clo Clo ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER merc
391. om the Display 87 95 When this button is turned on the currently selected Input Channel is routed to the Stereo Bus D When this button is turned on the currently selected Input Channel is routed to its Direct Out See page 125 for more information on the Direct Out 5 ALL STEREO This button turns on the 5 button for all channels on the page 6 ALL BUS This button turns on the Bus buttons 1 8 for all channels on the page 7 ALL CLEAR This button clears all routing assignments on the page SURROUND MODE This field displays the current Surround mode The routings of the ST IN Channels L amp R are linked The D button is unavailable for the ST IN Channels Viewing Input Channel Settings You can view and adjust parameter settings for the currently selected Input Channel on the View Parameter or Fader pages Viewing the Gate Compressor and EQ Settings To display the View Parameter page for a specific Input Channel use the corresponding SEL button to select the desired channel then press the DISPLAY ACCESS VIEW but ton repeatedly Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons or ENTER button to modify the setting CH1 CH1 initial Datla ey ey O m 0 0 LOW L MID H MID HIGH 40 L SHELF 0 70 0 70 H SHELF 6Gm 2 GG Lorr OUTGAIN KNEE G 8
392. onfirmation messages HOME button indicator 28 Page tabs ete 28 28 Parameter boxes 29 Rotary controls amp faders 29 Sampling rate indicator 28 Selecting channels 32 Selecting display pages 28 Selecting fader modes 33 Selecting layers 31 Tab scroll arrows 28 Title edit window 30 OPERATION 233 Operation lock a Optional card 26 Installing 26 Options 323 I O catd 71 5 923 Oscillator ot een 230 Other functions 225 Preferences eee UR 226 Output patch 22002000 123 Initial settings 2222 44 249 Parameters 247 Output patch library 175 Output section eee 70 P Package contents 222222222 vi PAD switches Pair Confirmation preference PAIR GROUP button Pair Grup Comp page Pair Grup In EQ page Pair Grup In Fader page Pair Grup In Mute page s Pair Grup Input page Pair Grup Out Comp page Pair Grup Out EQ page Pair Grup Out Fader page Pair Grup Out Mute page
393. or gt FBG 99 to 99 mal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed back HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTEL 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L NOTER 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R NOTEFBL 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB DLY L NOTEFBR 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB DLY R 1 F F h 447 Pa d J d d Maximum value depends on the tempo setting CHORUS Two input two output chorus effect Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0 100 Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0 100 Pitch modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 412 0 dB Low shelving filter gain 100 2 8 00 2 peaking type frequency EQG 12 0 to 412 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQQ 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH 50 0 2 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 Ha BOIS F 440 h 4 J J d 01V96 Owner s Manual
394. or type recall a program that uses the desired compressor type from the Compressor library then adjust the parameters as desired 7 Press the ENTER button to turn on the ON OFF button located in the lower left corner of the page The ON OFF button turns the currently selected Input Channel s compressor on or off 8 While a musician plays the musical instrument adjust the compressor parameters so move the cursor to the desired parameter in the PARAMETER section on the page then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons Input Channels 1 32 feature a gate that can be used independently of the compressor use the gate first press the DYNAMICS button then the F2 button to access the Gate library After you recall a gate program press the Dynamics button then the F1 button to display the Gate Edit page which enables you to adjust gate parameters Recording When you finish setting up each channel you can start recording on the digital MTR as fol lows 1 Start recording on the digital MTR and cue the musicians to start playing the musical instruments During recording press the HOME button to display the Meter CH1 32 page or the Master page and check to confirm that the Input Channel levels and Bus 1 8 output levels are not clipping 2 When you finish playing stop the digital MTR To check the recording play the digital MTR from the beginning 4 If you are satisfied
395. or R To switch between channels Land R for the pan setting press the same SEL button repeatedly The channel currently being controlled is indicated in the upper left corner of the display mpm i NAIVNI 01V96 Owner s Manual Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface 91 EQ ing Input Channels 1 Pressthe SEL button or move the fader for the channel you wish to control 2 Tocontrol EQ for the currently selected channel press one of the following buttons to select the band you wish to adjust HIGH button HIGH band H MID button HIGH MID band L MID button LOW MID band LOW button LOW band 3 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL Q FREQUENCY and GAIN controls to adjust the frequency and gain of the band selected in Step 2 When the Auto EQUALIZER Display page 227 check box is on the 01V96 displays the EQ EQ Edit page Initial Dota m STI1 STI2 STI3 STI4 BUSI ane n BUS1 EQUALIZER EDIT Sjouueu 1ndul N LIBRARY A IN ATT JA OUT ATT Z If the check box is off the parameter value currently being adjusted pops up See page 84 for more information on EQ DIO SETUP Initial Data STI1 5112 5713 STI 4 CH6 CH6 0 EDIT Eum HORD CLOCK SELECT ETE oles WORD CLOCKAR FORMAT JA PREFER ZL PREFER 2 Tip Pressing and holding down the button selec
396. or lights up The SEL button indicator of the paired partner flashes 3 To select the Stereo Out press the STEREO SEL button Repeatedly pressing the STEREO SEL button toggles between the Stereo Out left and Ste reo Out right channels If the currently displayed page contains a relevant Stereo Out parameter the cursor moves to that parameter automatically If the currently displayed page contains no such parame ter a page that does contain such a parameter is selected automatically 01V96 Owner s Manual Selecting Fader Modes The function of channel faders 1 16 depends on the selected Layer and Fader mode Selecting Fader Modes 33 1 Select a layer that includes the desired channel see page 31 2 Pressthe FADER MODE buttons to select a Fader FABER mode fel fel The button indicators identify the following Fader modes AU AES CAB CAS When the HOME button indicator lights up You can use channel faders to control Input Channels AES WAR LUKE and ST IN Channel levels or Output Channels Aux Out 1 8 Bus 1 8 master levels HOME METER When one of the AUX1 AUXS button indicators light up You can use channel faders to control the correspond ing Aux Send level The following table shows the channel fader functions for each Layer and Fader mode LAYER buttons 1 16 button
397. or to the desired Pan control then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the value D Pan controls These knobs adjust the channel pan settings Press the ENTER button to reset the currently selected Pan control to center 2 MODE The MODE parameter determines how paired Input Channels are panned There are three Pan modes as follows INDIVIDUAL In Individual mode paired Input Channel 1 2 pan controls operate independently 5 CENTER CENTER GANG In Gang mode paired Input Channel pan controls operate in unison maintaining the A N current pan range R14 INV GANG In Inverse Gang mode paired Input Channel 1 2 pan controls operate unison but move in x4 opposite directions Lei Rei 01V96 Owner s Manual 86 Chapter 7 Input Channels You can adjust the pan setting for the ST IN Channels L R separately You can also adjust the pan setting for the Input Channels using the PAN control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section Surround Pan is available when the 01V96 is in Surround mode Refer to Chapter 12 for more information on Surround Pan Routing Input Channels You can route each Input Channel to the Stereo Bus Bus 1 8 or its own Direct Out With the default setting signals are routed only to the Stereo Bus However you can patch signals to a single or multiple destinations if necessary 1 Press the
398. orrect sig nal levels that are too low 4 BAND EQ 4 band equalizer This parametric EQ features four bands high high mid low mid and low INPUT DELAY Input delay This section enables you to delay input signals You can use this delay to fine tune the timing between channels or as a delay effect with feedback 01V96 Owner s Manual 78 Chapter 7 Input Channels ON On Off This section enables you to turn the channel on or off The channel is muted with the Off setting LEVEL This section enables you to adjust the input level of the Input Channel signal PAN This section enables you to adjust the pan setting of the signals routed from the Input Chan nels to the Stereo Bus You can also apply the pan setting to a pair of Bus channels AUX Aux Send level This section enables you to adjust the level of signals routed to Aux Sends 1 8 The signals can be routed to Aux Sends from either the pre fader or post fader position INSERT This section enables you to patch input signals to external devices via the on board I O con nectors or I O card or insert the internal effect processors You can patch any inputs out puts or I O card channels Note that this is different from the INSERT I O connectors in the AD Input section METER This section enables you to switch the metering position of the signal levels that are dis played in the Meter page See page 34 for more information on selecting the m
399. ortcut OPTION ALL DAW OPTION ALL 111 Track Arming 23 Track Arming 23 160 DAW Shortcut CTRL CLUCH DAW CTRL CLUCH 112 Track Arming 24 Track Arming 24 161 DAW Shortcut ALT FINE DAW ALT FINE 113 Track Arming All Clear Track Arming CLR 102 DAN BAP t DAW BANK 114 DAW DAW REC 163 DAW BANK DAW BANK 115 DAW PLAY DAW PLAY 164 DAW Channel DAW Channel 116 DAW STOP DAW STOP 165 DAW Channel DAW Channel 117 DAW FF DAW FF 166 DAW REC RDY X DAW REC RDY X 118 DAW REW DAW REW 167 DAW REC RDY ALL DAW REC RDY ALL 119 DAW SHUTTLE DAW SHUTTLE 120 DAW SCRUB DAW SCRUB 121 DAW AUDITION DAW AUDITION 122 DAW PRE DAW PRE 123 DAW IN DAW IN 124 DAW OUT DAW OUT 125 DAW POST DAW POST 126 DAW RTZ DAW RTZ 127 DAW END DAW END 128 DAW ONLINE DAW ONLINE 129 DAW LOOP DAW LOOP 130 DAW QUICKPUNCH DAW QUICKPUNCH 131 DAW GROUP STATUS ae SOUP STA 132 DAW AUTO FADER DAW AUTO FADER 133 DAW AUTO MUTE DAW AUTO MUTE 134 DAW AUTO PAN DAW AUTO PAN 135 DAW AUTO SEND DAW AUTO SEND 136 DAW AUTO PLUGIN DAW AUTO PLUGIN DAW AUTO SEND 137 DAW AUTO SEND MUTE MUTE 138 DAW AUTO READ DAW AUTO READ 139 DAW AUTO TOUCH DAW AUTO TOUCH 140 DAW AUTO LATCH DAW AUTO LATCH 141 DAW AUTO WRITE DAW AUTO WRITE 142 DAW AUTO TRIM DAW AUTO TRIM 143 DAW AUTO OFF DAW AUTO OFF 144 DAW AUTO SUSPEND S d 145 DAW AUTO STATUS DAW AUTO STATUS 146 DAW MONITOR STATUS DAW MONI STATUS DAW CREATE 147 DAW CR
400. ost parameters for paired Input Channels are linked to each other GLOBAL PRE POST buttons enable you to set all Input Channels simultaneously includ ing those not displayed on the current page to pre fader or post fader Note Do not raise the level of the Aux Sends patched to the effects processor on the effects return channels For example by default Aux 1 is routed to the input of the internal Effects processor 1 and Land R of ST IN Channel 1 are patched to the processor s output Under these conditions if you raise the level of the send signals from ST IN Channel 1 to Aux 1 the signals are returned to ST IN Channel 1 creating a signal loop and possibly damaging your speakers 01V96 Owner s Manual Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels 117 Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels You can view and set parameters for all Aux Send 1 8 including setting levels and Pre Post parameters This is convenient when you wish to visually check all Aux Send settings or simultaneously adjust the levels of certain channels routed to Aux 1 8 1 Press one of the FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 8 buttons repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears Viewl1 16 page This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 1 16 View17 STI page This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 17 32 and ST IN Channels 1 4 These pages display the so
401. other types may be a fire and electrical shock hazard This unit has a slot for installing mini YGDAI cards For technical reasons certain card combinations are not supported Before installing any cards check the Yamaha web site to if your card is compatible Installing cards that are not endorsed by Yamaha may cause elec trical shock fire or damage to the unit If the power cord is damaged i e cut or a bare wire is exposed ask your dealer for a replacement Using the unit with a damaged power cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard If you notice any abnormality such as smoke odor or noise or if a foreign object or liquid gets inside the unit turn it off immediately Remove the power cord from the AC outlet Consult your dealer for repair Using the unit in this condition is a fire and electrical shock hazard Should this unit be dropped or the cabinet be damaged turn the power switch off remove the power plug from the AC outlet and contact your dealer If you continue using the unit without heeding this instruction fire or electrical shock may result Cautions Keep this unit away from the following locations Locations exposed to oil splashes or steam such as near cooking stoves humidifiers etc Unstable surfaces such as a wobbly table or slope Locations exposed to excessive heat such as inside a car with all the windows closed or places that receive direct sunlight Locations subject to excessive
402. ou can also select a channel on another layer by switching layers 4 In the same way press the SEL button for other channels you wish to add to the link The EQ or compressor settings for the first channel added to the link are applied to all sub sequently added channels 5 After all desired channels are added to the link edit the EQ or compressor parameters for one of the linked channels The edits for the EQ or compressor parameters are applied to the rest of the linked channels 01V96 Owner s Manual Internal Effects 153 14 Internal Effects This chapter describes how to use the 01V96 s internal effects processors About the Internal Effects The 01V96 features four internal multi effects processors These effects processors offer numerous types of effects including reverbs delays modulation based effects and com bination effects designed especially for use with surround sound Note When the 01V96 operates at a high sampling frequency 88 2 kHz or 96 kHz you can use only Effects processors 1 and 2 Processor inputs and outputs can be patched to various sources For example effects pro cessor inputs can be fed from the Aux Sends and output to ST IN Channels effects send return Effects processors can also be inserted into Input Channels Bus Outs Aux Outs or the Stereo Out Effects processors 1 through 4 create 1 in 2 out or 2 in 2 out effects
403. page See page 28 for more information on displaying a page 01V96 Owner s Manual joued S DLNS IN 20 Chapter 2 Control Surface amp Rear Panel 5 Left Tab Scroll lt button Right Tab Scroll gt gt button If there are more pages available than the four whose tabs are currently displayed use these buttons to display the additional tabs These buttons are available only when the left or right Tab Scroll arrow appears ao m m m m F A 1 32 A 2 4 8 OUT FADER A OUT MUTE 8 Tab Scroll arrow SELECTED CHANNEL Section SELECTED CHANNEL D 2 9 CD PAN control This control adjusts the pan of the channel selected by the SEL button 2 HIGH button 3 HIGH MID button 2 LOW MID button 5 LOW button These buttons select the EQ band HIGH HIGH MID LOW MID LOW of the channel selected by the SEL button The corresponding button indicator of the currently selected band lights up 6 Q control This control adjusts the currently selected band Q 7 FREQUENCY control This control adjusts the currently selected band frequency GAIN control This control adjusts the currently selected band gain 01V96 Owner s Manual Control Surface 21 SCENE MEMORY Section SCENE MEMORY STORE Y n RECAL
404. phantom power feed to four corresponding inputs When the switches are on 48V phantom power is supplied to the INPUT A con nectors AD Output Section STEREO OUT 4dB BAL MONITOR OUT OMNI OUT 4dB BAL 4dB BAL QG TTT 4 MONITOR OUT connectors L R These balanced TRS phone type con Tip hot A nectors output monitoring signals or 1 4 TRS phone plug cold 2TR IN signals The nominal signal level is 4 dB You can select signals using the Mon Sleeve ground itor Source selector 01V96 Owner s Manual 24 Chapter 2 Control Surface amp Rear Panel 2 OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 Tip hot These balanced TRS phone type con Rin nectors output any Bus signals 1 4 TRS phone plug cold channel Direct Out signals The nom inal signal level is 4 dB Sleeve ground 8 STEREO OUT connectors L R 2 hot These balanced XLR 3 32 type con XLR plug 3 cold nectors output the Stereo Out signals JUS The nominal signal level is 4 dB 1 ground Digital I O Section WORD CLOCK OUT 2TR OUT 2TR IN DIGITAL DIGITAL o 90 OUT 1 T D WORD CLOCK OUT connector This BNC connector outputs a wordclock signal from the 01V96 to a connected external device 2 WORD CLOCK IN connector This BNC connector inputs a wordclock signal from a connected external device to the 01V96
405. play the Aux Pan page RUX1 Initial Data glsrit 5112 STI3 STI4 Em etal QO O D O RUX1 2 PAN INPUT PAN LINK EFE 3 INPUT 5 IN z 3 4 5 5 7 amp 1L 1R CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER 17 18 19 za 21 22 23 24 SL 3R OOO X QU CY QU CO CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER D Aux pan controls These controls adjust the pan setting of signals routed from Input Channels to paired Aux buses 2 MODE The MODE parameter determines how paired Input Channels are panned 3 INPUT PAN LINK When this parameter is turned on Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Pan 4 Move the cursor to the Aux pan control of the desired Input Channel the rotate the Parameter wheel to set the pan value 5 If necessary move the cursor to the MODE parameter box then rotate the Parameter wheel to select INDIVIDUAL GANG or INV GANG then press ENTER If the INPUT PAN LINK ON OFF button is turned off this Mode setting is independent of the Mode parameter on the Pan page See page 85 for more information on Mode options 6 To link the Input Channel Pan setting with the Aux Send Pan setting move the cursor to the INPUT PAN LINK ON OFF button then press ENTER The pan positions on the Pan page
406. play the Pan Route page This page enables you to set the panpots for signals routed from the Input Channels to the Stereo Bus and for signals routed from the Input Channels to the odd even buses 5 Move the cursor to the PAN parameter controls for the Input Channels that are assigned to the odd even buses then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to set the pan PANJ CH1 MODE L r 1 96990 CENTER CENTER 113 CENTER 1 RYT Lei PAN parameter 1 18 11 12 13 14 5 16 Youcanalso use the SEL buttons to select Input Channels and the SELECTED CHAN NEL PAN control to adjust the pan setting 6 To route Input Channel signals to Direct Outs press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Direct Out page appears The Direct Out page enables you to specify the output connectors or channels to which each Input Channel is directly patched 7 Move the cursor to the parameter box for the Input Channels you want to route to Direct Outs then specify the output connectors or channels 01V96 Owner s Manual 54 Chapter 5 Tutorial 8 9 In this example Input Channel 9 12 signals are routed to ADAT OUT channels 5 8 PRTCH Initial Data 5112 5114 CH1 CHi O G O DIRECT OUT PRE PRE FADER 3
407. ple you cannot use INPUT A 2 and INPUT B 2 at the same time If you connect cables to and B con nectors of the same number only the signal from INPUT B is effec tive e g B 2 takes priority over A 2 INPUT connectors 13 16 13 15 These balanced TRS type phone connectors accept line level signals When the AD 15 16 source selector is turned on pushed in signals M from INPUT 15 and 16 are ignored Instead signals from the 2TR IN connector will be routed to AD Input Channels 15 and 16 Tip You can patch signals input from the INPUT connectors to any Input Channels See page 121 for information on patching input signals to Input Channels INSERT I O connectors m These TRS type phone connectors are used to insert external as devices such as effects processors into AD Input Channels INSERT I O INSERT Phantom Power EHANTOM AN Inputs 1 through 12 feature switchable 48V phantom ee powering for use with condenser type microphones and direct boxes The phantom 48V switches on the rear panel turn on or off the 48V phantom power feed to the corresponding inputs e PAD switches Inputs 1 through 12 feature pad switches which attenuate input sig nals by 20 dB These switches are effective on both INPUT A and B signals 01V96 Owner s Manual O I Je36iq 8 B 70 Chapter 6 Analog I O amp Digital I
408. press ENTER to confirm the title To cancel the title entry move the cursor to the CANCEL button then press ENTER 01V96 Owner s Manual Selecting Layers 31 Selecting Layers Input Channels and Output Channels Bus Outs amp Aux Outs are arranged into layers as illustrated below There are four layers altogether Input Channel Layer 17 32 5225 22 soiseg w Master Layer 2 Z Remote Layer 227022004 The currently selected layer determines the function of the channel strip SEL buttons SOLO buttons ON buttons and faders Use the LAYER buttons to select a layer you wish to edit using the channel strip controls 1 16 17 52 MASTER REMOTE The following table shows the layers that you can access using the LAYER buttons and the parameters you can control using the channel strips on each layer Channel Strips LAYER buttons Layers 1 8 9 16 1 16 button Input Channel Layer 1 16 Input Channels 1 16 17 32 button Input Channel Layer 17 32 Input Channels 17 32 Operation depends on the selected REMOTE button Remote Layer target see page 185 MASTER button Master Layer z Send masters Out masters Tip The function of each channel strip fader depends on the currently selected Fader mode see page 33 The STEREO SEL button ON button and STEREO fader alw
409. punong Fy Ed 4 36 tR36 eR36 12 8 844 16 20 16 sound image moves between left and right while tracing an arc With this pattern you can also fine tune the radius and shape of the arc using the WIDTH DEPTH OFFSET f and OFFSET parameters L40 2 48 844 44 eL20 F32 28 2 56 4 32 2 24 01V96 Owner s Manual 144 Chapter 12 Surround sound image moves between front and rear while tracing an arc With this pattern you can also fine tune the radius and shape of the arc using the WIDTH DEPTH OFFSET and OFFSET parameters L40 48 44 44 20 32 28 56 32 24 0 The sound image moves while tracing a circle or oval With this pat tern you can also fine tune the radius and shape of the circle or oval using the WIDTH DEPTH OFFSET and OFFSET param eters L44 F48 eRa2 24 L24 24 960 2 40 eRs52 2 40 4 If necessary fine tune the trajectory by editing the WIDTH DEPTH OFFSET 2 and OFFSET parameter values 5 To move the sound image move the cursor to anywhere outside the param eter boxes then rotate the Parameter wheel The sound image of the selected channel moves along the
410. quence software may occasionally drop out during Bulk Dump transmission To avoid this we recommend that you use the included Studio Manager software to store 01V96 data to an external device 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI messages see page 212 2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the 01V96 can transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from the external device 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F4 button The MIDI Bulk page appears MIDI Initial Data glsrit STI2 STI3 STI4 auccm 00 tan Uu BULK DUMP REQUEST p oa INTERVAL SETUPMEM PGH TABLE TABLE PLUG IN ns m SETUP PGH ASGN JA CTL ASGN The page includes the following parameters 1 CATEGORY section This section enables you to select data for transmission and reception 2 REQUEST Move the cursor to this button then press ENTER to transmit messages from the 01V96 that request a second 01V96 connected to the first 01V96 to transmit the data specified in the CATEGORY section This button is used primarily when two 01V96s are connected in cascade 3 TRANSMIT Move the cursor to this button then press ENTER to transmit data specified in the CATEGORY section to an external MIDI device 4 INTERVAL This parameter
411. r by using MIDI Bulk Dump see page 222 General Library Operation Most library functions are the same for each library 1 Use the buttons on the top panel to locate the desired library pages The procedure for locating library pages varies depending on the library Refer to the latter part of this chapter for more information on how to display the desired library page The example below assumes you have located the Input Patch library page PATCH Initial Data 571257135714 CH1 CHI 0015 mamo 0 O 0 INPUT PATCH LIBRARY TITLE EDIT Ese sauelqn A Cn C 4 CO iM IM LIB PATCH FAOUTPLT 1122 13 Thelibrary memory title list is displayed in the middle of the page The message Data appears in the title column of empty library memories icon is displayed next to the name of read only preset memories You cannot store clear or edit the titles of these memories Memories 0 and U are special read only memories Recall memory 0 to reset the param eter settings to their initial values Recall U to undo memory recall and store operations 01V96 Owner s Manual 172 Chapter 16 Libraries 2 Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the desired memory The selected memory appears inside the dotted box Move the cursor to one of the following function buttons then pre
412. ral Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94 8008 Z rich Switzerland Tel 01 383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 60203900 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Central Europe Branch Nederland Clarissenhof 5 b 4133 AB Vianen The Netherlands Tel 0347 358 040 PA08 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgef hrten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragsh ndlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungslandern erh ltlich Para detalles sobre productos contacte su tienda Yamaha m s cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo BELGIUM LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Belgium Rue de Geneve Genevastraat 10 1140 Brussels Belgium Tel 02 726 6032 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70 77312 Marne la Vall e Cedex 2 France Tel 01 64 61 4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S P A Combo Division Viale Italia 88 20020 Lainate Milano Italy Tel 02 935 771 SPAIN PORTUGAL Yamaha Hazen M sica S A Ctra de la Coruna km 17 200 28230 Las Rozas Madrid Spain Tel 91 639 8888 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J A Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S 400 43 G teborg Sweden Tel 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK 2730 Herlev Denmark Tel 44 92 49 00 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Neringspark 1 N 1345 ster s Norway Tel 67 16 77 70
413. rating Bus 1 8 Aux Send 1 4 Stereo and Solo Bus signals via the ADAT IN and OUT connectors and two 8 channel digital I O cards such as MY8 AT PRTCH Initial Dat Initial Dota dl C SLOT OUTPUT PATCH 1 CAS BUS1 5 Tip Patching vary depending the type and number of buses used for the cascade nection Note Sincethe number of channels available on the digital I O card is limited only Aux Sends 1 4 are cascaded in this example Using 16 channel digital I O card such as MY16 AT enables you to cascade all buses 5 Onthe master unit press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Cascade In page appears 6 Select the Input Channels on the master unit to which the Bus signals are input from the Slave unit The following display page is an example of receiving the slave unit s Bus 1 8 Aux Send 1 4 Stereo Bus and Solo Bus signals via the ADAT IN and OUT connectors and two 8 channel digital I O cards such as MY8 AT PRTCH 0 Initial Data CH1 CH1 ST STEREO 4 SOLO LLLA ATTENUAT I ON PATCH ZX INPUT INS JA EFFECT Note Be sure to patch the slave Bus signals to the same Buses on the master unit Incorrect patching will result in an incorrect cascade connection 7 Onthe master unit press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeat e
414. rd MY8 AT 16 MY8 TD etc installed in the slot This system will support track recording overdubbing track bouncing and mixdown You can also control the hard disk recorder s transport section by sending MMC commands from the 01V96 to the recorder 01V96 Owner s Manual Connections 39 Configuring a recording system that uses DAW Digital Audio Workstation Computer MIDI interface dnjas pue suondauu0D ES Master recorder TO HOST USB port ADAT IN Effects processor 2TR IN connector 2TR OUT connector OOO 5155 iu guuuuo LE connectors HHE E 3 E Bee T INPUT connector PHONES jack In this system the 01V96 with an optional card MY8 AT MY16 AT MY8 AE etc installed in the slot is connected to a computer based DAW Digital Audio Wo
415. re not paired See page 92 for more information Viewing the Pan Fader and Aux Send Level Settings To display the View Fader page of a certain Input Channel use the corresponding SEL button to select the desired channel then press the DISPLAY ACCESS VIEW button repeatedly Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the setting 00 00 Pas 5 6 00 00 Pas D PAN ON Fader section control This control adjusts the currently selected Input Channel s Pan parameter Press the ENTER button to reset the Pan control to Center 01V96 Owner s Manual Setting the Input Channels from the Display 89 ON OFF button This button turns on or off the currently selected Input Chan nel This parameter sets the fader position of the currently selected Input Channel The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0 0 dB Press the ENTER button to reset the Fader to 0 0 dB 2 SURROUND PAN section SURROUND The Surround pan parameters for the currently selected Input Channel are displayed only when a Surround mode is selected See page 135 for more information on Surround pan 8 BUS ROUTING FOLLOW PAN section BUS ROUTING This section enables you to select a destination Bus for the selected channel When the D button is turned on
416. rkstation 01V96 can provide audio input and output for the DAW If you connect the 01V96 and the computer via USB the 01V96 s Remote function enables you to control the DAW s locate and transport functions and change the parameters 01V96 Owner s Manual 40 Chapter 4 Connections and Setup Wordclock Connections and Settings About Wordclock Digital audio equipment must be synchronized when digital audio signals are transferred from one device to another Even if both devices use identical sampling rates digital signals may not transfer correctly or audible noise or unwanted clicks may occur if the digital audio processing circuits inside each digital audio device are not synchronized with each other Wordclocks are signals that enable digital audio processing circuits to synchronize with each other In a typical digital audio system one device operates as the wordclock master trans mitting wordclock signals and the other devices operate as wordclock slaves synchronizing to the wordclock master If you are digitally connecting the 01V96 to other equipment you must decide which device to use as the wordclock master and which devices to use as slaves then set up all the devices accordingly The 01V96 can be used as the wordclock master running at either 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz or 96 kHz or slaved to an external wordclock source Wordclock Connections To establish wordclock synchronization between the 01V96 a
417. rocessors via Aux Sends select CH 1 32 or ST IN 1 4 in most cases The channels you assign here will become the effects return channels You can patch a different channel to the other output of a 1 in 2 out or 2 in 2 out effect program to create stereo effects Tip Ifyou select an ST IN Channel as the destination you can patch the L and R channel signals separately Youcan also use the Patch Select window to set the OUT parameter boxes as explained in Step 3 Thenumber of inputs available for each effect varies depending on the type of effect programs initially recalled Note You cannot select a channel as the destination of multiple effect signals If you select a channel that is already selected in another OUT parameter box that OUT parameter box switches its indicator to not assigned 5 Adjust the level of Aux Sends patched to the effects processor Refer to 9 Aux Outs on page 109 for information on setting the Aux Sends Note Do not raise the level of the Aux Sends patched to the effects processor s input on the effects return channels Otherwise the signal will return to the same channel creating a signal loop and possibly damaging your speakers j29Jj3 H Tip Use the Master layer fader to adjust the final Aux Send output level At this time you can view the level on the Meter Master page see page 34 6 Adjust the level pan
418. rol on the display then press ENTER Pressing ENTER repeatedly toggles between pre and post Setting Send Levels You can adjust Pro Tools Send A E send levels as follows 1 Press the F3 button to select Channel Display mode 2 Press the AUX SELECT AUX 1 AUX 5 buttons to select the desired Sends 3 Move the cursor to the parameter control of channel for which you want to adjust the Send level then rotate the Parameter wheel You can set Send levels by operating the faders if faders ON buttons and the PAN con trol are in Flip mode Refer to Flip Mode for more information Muting Sends A E You can mute Sends by pressing the ON buttons if faders ON buttons and the PAN control are in Flip mode Refer to Flip Mode for more information Panning Sends A E You can pan channel signals sent to stereo Aux Sends by rotating the SELECTED CHAN NEL PAN control if faders ON buttons and the PAN control are in Flip mode Refer to the next section for more information Flip Mode In Flip mode you can use the faders ON buttons and the PAN control to control send levels pre post positions and mute settings as shown in the following table Control Normal mode Flip Mode Faders Channel level AUX Send level ON buttons Channel mute AUX Send mute PAN control Channel pan AUX Send pan 1 Press the FADER MODE HOME button repeatedly so that the button indi cator
419. row enables you to specify MIDI Channels for MIDI message transmis sion and reception The following parameters are available in this row Su This parameter box specifies MIDI Transmit Channel This parameter box specifies MIDI Receive Channel 2 PROGRAM CHANGE This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Program Changes Tx ON OFF Transmission of Program Change messages is enabled or dis abled Rx Reception of Program Change messages is enabled or disabled OMNI ON OFE When this button is turned on Program Changes on all MIDI Channels are received regardless of the CHANNEL row set tings ECHO ON OFF This button determines whether Program Change messages received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port 3 CONTROL CHANGE This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Control Changes Tx ON OFF Transmission of Control Change messages is enabled or dis abled Rx Reception of Control Change messages is enabled or disabled ECHO ON OFF This button determines whether Control Change messages received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port 4 PARAMETER CHANGE This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Parameter Changes 01V96 Owner s Manua
420. rs These indicators light up when the input signal level is 3 dB below clipping Adjust the Pad switch and GAIN control so that the indicator rarely lights up at signal peak 7 SIGNAL indicators These indicators light up when the input signal level exceeds 34 dB AD15 16 selector This button selects AD Input Channel 15 and 16 signals When the button is turned on pushed in the 2TR IN signals page 24 are selected When the button is turned off raised the INPUT 15 and 16 signals are selected Joued S DLNS IN Monitor Out amp Headphones Section 2 10dBV UNBAL MONITOR 2TRIN 2 0 1 0 Lever PHONES MONITOR PHONES OUT CD 2 IN OUT connectors These unbalanced RCA phono connectors input and output line level signals and are typ ically used to connect a master recorder When the AD15 16 selector in the AD Input section 8 is turned on pushed in the sig nals input at the 2TR IN connectors are routed to AD Input Channels 15 and 16 When the Monitor Source selector 2 is turned on pushed in you can monitor the 2TR IN signals from the MONITOR OUT connectors The 2TR OUT signals are always the same as the STEREO OUT signals 2 Monitor Source selector This button selects the signals output from the MONITOR OUT connectors on the rear panel When this button is turned on pushed in you can monitor the signals input from
421. rsor to the LATCH UNLATCH button then press ENTER to select LATCH or UNLATCH depending on how you want the ON buttons to function enne Pressing the ON buttons repeatedly transmits alternating On and Off messages e UNLATCH Pressing and holding down the ON buttons transmits On messages and releasing the ON buttons transmits Off mes sages Tip Refer to the diagrams below for information on how the ON buttons behave when Latch or Unlatch is selected When SW is assigned LATCH MIDI data transmission MIDI data transmission id SW 00 f x1 gt i gt E gt gt UNLATCH MIDI data transmission MIDI data transmission SW 7F SW 00 Off Illuminated Off ox gt EN gt o E When SW is not assigned UNLATCH MIDI data transmission 1 Off Illuminated Off ox gt gt os J is Tip In most situations select Unlatch if SW is not assigned 01V96 Owner s Manual 0430u0 208 Chapter 17 Remote Control 10 To change the channel name move the cursor to the ID LONG parameter box then press ENTER to display the Title Edit window Refer to page 30 for more information on editing names Tip Move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button then press ENTER A window is displayed that enabl
422. s MIDI Equipped with MIDI ports and a USB port for computer connection Scene recall and mix parameter changes via MIDI 01V96 Owner s Manual Control Surface amp Rear Panel 13 2 Control Surface amp Rear Panel Control Surface AD Input Section p 14 SCENE MEMORY Section p 21 DISPLAY ACCESS Section p 18 pued Jeay 8 e ejing 5 IN gm Monitor Out u d amp 4 phones Sec moyon tion p 15 O 10 E 38 T k Se et per lo t FADER MODE Section p 17 p 22 1 Display Section p 19 rara ii rum SELECTED CHANNEL Section p 20 LAYER Section ms u p 19
423. s selected in Step 1 so that the 01V96 can transfer MIDI messages to and from the external device 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F3 button The MIDI Ctl Asgn page appears This page enables you to assign 01V96 parameters to Control Changes OO Initial Data MPA 5712 5713 zt CH1 CH1 27 27 gt CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN TABLES 1 PARAMETER 6 lt 1 FADER H CHRHHEL INPUT 6 5 lt 1 FADER H CHRHHEL INPUT 5 4 lt 1 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT 4 1 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT 3 2 lt 1 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT 2 1615 7 FADER CHANNEL ANPUT 1 L o 551 I reed IHITIRLIZE SETUP PGM_ASGN 01V96 Owner s Manual Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real time Control 217 Tip See page 293 for information on the default Parameter to Control Change assignments 4 Move the cursor to the MODE parameter s TABLE button 1 then press ENTER The MODE parameter determines which MIDI messages are transmitted when 01V96 parameters are adjusted The following options are available for the MODE parameter amp TABLE ete MIDI Control Change messages are transmitted in accordance with the assignments on this page NRPN The assignments on Ctl Asgn page are ignored pre defined NRPNs Non Registered Parameter Numbers are transmitted for remote control
424. s to select Scenes Tip If you assign a Scene to multiple Program Changes the Program Change with the lowest number becomes effective Youcan initialize the Scene to Program Change assignment table by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button then pressing ENTER 6 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F1 button to dis play the MIDI Setup page then specify the MIDI Transmit and Receive Channels 7 Turn on the PROGRAM CHANGE Tx ON OFF and Rx ON OFF buttons Now when the 01V96 receives the Program Changes on the specified MIDI Channels the corresponding Scenes are recalled Also when you switch Scenes on the 01V96 the 01V96 transmits the Program Changes on the specified MIDI Channels Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real time Control You can assign 01V96 parameters to MIDI Control Changes for real time control When the 01V96 receives a Control Change the assigned 01V96 parameter is set accordingly Also when you adjust a parameter on the 01V96 the 01V96 transmits the assigned Control Change message Tip You can store a Parameter to Control Change assignment table to an external device by using MIDI Bulk Dump or the included Studio Manager software 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI messages see page 212 2 Make connections using the port
425. scene memories in compressed form STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH 0 ch data count ch 128 cl COUNT LOW cl 01001100 4c 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01101101 6D m Ommmmmmm mh m 0 99 256 8192 Scene0 99 EDIT BUFFER UNDO Ommmmmmm ml Receive is effective 1 99 256 8192 01V96 Owner s Manual MIDI Data Format 31 1 BLOCK INFO 0ttttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 2 8 2 4 Setup memory bulk dump request format Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message DATA Oddddddd ds Scene data of block bb ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel de FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ce Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F 01001100 4C EOX 11110111 7 End of exclusive 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 2 8 2 2 Scene memory bulk dump request format 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 The second and third bytes ofthe DATA NAME indicate the scene number that 03800011 43 JC is being requested If this is 256 the data of
426. see pages 79 127 6 PAN ROUTING button This button displays a Pan Route page enabling you to select a Bus to which the selected channel signal is routed adjust the selected channel pan settings adjust the level of signals routed from Buses 1 8 to the Stereo Bus and adjust the stereo or surround pan settings see pages 85 135 PAIR GROUP button This button displays a Pair Grup page enabling you to create or cancel channel pairs and group multiple channel faders or ON buttons see pages 93 147 PATCH button This button displays a Patch page enabling you to patch input signals and Bus Out signals to Input channels or patch signals to the desired output connectors see page 121 DYNAMICS button This button displays a Dynamics page enabling you to control channel gates and compres sors see page 81 EQ button This button displays an EQ page enabling you to set the equalizer and attenuator of the selected channel see page 84 17 EFFECT button This button displays an Effect page enabling you to edit the internal effects processors and use optional plug in cards see page 157 42 VIEW button This button displays a View page enabling you to view and set mix parameters for a specific channel see page 87 01V96 Owner s Manual Control Surface 19 LAYER Section LAYER gt 1 16 17 32 buttons These buttons select an Input Channel layer as the layer co
427. selected trajectory pattern Tip You can also adjust the front and rear or left and right movement the trajectory pattern and other parameters from an external MIDI device by assigning the surround parameters to MIDI Control Changes see page 216 6 To link the surround pan settings of two channels displayed on the page turn on the ST LINK button Use the PATTERN parameter box below the ST LINK button to specify how you want the linked surround pan to move 01V96 Owner s Manual Surround Panning 145 The following table shows how the sound images on two linked channels move when dif ferent trajectory patterns and stereo link patterns are combined A solid line indicates the movement of the selected channel and a dotted line indicates the movement of the linked partner 7 Tolist multiple channel surround pan settings press the PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Surr1 16 Surr17 32 or Surr ST IN page appears These pages display and enable you to edit the surround pan settings for 16 channels PAH ROUTE O Initial Data CH1 CH1 1 ued punong 1 Surround pan graphs These graphs display the trajectory patterns and the current pan positions for the Input Channels 01V96 Owner s Manual 146 Chapter 12 Surround 2 parameter box This parameter box enables you to move the surround pan setting of the selected chan nel left an
428. specifies the interval between data packets during bulk transmission in 50 millisecond steps If the external device drops part of the bulk data increase this parameter value 4 the CATEGORY section move the cursor to the button of the data type you want to transmit then press ENTER 01V96 Owner s Manual Transmitting Parameter Settings MIDI Bulk Dump 223 The following options are available uie This button selects all data available for bulk dump When this button is turned on all other buttons in this section are turned off SCENEMEM This button selects Scene memories You can select Scenes you wish to transmit in the parameter box next to the button LIBRARY This button selects libraries You can select the type of library in the TYPE parameter box next to the button then specify the library number in the parameter box on the right BANK noue This parameter enables you to select the User Defined Key banks KEYS UDEF User Defined Remote Layer banks RMD UDEF or User Assignable Layer banks USR LAYER for bulk dump You can select one of these three types in the parameter box next to the button and select the banks in the parameter box on the right SETUPMEM This button selects the 01V96 setup data i e system settings TABLE This button selects the MIDI Pgm Asgn page settings CIL TABLE
429. ss ENTER D TITLE EDIT This button displays the Title Edit window which enables you to edit the title of the selected memory Move the cursor to the OK button then press ENTER to confirm the edited title Refer to page 30 for more information on entering characters 2 RECALL This button recalls the contents of the selected library memory If you turn on the Recall Confirmation parameter on the DIO Setup Prefer1 page the 01 96 displays a memory recall confirmation window 8 STORE This button stores the settings to the selected memory Before you store the settings you can enter or edit the title using the Title Edit window Refer to page 30 for more infor mation on entering characters You can disable the Title Edit window by turning off the Store Confirmation parameter on the DIO Setup Prefer1 page If you bypass the Edit Title window the name New Data will be used as a title for the Scene memory 4 CLEAR This button deletes the contents of the selected memory After you press ENTER the 01V96 displays a confirmation window To execute the delete operation move the cur sor to the YES button in the confirmation window then press ENTER Note If you select a memory that already contains settings and execute the delete operation the settings will be lost Make sure that you do not accidentally delete important settings 01V96 Owner s Manual Using Libraries 173 Using Libraries Chann
430. ssage 00111000 38 8 ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA 01000011 43 C SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel 00111001 39 9 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 00110011 33 3 01001100 4C L DATA NAME 01010000 50 P 01001101 4D M 00000010 02 00100000 20 00000000 00 256 Current 00100000 20 BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt totalblock number minimum number is 0 00111000 38 8 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number 01000011 43 DATA Oddddddd ds Program change table data of block bb 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 Oddddddd de DATA 01010001 51 0 CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F Ommmmmmm mh 0 127 Library no 1 128 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive Ommmmmmm ml 256 Channel current data EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 14 Program change table bulk dump request format 2 8 2 17 Compressor library bulk dump format MEAE 11110000E message The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA O Library no 1 127 Library no 128 SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel 256 CH1 287 CH32 384 BUS1 391 BUS8 512 AUX1 519 AUX8 768 STE FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump REO 8192 UNDO 01001100 4c 256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer 01001101 4D M For reception by the
431. ssignable layer data of block bb ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F End of exclusive 2 8 2 10 User Assignable Layer bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01010101 00000000 Obbbbbbb 11110111 FO 43 2n 4 4D 20 20 38 43 39 33 55 00 bb F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump 4 n b 0 3 bank no 1 4 End of exclusive 2 8 2 11 Control change table bulk dump format STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW DATA NAME BLOCK INFO DATA CHECK SUM EOX 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01000011 00000010 00000000 Ottttttt Obbbbbbb 11110111 FO 43 0n 7E ch el 4c 4D 20 20 38 43 39 33 43 02 00 tt bb ds de ee F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump data count ch 128 cl No 256 Current total block number minimum number is 0 current block number 0 total block number Control ch
432. starts using the factory set tings 4 To reset the Operation Lock password to its initial setting in Step 2 move the cursor to the PASSWORD button then press ENTER The password is reset to 1234 If you do not take any action after the confirmation window appears the window automat ically closes and the 01V96 restarts without being initialized suon oun 01V96 Owner s Manual 240 Chapter 19 Other Functions Calibrating the Faders The 01V96 motorized fader positions may shift over time depending on the operating con ditions and environment You can correct the shifted faders using the Calibration function Make sure that the power to the 01V96 is turned off While holding down the ENTER button turn on the POWER ON OFF switch After a moment the 01V96 displays a message indicating that the calibration is in progress Calibration takes about two minutes It is important that you do not touch the faders while this message is displayed When calibration is finished the 01V96 displays a page that enables you to fine tune the fader position Follow the instructions on the display and lower all faders to then press ENTER Set faders 1 16 to 15 and the Stereo fader to 30 then press ENTER Set faders 1 16 to 0 then press ENTER Proceed to the next step without moving the Stereo fader this time Finally set faders 1 16 to 10 and the Stereo fader to 0 then press EN
433. store source is a single data item Effect is O Effect 1 3 Effect 4 If the store destination is 16383 Ox3FFF this indicates that the li brary data has been changed by a external cause such as bulk re ception only transmitted by the 01V96 2 8 3 13 Parameter change Function call response Library store recall Transmission If store recall is executed by a parameter change received from Studio Manager the result of execution is transmitted as the following parameter change STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n20 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 01010000 50 Function call response OOffffff ff function Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low DATA ch channel High cl channel Low ee result HH ee result HL ee result LH ee result LL EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 14 Parameter change Function call title Reception When this is received the title of the specified memory library will be changed If this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link the operation will be executed and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a parameter re sponse Transmission In response to a request this is transmitted with the device number
434. t 0 dB L to their initial values and sets the channel fader level to 0 dB i e nominal Input Patch Library The Input Patch library enables you to store and recall all Input Patch settings The library contains one preset memory and 32 user readable amp writable memories access the Input Patch library press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch IN LIB page appears For details on storing and recalling memories see General Library Operation on page 171 PRTCH Initial Data m H SH2 5714 cii cen IO 60 Qo INPUT PATCH LIBRARY LIBRARY TITLE B 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Input Patch preset memory 0 contains the following settings Input Channels 1 16 INPUT connectors 1 16 Input Channels 17 24 ADAT IN Channels 1 8 Input Channels 25 32 Slot Channels 1 8 ST IN Channels 1 4 Internal Effects Processor 1 4 Outputs 1 amp 2 01V96 Owner s Manual Using Libraries 175 Output Patch Library The Output Patch library enables you to store and recall all Output Patch settings The library contains one preset memory and 32 user readable amp writable memories To access the Output Patch library press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Out LIB page appears For details on storing and recalling memories see General Library Operation on page 171 PRTCH Initial Data _ a SH 57125713
435. t Channels 1 32 PRIR GRUP Initial Data STI2 5113 5714 CH1 CHI LINPUT COMP LINK INPUT 67 19 11 12 1214 15 16 171849 20 2122 2324 2526 2728 29 39 31 32 a w gt iN COMP A OUT COMP Z Out Comp page This page enables you to set Compressor links m p for Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 and Stereo Out PRIR GRUP Initial Data STI2 5113 ST 4 RUX1 RUX Es 0 Uu OUTPUT COMP LINK STEREO 1224 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5678 ESI IN COMP our comp f 2 Pressthe up or down Y cursor button to select a link to which you want to add channels Ting 12534 s 6 8 3 101112 12 14 15 16 12 17 12 19 20 21222324 215 25 27 228 23502122 4 x sjauueyD BuidnoiS 01V96 Owner s Manual 152 Chapter 13 Grouping Channels amp Linking Parameters 3 Press the SEL button for a channel you wish to add to the EQ or Compressor link The selected channel is marked with B and the channel is added to the link Example Input Channels 1 4 7 8 12 and 14 have been added to EQ link b er PUT h va 1S 1 12 19 20 21222324 29262728 29502122 4 Eos ee ede Bons Ge DER RR TRAUMA a Tip f you add one channel from a pair to a link the pair partner is automatically added to the link Y
436. t change appears Move the cursor to the YES button then press ENTER Tip Ifthe REMOTE parameter box is grayed out proceed to Steps 4 and 5 to set the TARGET parameter then return to Steps 2 and 3 4 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Remote page appears 5 Move the cursor to the TARGET parameter box rotate the Parameter wheel to select USER DEFINED then press ENTER The confirmation window for changing the setting appears Move the cursor to the YES button then press ENTER The display changes as follows DID SETUF O Initial Data E UIS STII EDITI k USER DEFINED od INITIALIZE 8 _ El 2 5 4 a i i LESER LERRH D TRANSMIT ENABLE DISABLE This button switches the MIDI Remote function between enable and disable 2 INITIALIZE This button resets the settings stored in the bank selected by the BANK parameter their default settings 3 BANK This parameter enables you to select one of four banks 01V96 Owner s Manual MIDI Remote Layer 205 4 ID SHORT LONG These parameters display the channel names The ID parameter displays the channel ID 01 16 for the currently controlled MIDI device 5 ON section This section displays the type of MIDI messages in hexadecimal or alphabet assigned to the ON buttons for the currently selected channels RMOI RM16 LATCH UNLATC
437. tching Banks 1 4 via the BANK 1 4 buttons pressing ENTER Tip You can reset the assignment to default by moving the cursor to the CLEAR button and Use the LAYER REMOTE button to assign or recall the User Assignable layer You can use the faders and ON buttons to control the assigned channels 01V96 Owner s Manual suon oun 230 Chapter 19 Other Functions Using the Oscillator The 01V96 features an Oscillator you can use for sound checks Follow the steps below to use the Oscillator 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS UTILITY button repeatedly until the Utility Oscillator page appears UTILITY Initial Data 5111 571251135714 1 1 0 oO ASSIGN eus 1 2 e 2 5 5 OE o E 2 5 32 E 5 2 8 stereo W E BURST HOISE SCILLRTOR CH STATUS BATTERY JA USER DEF E13 This page contains the following parameters D OSCILLATOR ON This parameter button turns the Oscillator on or off 2 WAVEFORM These parameter buttons select the Oscillator waveforms 3 LEVEL section The parameter control in this section sets the Oscillator output level 4 ASSIGN section The buttons in this section select the Oscillator output 2 Move the cursor to the button for the Oscillator output channel in the ASSIGN section then press ENTER you can select multiple channels 3 Move the cursor to one of the W
438. ted in Step 2 resets the corresponding band gain Pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL HIGH and LOW buttons simultaneously resets the Q frequency and gain for each band 01V96 Owner s Manual 92 Chapter 7 Input Channels Pairing Input Channels On the 01V96 you can pair adjacent odd even Input Channels or counterpart channels on Layer 1 and Layer 2 that share the same physical fader Faders and most parameters of paired channels are linked for stereo operation Paired channels linked parameters and non linked parameters that are available for independent control are listed below F SEL buttons Linked parameters Non linked parameters Input patches aders Insert patches Channel on off Output patches Insert on off Comp insert position Solo on off Phase Solo Safe Delay on off Aux on off Delay time Aux Send level Delay feedback Aux Sends as Pre or Post Delay mix Gate Routing Comp settings Pan Follow Pan EQ settings Surround pan Fader group Aux Send pan Mute group Balance Fade time Attenuators Recall Safe You can set this parameter for each channel independent Routing settings ly if the GANG button is turned off on the INS DLDLY DLY page You set this parameter for each channel independent ly on the EQ ATT page but the paired channel settings are linked on the EQ Edit and View pages
439. ter box for a tempo BPM setting appear below the DELAY SCALE parameter Setting the note and BPM settings in these parameter boxes enables you to set a delay time that synchronizes to the song tempo Gating Input Channels To set the Input Channel gates use the SEL buttons to select the desired Input Channel then press the DISPLAY ACCESS DYNAMICS button then press the F1 button The Dynamics Gate Edit page appears DYNAMICS CHi CHi GATE EDIT 0 0 O THRESHOLD RANGE 26 8dB 5 DECRY HOLD 384ms i 2 35ms RTTRCK Gms LIBE A COMP EDIT fA COMP LIB 1 KEYIN SOURCE Select one of the following buttons to determine the trigger source for the cur rently selected Input Channel s gate e SEDE The selected channel s own input signal is the trigger source CHANNEL Another Channel s input signal is the trigger source Select the desired channel in the parameter box below the CHANNEL button AUX Lcid An Aux Send signal is the trigger source Select the desired bus in the parameter box below the AUX button 2 STEREO LINK This parameter s ON OFF button enables you to pair gates for stereo operation even when the Input Channels are not paired 8 CURVE This area displays the current gate curve 4 TYPE This area displays the current gate type GATE or DUCKING Note You c
440. the controls on the top panel Tip You can recall Scenes by transmitting Program Changes from external MIDI devices see page 215 You back up Scene memories to external MIDI devices by using MIDI Bulk Dump see page 222 What is Stored in a Scene The following parameter settings are stored in a Scene Scene Parameters All channel faders and level controls Channel to Aux Out 1 8 Send levels Aux Out 1 8 amp Bus Out 1 8 levels All channel ON button settings channel Phase settings channel Attenuator settings Mix parameters channel Delay settings excluding ST IN Channels All channel Compressor settings excluding ST IN Channels Input channel Gate settings excluding ST IN Channels All channel EQ settings All channel Pan settings channel routings Fader groups Mute groups EQ links and Compressor links channel pair settings Effect programs recalled for Effects processors 1 4 and their parameter set Effects parameters tings Fader and ON button status only when Remote Control Target is set to Remote Layer USER DEFINED Scene settings Scene titles and Fade Time settings Input Patching Currently selected Input Patch library number Output Patching Currently selected Output Patch library number Note Scenes take a snapshot of Input and Output Patch library numbers that are
441. the Edit Buffer will be bulk dumped If this is 8192 the data of the Undo Buffer will be bulk dumped 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA 01010011 53 5 00000010 02 00000000 00 No 256 Current EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive STATUS 11110000 0 System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01001100 4C L 01001101 4D M 2 8 2 5 User Defined MIDI Remote bulk dump format 00100000 20 The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number 00100000 20 Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will in some cases 00111000 38 8 change if the same bank is being used 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01101101 6D m STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump DIR A PURER ORDO COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 cl Ommmmmmm ml COUNT LOW cl EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 01001100 4C L 01001101 4D M 2 8 2 3 Setup memory bulk dump format 00100000 20 Of the setup memory of the 01V96 this bulk dumps data other than the User 00100000 20 define layer User define plug in User define keys Control change ta
442. the HIGH sec tion is set to LPF It functions as a shelving type EQ when the parameter is set to H SHELF 3 Move the cursor to the desired parameter then rotate the Parameter wheel to change the value Tip The EQ settings for the ST IN Channels L amp R are linked to each other You can also press the buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to select the desired band and use the rotary controls to directly edit the and parameters see page 91 You can store the EQ settings in the EQ library which features preset programs that can be used for various applications see page 274 Panning Input Channels Input Channels be in the range of L63 through CENTER to R63 To pan each channel press the PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Pan page appears PRN ROUTE Initial Data gen 5112 5713 STI4 CHI CHT IO 00 UO 2 mone E INPUT D Sjouueu 1ndul IN z 3 4 5 6 7 S 1L 1R CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER L63 R53 1 11 4 15 6 21 2R CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER L63 17 18 19 28 21 22 23 24 SL 3R CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER L63 R63 25 26 27 28 23 51 52 CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER L63 um PRH fi ROUTI 16 fiROUT1T STIfi BUS TO ST eji Move the curs
443. the combinations of channel numbers displayed on the page also change Note When Pair mode is switched only the channel numbers change The mix parameters of the paired partners do not change For example if you change Pair mode from Horizontal to Vertical the Input Channel 2 indication changes to Input Channel 17 However its parameters do not change If Chan nels 1 and 2 have been paired switching the mode will pair Channels 1 and 17 3 Move the cursor to the desired channel s MONOx2 button 2 then press ENTER The channels are paired 4 To cancel a pair move the cursor to the desired channel s STEREO button then press ENTER Tip Youcan also create or cancela pair of Output Channels in the same way on the Pair Grup Output page see page 105 Naming Input Channels By default Input Channels are named CH1 CH2 etc You can change these names if desired For example it may be helpful for mixdown if you name a particular Input Chan nel with the type of musical instrument connected to the corresponding input jack 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch IN Name page appears PRTCH Initial Data 8 511257135714 CH1 CHI O00 GO E Input Auto Cory h ID SHORT LONG CH CCH gt CH gt CH gt CHE CHG gt CH6 gt lt gt CHS CCHS gt lt CHS gt lt CHS gt CH4 4 gt gt CH
444. the left and right channels When the left channel is selected the AUX 7 button indicator lights up and the SELECT ASSIGN parameter on the display indicates Pan When the right channel is selected the AUX 7 button indicator flashes and the SELECT ASSIGN parameter indicates PanR Note Before you adjust monaural channel panpots first be sure the AUX 7 button indicator is illuminated steadily If the indicator is flashing operating the PAN control will be inef fective 4 Adjust the selected channel panpot using the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN control 5 Toreset the corresponding channel panpot to center move the cursor to the parameter control on the display then press and hold down the AUX 6 button and press ENTER You can reset the pan settings only when the AUX 7 button indicator is lit steadily Soloing Channels To solo Pro Tools channels press the SOLO buttons of the desired channels Grouped channels are soloed together and other channels are muted Press the SOLO buttons again to unsolo the channels Configuring Sends A E as Pre or Post You set Pro Tools channels for the selected Sends to pre or post 1 Press the F3 button to select Channel Display mode 01V96 Owner s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 197 2 Pressthe FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 5 buttons to select the desired Sends 3 Totoggle between pre and post move the cursor to the parameter cont
445. the rear panel Inputs are selected in pairs odd and even numbers in this order SOM GIN S This button selects the wordclock signal input at the WORD CLOCK IN connector on the rear panel s 2TRDZi eene This button selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL input as the word clock source INT 44 1k INT 48k INT 88 2k INT 96k These buttons select the internal clock generator as the word clock source The 01V96 will function as the wordclock master Note To transfer data at higher sampling frequencies 88 2 kHz or 96 kHz between the 01V96 and connected external devices you need to set the data transfer format For more infor mation see page 72 Tip If wordclock transfer is interrupted while the 01V96 being used as a slave unit is receiv ing the clock signal the unit automatically switches to the closest internal clock signal INT 44 1k INT 48k INT 88 2k or INT 96k 01V96 Owner s Manual Input and Output Patching 43 Input and Output Patching The 01V96 is designed to enable you to patch assign signals to Inputs and Outputs This section explains how to view the signals patched to Inputs and Outputs and change the assignment Tip If the data from a connected instrument fails to be input or if you are unable to monitor the signal at the desired output check the I O patching as explained below Patching Input Channels By default the Input Channels are patched as follows
446. them using on board EQ compressor etc then routes them to the STEREO OUT and 2TR OUT connectors The following diagram illustrates the Stereo Out signal flow Gain Reduction Out Meter METER METER L 4 10dBV 2TR OUT R 54 METER INSERT METER INSERT INSERT METER ON LEVEL BAL 4BAND a OUTPUT oso P Same as stereo master L VV OUTPUT PATCH STEREO L STEREO R L 4dBu STEREO OUT R W 5 W 5 sino sng INSERT This section enables you to route the Stereo Out signals to external devices via the on board connectors or I O card or insert internal effects processors Attenuator This section enables you to attenuate or amplify the level of signals to be input to the EQ The attenuator prevents post EQ signals from clipping or corrects signal levels that are too low 4 BAND EQ 4 equalizer This parametric EQ features four bands HIGH HIGH MID LOW MID and LOW COMP Compressor This dynamics processor can be used as compressor expander or limiter The processor can be located pre EQ pre STEREO fader or post STEREO fader ON On Off This button turns the Stereo Out on or off LEVEL The STEREO fader adjusts the Stereo Out output levels Balance This section enables you to adjust the level balance between the L and
447. tial Track Recording 57 e Q This parameter control specifies the Q slope for cut boost of the center frequency set via the F parameter control The setting range is between 10 and 0 10 The smaller the value the steeper the slope becomes This parameter control also selects the type of EQ for the LOW and HIGH band F Frequency This parameter control specifies the center frequency for cut boost with a setting range of 21 2 Hz to 20 0 kHz e Gain This parameter control specifies the cut boost amount in the range of 18 0 dB to 18 0 dB The LOW and HIGH GAIN controls function as filter on off controls when Q is set to HPF and LPF respectively You can also press the buttons HIGH HIGH MID SELECTED CHANNEL LOW MID LOW in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to select the desired band and use the rotary controls Q FRE QUENCY GAIN to directly edit the Q F and G parameters PAN EQUALIZER Tip Turn the Q parameter control for the LOW band clockwise all the way to set the LOW band EQ to L SHELF low shelving and counter clockwise all the way to set it to HPF high pass filter Turn the parameter control for the HIGH band clockwise all the way to set the HIGH band EQ to H SHELF high shelv ing and counter clockwise all the way to set it to LPF low pass filter By default the LOW band is set to L SHELE and the HIGH band is set
448. to 10 SHORT LONG AUX CAUX gt lt AUX gt lt AUX gt AUXG CAUXB gt lt AUXB gt lt AUXG gt AUXS CAUXS gt lt AUXS gt lt AUXS gt AUX4 CAUX4 gt RUX4 RUX4 gt AUXS CAUXS gt lt AUXS gt lt AUXS gt RUX2 RUX2 gt RUX2 lt gt AUX 1 gt lt 1 gt lt 2 ESIADIRECT ZIR OUT OUT NAME A OUT LIB The procedure for editing the names and using the Name Input Auto Copy check box and the INITIALIZE button is the same as on the In Name page Setting Preferences You can change the default settings and environmental settings of the 01V96 by using the DIO Setup Prefer1 and Prefer2 pages To locate one of the Preferences page press the DIS PLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly Prefer1 page This page enables you to set the 01V96 so that when you press a button on the top panel the 01V96 displays the corresponding display page and shows or hides confirmation and alarm messages D10 SETUP Initial Data BELI 5112 5113 5114 CHI CHI IO GO Ey auto PAN Disrlas E MIDI Warnins J Auto EQUALIZER Disrlas Initial Data Nominal Auto SOLO Disrlay Scene MEM Ruto Urdate Auto WORD CLOCK Diselas Cascade COMM Link Auto Channel Select Auto Direct Out On J Store Confirmation Recall Confirmation Patch Confirmation Pair Confirmation L R Nominal Pan Fast Meter Fall Time J DIO Warnings WORD CLOCK FORMAT
449. to H SHELF LU 0 I E 5 Q 5 6 In the same way adjust the EQ for the other channels Tip The meters in the upper right corner of the page indicate the post EQ signal levels of the currently selected Input Channel If these meters reach the OVER position lower the pre EQ signal level using the ATT parameter control located in the upper left on the page Youcan also apply EQ to the Input Channel signals returned from the recorder In this way you can process only the monitoring signals without affecting the signals being recorded to the recorder You can use the EQ settings programs in the provided EQ library for various applications and instruments Compressing the Input Signals The 01V96 s Input Channels 1 32 feature individual channel compressors This section describes how to compress the signals before they are recorded to the tracks 1 Press the LAYER 1 16 button Input Channel Layer 1 16 is now available for control from the channel strip section 2 Pressthe SEL button of the Input Channel to which you want to apply com pression 01V96 Owner s Manual 58 Chapter 5 Tutorial 3 Press the DYNAMICS button then press the F4 button The Dynamics Comp Lib page appears This page enables you to store compressor settings programs to the Compressor library
450. to the ON OFF button in the INSERT section and press ENTER to turn it on or off 01V96 Owner s Manual Insert Patching 129 Viewing and Changing Insert In Patch You can view and also change the items patched to the Insert Ins of all Input Channels or all Output Channels This is useful when you wish to find out if multiple channels have the same patch To view the Input Channels Insert Ins press the PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Input Ins page appears This page displays Input Channels 1 32 Insert In Patches PRTCH Initial Dat Qoo IN PATCH INPUT INS A EFFECT JACASCADE INE I3 rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the Move the cursor to a channel patch parameter box you wish to change then patching Press ENTER to confirm the change To view the Output Channels Insert Ins press the PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Output Ins page appears PRTCH Initial Data CH1 CH1 OO iam k 1 5 ESI IN NAME IN LIBE OUT PATCH INS gt 13 Move the cursor to a channel patch parameter box you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the patching Press ENTER to confirm the change 01V96 Owner s Manual 130 Chapter 10 1 amp Output Patchin
451. ton to turn the EQ on or off as long as the cursor is located on any parameter other than TYPE 2 TYPE Selects the type of EQ TYPE Lis the EQ type used on legacy Yamaha 02R series digital mixing consoles TYPE II is a newly developed algorithm 3 ATT Determines the amount of pre EQ signal attenuation in dB It is the same Attenuator parameter that appears on the EQ ATT In page 4 CURVE This area displays the current EQ curve 5 Meters These meters indicate the post EQ signal levels of the currently selected Input Channel and its available pair partner 6 LOW L MID H MID HIGH sections These sections contain the Q Frequency F and Gain G parameters for the four bands These parameter values range as follows Parameter LOW LOW MID HIGH MID HIGH HPF 10 0 to 0 10 LPF 10 0 to 0 10 Q 41 steps L SHELF 10 0 te CNOA steps 41 steps H SHELF Frequency 21 2 Hz to 20 0 kHz 120 steps per 1 12 octave Gain 18 0 dB to 18 0 dB 0 1 dB steps 1 The LOW and HIGH GAIN controls function as filter on off controls when Q is set to HPF or LPF respectively 01V96 Owner s Manual Setting the Input Channels from the Display 85 Tip TheLOW band EQ functions as a high pass filter when the Q parameter in the LOW section is set to HPF It functions as shelving type EQ when the parameter is set to L SHELE The HIGH band EQ functions as a low pass filter when the Q parameter in
452. tput patch STEREO BUS1 8 AUX 1 8 DIRECT OUT 1 32 INSERT OUT CH 1 32 BUS 1 8 AUX 1 8 STEREO CASCADE OUT BUS 1 8 AUX 1 8 STEREO SOLO Option Output SLOT Available card Optional digital interface card MY16 MY8 MYA series Dither On off Word length 16 20 24 bit Output patch STEREO BUS1 8 AUX 1 8 DIRECT OUT 1 32 INSERT OUT CH 1 32 BUS 1 8 AUX 1 8 STEREO CASCADE OUT BUS 1 8 AUX 1 8 STEREO SOLO On off Comp type Pre EQ pre fader post fader Attenuator 96 0 to 412 0 dB 0 1 dB step EQ 4 band PEQ On off On off ET STEREO Fader 100 mm motorized Balance 127 positions Left 1 63 Center Right 1 63 Delay 0 29100 samples Displayed on LCD Metering Peak hold on off 12 elements x2 LED meters 4 On off Comp type Pre fader post fader Attenuator 96 0 to 412 0 dB 0 1 dB step EQ 4 band PEQ On off On off BUS1 8 Fader 100 mm motorized Delay 0 29100 samples Bus to stereo Level e 138 dB 0 dB On off Pan 127 positions Left 1 63 Center Rightz1 63 Metering Displayed on LCD Peak hold on off 01V96 Owner s Manual 286 Appendix B Specifications 4 On off Comp type Pre EQ pre fader post fader Attenuator 96 0 to 412 0 dB 0 1 dB step EQ 4 band PEQ On off AUX1 8
453. ts 9 Setting Aux Send Levels 113 Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple 8 117 Parning AuxsSendS a Slee eei 119 Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux 120 10 Input amp Output Patching 121 Input Patching wld viel ee 121 Output Patch ge sso cece desees unto i a 123 Patching Direct hee Das ep AE RN 125 Insert Patching a eese tese tet e e eres 127 Monitoring 2 Rr hg Re Re TE es 131 MODILOE a a alas dete m e e C ER ES 131 Monitor and Solo Setup 132 Using the ueste eee vere EAR SABER ELT S 133 Using the Solo Foncion ys s Rer lulu pisya SEP VENUS 134 12 Surround Pan 135 Using Surround Due p Net Dee eet 135 Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes 136 Surround Panning rere te be Pe et ne HER ue eb ees 141 13 Grouping Channels amp Linking Parameters 147 Grouping amp Linking assays din AP ee whe per ERAS 147 Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups 148 Linking EQ
454. turns the Stereo Out on or off and links with the ON button in the STE REO section 01V96 Owner s Manual Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 from the Display 103 3 Fader This fader adjusts the Stereo Out output levels and links with the STEREO fader The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0 0 dB Bus Out 1 8 Fader page gusi eus OO ai G en CD ON OFF This button turns the currently selected Bus Out 1 8 on or off and links with the ON 9 16 button in the Master layer 2 Fader This fader sets the currently selected Bus Out 1 8 level and links with the fader 9 16 in the Master layer The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0 0 dB 8 TO ST PAN This control sets the Bus Out to Stereo Out Pan position for the currently selected Bus Out 1 8 4 TO ST ON OFF This button turns on or off the Bus Out to Stereo Out signal for the currently selected Bus Out 1 8 5 TO ST Fader This fader sets the Bus Out to Stereo Out signal level for the currently selected Bus Out 1 8 sino sng Tip The TO ST PAN and TO ST Fader parameters also appear on the Pan Route Bus to St page 01V96 Owner s Manual 104 Chapter 8 Bus Outs Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 from the Control Surface You can use the faders SEL buttons and various buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL se
455. um number is 0 COUNT LOW cl Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number 01001100 4c LU DATA Oddddddd ds Output patch Library data of block bb 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 0ddddddd de 00100000 20 CHECK SUM ee ece Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F 00111000 38 8 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 2 8 2 28 Output patch library bulk dump request format 00110011 33 3 The second and third bytes ofthe DATA NAME indicate the bank number See DATA NAME 01010010 52 R above Ommmmmmm mh 0 32 patch Library no 0 32 STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message Ommmmmmm ml 256 Current data ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump DATA Oddddddd ds Input patch Library data of block bb 01001100 4c U 5 01001101 4D M Oddddddd de SUB STATUS 0010 2n 0 15 Device numberzMIDI Channel 00100000 20 CHECK SUM ee ee Invert Der e e IME 00100000 20 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 00111000 38 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01001111 4F O Ommmmmmm mh 0 32 Output patch Library no 0 32 Ommmmmmm ml 256 Current data EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 01V96 Owner s Manual 316 Appendix C MIDI 2
456. urce Input channels and the corresponding Aux Sends in a matrix The parameters on these two pages and the procedure for setting them are the same RUX iti SLL 5112 5113 5114 00 O DISPLRY FREZEOST 1 gt a LEVEL co dB PAN vigui ie ARUTEHTT STT 1 DISPLAY Use the following buttons to display the desired parameters Select the LEVEL button to display Send level bar graphs for Input Channels routed to Aux 1 8 PRE POST Select the PRE POST button to display signal source points for Input Channels routed to Aux 1 8 2 FIX VARI These buttons indicate the Aux mode Fixed or Variable for Aux Out 1 8 and are only for display purposes 3 LEVEL This field displays in dB the level of the Aux Send currently selected by the cursor 2 Move the cursor to either the DISPLAY LEVEL or PRE POST button then press ENTER to display the Level or Pre Post parameters 01V96 Owner s Manual 118 Chapter 9 Aux Outs 3 Ifyouselected the PRE POST button in Step 2 move the cursor to the desired Input Channel and Aux intersection then press the ENTER button to change the signal source point r INPUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011121314151 DA DA DA Note You can switch between Pre and Post only for Aux Sends that set to Vari
457. us and Aux Send linked parameters and non linked parameters that are available for independent controls are listed below Linked parameters SEL buttons Non linked parameters Output Patching Fader Channel on off Insert Patching Delay on off Insert on off Delay time Solo on off Bus to Stereo Comp settings Attenuators Comp insert position You can set this parameter for each channel independent EQ settings ly if the GANG button is turned off on the INS DLDLY Fader group DLY page Mute group You can set this parameter for each channel independent Fade ti ly on the EQ ATT page but the paired channel settings HORS are linked on the EQ Edit and View pages Recall safe Bus to Stereo on off Bus to Stereo fader Parameters marked with an asterisk are available only for Bus Outs sino sng 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAIR GROUP button repeatedly until the Pair Grup Output page appears PAIR GRUP Initial Data 5211 5112 STIS 5714 BUST OO CENA e FOUTPUT PAIR SURROUND MODE 1 2 4 5 9 6 785 R Ls Rs LFE RUX 167 2 3 4 5 67 5 78595 MEA L R Ls Rs Bs LFE 5 FoLLou SURROUND INPUT A OUTPUT IN FADER ZX IN MUTE 251 The parameters on this page are described below D STEREO MONOx2 These buttons turn Bus or Aux
458. ut configuration 3 1 Surround 5 1 Surround Buse ued punong Fy Press the ENTER button The confirmation window for changing the Surround mode appears CONF RMAT ON Chanse Surround Mode Move the cursor to the YES button then press ENTER The 01V96 enters the selected Surround mode To link the Input Channel Pan setting with the stereo surround panning move the cursor to the PAN SURR LINK button then press ENTER When the PAN SURR LINK button is turned on adjusting the Input Channel pan settings will also change the stereo surround panning accordingly and vice versa 01V96 Owner s Manual 138 Chapter 12 5 Pan 6 To change the Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment move the cursor to the SURR BUS SETUP button then press ENTER The DIO Setup Surr Bus page appears STI1 STI2 STI3 5714 p10 SETUP O Initial Data CH1 CH1 1 BUS1 BUS8 These parameters select channels to be assigned to the Bus Outs in 3 1 5 1 and 6 1 Sur round modes 2 INIT These buttons reset the channel assignment to the default setting 8 Surround LR to Stereo When this check box is on the left and right front signals of the surround channels are out put from the STEREO L amp R connectors 7 change the assignment move the cursor to the desired Bus parameter rotate the Parameter wheel to select a channel then press ENTER The channe
459. ware Features 100 mm motorized faders x 17 Faders set levels for Input Channels Aux send levels and Bus Outs Four selectable software layers determine the function of channel faders 320x240 dot LCD display Buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section enable direct editing of channel EQ parameters 8 USER DEFINED KEYS enable you to assign functions to control 01V96 internal parameters optical connectors Expansion slot for optional digital I O AD and DA cards Sonic Specifications Linear 24 bit 128 times oversampling A D converters Linear 24 bit 128 times oversampling D A converters 20 Hz through 40 kHz frequency response at 96 kHz sampling rate 106 dB typical dynamic range 32 bit internal signal processing 58 bit accumulator Inputs and Outputs 12 mic line inputs with switchable 48 V phantom power and 4 line inputs 12 analog inserts Any Bus Outs or Channel Inserts can be routed to four Omni Outs Individual outputs for Stereo Out and Monitor Out Analog 2TR In and Out for use with Tape In and Out signals Anoptional card installed in the slot permits a maximum of 16 inputs outputs Digital 2TR In and Out for consumer format digital audio signals Double Channel support for recording and playing at 88 2 96 kHz on 44 1 48 kHz leg acy multi track digital recorders You can cascade two 01V96s while remaining in the digital domain Input
460. wer 17th Floor Ratchadaphisek RD Dindaeng Bangkok 10320 Thailand Tel 02 641 2951 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty Ltd Level 1 99 Queensbridge Street Southbank Victoria 3006 Australia Tel 3 9693 5111 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2313 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2441 YAMAHA Yamaha Manual Library http www2 yamaha co jp manual english This document is printed on recycled U R G Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Yamaha Corporation chlorine free ECF paper with soy ink 2003 Yamaha Corporation WA84540 310IPAP2 3 03C0 Printed in Japan
461. with the recording stop the playback and disarm Tracks 1 8 on the recorder 01V96 Owner s Manual 60 Chapter 5 Tutorial Tip If the digital MTR supports MMC MIDI Machine Control commands you can use the 01 96 Machine Control function to select tracks or locate a position on the recorder from the 01V96 see page 208 Overdubbing to Other Tracks This section describes how to overdub the musical instruments or microphone connected to the INPUT connectors 1 and 2 to the digital MTR s Tracks 9 and 10 while listening to the performance recorded on Tracks 1 8 Setting the Input Levels 1 Connect the musical instruments to INPUT connectors 1 and 2 and adjust the corre Pap J PAD switch sponding PAD switches and GAIN con x trols so that the PEAK indicators C3 d eem temporarily flash at the highest volumes NER GAIN ZZ Qpeax PEAK indicator Press the LAYER 1 16 button Input Channel Layer 1 16 is now available for control from the channel strip section Press the DISPLAY ACCESS HOME button then press the F1 button to dis play the Meter CH1 32 page METER Initial Data m SH1 571257135714 Eng UO oO POSITION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 15 14 15 16 F FP a 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 ur 2 A ZT iN NASIER EFFECT Make sure that ON button indicators for the chan
462. x signals recorded on Tracks 1 16 into a stereo signal then apply the 01V96 s internal effects to the signal then record it to an external master recorder Connecting and Setting Up the Master Recorder Follow the steps below to connect a DAT recorder MD recorder CD recorder or other mas ter recorder to the 01V96 Change the 01V96 s internal patch so that you can monitor the playback signal on the master recorder through ST IN Channel 2 Connect a master recorder to the 01V96 In the following example the 01V96 2TR OUT DIGITAL connector is connected to the master recorder s digital input and the 01V96 2TR IN DIGITAL connector is connected to the master recorder s digital output DIGITAL 2TR OUT DIGITAL IN Master recorder connector connector eum 2TR IN DIGITAL DIGITAL gogo connector 556 connector goog goog 5 Oooo ua Tip To monitor the master recorder s playback signals can also connect the analog output of the master recorder to the 01 V96 2TR IN connector In this way you can quickly switch the monitoring signal usi
463. y before EQ default PREFADER Immediately before the fader POSTFADER Immediately after the fader 2 STEREO LINK This ON OFF button enables you to pair compressors for stereo operation even when channels are not paired 3 CURVE This area displays the current compressor curve 4 TYPE This field indicates the compressor type used by the currently selected channel s com pressor COMP EXPAND COMP H COMP 5 Note You cannot change the Compressor type on this page To change the compressor type recall a program that uses the desired compressor type from the compressor library 01V96 Owner s Manual Setting the Input Channels from the Display 83 5 Meters These meters indicate the levels of the post compressor signals and the amount of gain reduction 6 ON OFF The ON OFF button turns the currently selected Input Channel s compressor on or off 7 PARAMETER section These controls enable you to set the compressor parameters See page 278 for more information on the parameters of each compressor type Tip This function is unavailable for the ST IN Channels You can store the compressor settings in the compressor library which features preset pro grams that can be used for various applications see page 181 Attenuating Input Channels To set the attenuator for each Input Channel press the DISPLAY ACCESS EQ button then press the
464. ymphonic effects in parallel Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency REV SYM 0 100 balance 0 all reverb 100 all FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ ly FMF k h 4402 D J J d J REV gt SYMPHO One input two output reverb and symphonic effects in series Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF THRU 21 2 2 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 0 2 16 0 kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and symphonic reverb balance 0 all symphonic REV BAL M cod reverb reverb dbi FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF

Yamaha MIXING CONSOLE Musical Instrument User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents